Contents
1. Submitted Maps eel Search here for maps that have been submitted and are pending for approval Modify Approve or Remove submitted mappings here own am Coean Approve Delete Note For performance reasons such as a database connection cache with a five minute expiration period it can take up to five minutes for changes made using the Form Filler Administration to be reflected in the system 8 5 1 5 Configuring the Input Parameters for the Form Filler Module To configure the input parameters for this application The Form Filler application includes the following optional input parameters which do not require configuration a ORACLE SERVICES_COMMERCE_FORMFILLER_HEURISTIC a Description A fully qualified classname of the Form Filler guessing heuristic class used if a user wants to override the default guessing implementation a Valid Values Empty to use the default guessing heuristic class package formfiller myGuessingHeuristic a Default Value Empty 8 80 Administrator s Guide m Commerce Applications a Customizability Users must customize this value only if they want to override the default heuristic mechanism a ORACLE _SERVICES_COMMERCE_FORMFILLER_SUGGESTIONS_ lt label_ key or variable_key gt lt Wallet lt compartment gt lt field gt gt a Description A suggestion that corresponds to the label or variable in the key Whenever Form Filler receives lt label_key2. 4 Postalcode quality 5 City quality 6 County quality 7 State quality 8 Country quality 11 Unknown quality a LOCATIONMASK Mandatory No Description The mask used to specify which location fields will be available when entering a new location Valid Value An integer derived by the bitwise ORing together with the integer values for all of the desired the location fields The values are defined as follows COMPANYNAME_ FIELD 1 FIRSTLINE_FIELD 2 SECONDLINE_FIELD 4 LASTLINE_FIELD 8 BLOCK_FIELD 16 CITY_FIELD 32 COUNTY_FIELD 64 STATE_FIELD 128 COUNTRY_FIELD 256 POSTALCODE_FIELD 512 POSTALCODEEXT_FIELD 1024 LAT_FIELD 2048 LNG_FIELD 4096 Examples LOCATIONMASK 14 address line 1 address line 2 address last line LOCATIONMASK 162 address line 1 city state Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 71 Location a MOD a Mandatory No Optional a Description This parameter is used to specify a condition on the returned location For example if the user only wants to choose among the named location for example Location Marks then use MOD LM If unspecified the default mode will be used for example all available locations will be offered as choices a Valid Value LM Allows to choose among existing Location Marks or create new ones a Example MOD LM Output Parameters Table 8 37 describes the output parameters for the Locati
3. C By Usage Time The usage time is the total value from the following fields Number of Years Cc Number of Months i C trt OC Number of Days Number of Hours a Number of Minutes By Usage Count Number of Usages fio Init Properties meg subfix msg expire This application has expired msg prefix This application will expire after Step 2 Entering the Digital Rights Policy Detail Attributes If you selected the Default Package then you must specify the following attributes A name for the digital rights policy This is a required parameter a A description for this digital rights policy This is an optional parameter Selecting the Usage Policy You can opt to limit the number of times that a user can execute a downloaded J2ME application by defining the values for the Usage Time or Usage Count options For the Usage Time option specify the number of years months days hours or minutes that the user can execute the downloaded application Define the Usage Count option by specifying the number of times that a user can execute a downloaded J2ME application Managing Foundation Services 7 27 Managing Digital Rights P olicies Entering the Initialization Properties Each time that the user executes an application a message displays on the user s device informing the user of the number of times or the amount of time that the user has to access the application To c
4. Root Folders and Applications Use this page to create application links which enable an application to be published to user groups i Delete X Categorize X Move X Debug X Edit Sequence Commerce 1827 N A EM true 0 Guests February 5 2003 1 55 09 PM PST T ji p a i 01 Location 1832 N A Eil true 0 February 5 2003 1 55 29 PM PST eM 1837 N A EN true 0 February 5 2003 1 55 47 PM PST Studio 261 N A Gl true a March 7 2003 5 47 27 PM PST limon e 1853 Main Menu W false D Users February 28 2003 5 04 10 PM PST aj A 2 o 2533 NA a true g 0 February 27 2003 7 38 14 PM PST E A b_test 2544 N A E l false 0 March 7 2003 5 09 37 PM PST a A tb 2554 N A l false 0 March 7 2003 5 47 11 PM PST Add Folder Add Bookmark Add Application 5 3 Managing Application Links The Publish Content tab of the Content Manager enables you to manage application links bookmarks and folders Clicking the Publish Content tab displays the browsing screen for application links When you first access the Publish Content tab after logging in the browsing screen displays the folders and applications at the root level Figure 5 2 Using this screen you can search for folders bookmarks and application links including applications modules and Async applications Clicking the Add Application button in this screen you can access a wizard that
5. IIS In Process IIS Applications Out Of Pro IIS Utilities System Application workflow Event Sink 4 Right click the COM Applications folder Integrating Wireless Notification with Microsoft Exchange 17 7 Configuring the Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server 5 Select New and then Application 6 Click Next on the Welcome window The Install or Create a New Application windows appears Figure 17 5 Figure 17 5 Install or Create a New Application Welcome to the COM Application Install Wizard Install or Create a New Application Please choose whether you want to install a pre built application or create an empty application Install pre built application s SS Create an empty application Computer My Computer Cancel 7 Select Create to create an empty application from the Install or Create a New Application Window The Create an Empty Application window appears Figure 17 6 17 8 Administrator s Guide Configuring the Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server Figure 17 6 Create Empty Application Welcome to the COM Application Install Wizard Create Empty Application Please specify the name of the new application 8 Enter Notification Event Sink as the name for the new application Be sure that Server application is the Activation type 9 Click Next The Set Application Identity window appears Figure 17 7 Integrating Wireless Notification with Microso
6. Specifies whether the service should attempt to send the message with the given information The service does not send the message unless it has been instructed to do so The values include EMAIL for sending email messages a SMS for sending a SMS message a VOICE for sending a message through a phone a FAX for sending a message through a facsimile A string For example n destinationAddress 6505555000 7 dest inationAddress oraclemobil oracle com A String For example n subjectText Hi There n subjectText Tomorrow Night A String For example bodyText Do not forget to pick up the children on the way home And buy dinner too Specify Yes if the service should send the message Specify No if the service should not send the message Output Parameters Examples An example of the short message output parameters is sending a simple message For example Sending an Email To send an email configure the input parameters as follows 8 56 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail 8 3 9 Tasks type EMAIL destinationAddress friend oracle com subjectText Hey there bodyText How s it going sendMessage yes Sending a Voice Message To send a voice message configure the input parameters as follows type Voice destinationAddress 6505555000 The Tasks application enables users to schedule and manage tasks Required Software This application implements two distinct modes both
7. Usually with SMS the sender of an SMS message is charged With ReverseCharge however the party receiving the message is charged a transport fee and a service premium The amount of the service premium depends upon which service the mobile user requests each service has its own associated tariff class To ensure the correct billing information the application provider supplies the ReverseCharge operator with the Large Account and the tariff class of the service upon generating the service result SMS message RMI Remote Method Invocation A standard for creating and calling remote objects RMI allows Java components stored in a network to be run remotely sample repository The initial Wireless repository which includes pre built objects such as transformers adapters and logical devices Service Manager The visual interface for creating and managing Wireless users user groups adapters transformers and services Simple Result format A content format that contains abstract user interface elements such as text items menus forms and tables source format The original format of content retrieved from an external data source by a Wireless adapter For example the source format of Web page content is HTML Strip adapter An adapter that retrieves and adapts Web content dynamically strip level The class used by the strip adapter to process markup tags in source content SQL adapter An adapter that retrieves and adapts
8. a Valid Values A string value a Default Value orcladmin a Examples orcladmin a Oracle Internet Directory OID Administrator Password The password for the administrator s account in the OID server This is required only for the Oracle UM Unified Messaging address book in a standalone configuration a Valid Values A password for the OID administrator user a Default Value empty a Examples welcome1 cryptic password a Account Name If sharing login authentication information with the Calendar application specify the same string value as entered for Account Name in the Calendar and Tasks applications a Valid Values Any string value a Default Value OraAddressBookCalDomain a Examples mydomain sharedAccount a Exchange Data URL 8 10 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail This should point to the ASP page AddressBook asp that fetches the data from the Exchange Server required for MS Exchange configuration a Valid Values A URL pointing to AddressBook asp on the MS IIS server a Default Value http Nocalhost oracle AddressBook asp a Examples http myiis mycomp com oracle Address Book asp http iis server abc com oracle AddressBook asp Path to ORACLE_HOME The complete system path to the ORACLE_HOME where the Wireless middle tier is installed a Valid Values A fully qualified path to ORACLE_HOME a Default Value empty a Examples private home Yias mid C 9iasmid Async Contact Separator The valid s
9. See Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide for more information on multimedia adaptation 3 6 2 3 Async Listener You configure the following for the Async Listener component Managing the Wireless Server 3 43 Site Administration Access Points An access point is the address monitored by Async Listener is configured to listen such as ask mycompany com for e mail or 1234567 for SMS From the Add Access Point page accessed by clicking the Add Access Point button in the Access Point page you can use the Allowed to Access All Applications option to create two types of access points a Site access point An address that enables access to all the Async applications Select the Allowed to Access All Applications option to create a site access point a Application category access point An address associated with one or more application categories Content Managers associate these access points with application categories You create this type of access point by clearing or by not selecting the Allowed to Access All Applications option The Access Point page invoked from Access Point link displays a list of access points You can add delete or update an access point Table 3 13 describes the attributes of the access points Table 3 13 Access Point Attributes Attribute Description Name A unique name of this access point Delivery Type The delivery type of this access point address There are four opt
10. To delete a sample service first select the sample service from the list of services shown then click the Delete button Note You must click Reset for any changes made to a sample service to take effect 6 10 Administrator s Guide Managing Foundation Services This chapter includes the following sections a Section 7 1 Overview a Section 7 2 Logging into the Foundation Manager a Section 7 3 Managing Devices a Section 7 4 Managing Transformers a Section 7 5 Managing Adapters a Section 7 6 Managing Regions a Section 7 7 Managing Digital Rights Policies a Section 7 8 Managing API Scan Policies 7 1 Overview The Foundation Manager enables you to create and modify the such objects as devices transformers adapters regions digital rights policies and API scan policies in the Wireless repository Table 7 1 describes these objects Managing Foundation Services 7 1 Overview Table 7 1 Objects Created and Managed Using the Foundation Manager Object Type Description Device Transformer Adapter Regions Digital Rights Policy API Scan Policy A device object associates a physical device or an abstract device with a transformer through user agents and MIME types A device object captures the device attributes which are used by both the multi channel server and the messaging server A transformer converts the content returned by the Wireless adapters Tr
11. Total Number of Received Messages Dispatched Failed The total number of received messages which failed to dispatch to a listener Managing the Wireless Server 3 25 Site Administration Location Related Performance The location related performance metrics are measured by location based service provider and by location event server Location Based Service Provider These metrics display by Provider Name the name of the application provider and by Provider Type the fully qualified class name associated with the provider as follows Hits The number of times an attempt was made to use this provider It includes both successful and unsuccessful attempts Average Success Rate The percentage of times that a hit resulted in a connection to the provider and the return of structurally acceptable information Average Elapsed Time ms The average number of milliseconds that it took for a hit to have a successful or unsuccessful result Location Event Server These metrics display by process name the name of a location event server process as follows Average Dequeue Time seconds The average number of seconds that elapsed between the time a request was ready in the queue and the time the dequeuing of the request was finished Average Evaluation Time seconds The average number of seconds that elapsed between the time the dequeuing of the request was finished and the time the result was generated The result can
12. email address when the calling application requests the user s email This cannot be changed as it is part compartment of the fixed Profile A string For example FIRSTNAME John A string For example LAS TNAME John A string For example EMATL John Doe compa ny com CreditCardData The Credit Cards structure held in wallet properties The fields are returned as request parameters The following parameters described in Table 8 49 are the default parameters of the CreditCardData group CreditCardData is an optional group Table 8 49 Parameters of the CreditCardData Group Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value CC Yes A short name for the A string For example CC_HOLDER_NAME Yes CC_HOLDER_ADDRESS_LANDMARK Yes 8 96 Administrator s Guide credit card The name of the holder of the credit card The billing address of the holder of the credit card This is a link to the user s Location Marks Restriction this landmark must be defined in the location application CC My Bank Visa Card A string For example CC_ HOLDER_NAME John Doe A string For Example CC_ HOLDER_ADDRESS _ LANDMARK Office at Oracle m Commerce Applications Table 8 49 Parameters of the CreditCardData Group Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value CC_EXPIRATION_DATE Yes The expiration date A string For example CC_ of the credit card EXPIRATION_ Restriction this DATE 04 2
13. 5 If the modified PanamaUser is cached by the running instances the PanamaUser object is reloaded from the Wireless repository 16 1 3 Oracle Application Server Wireless Programmatic Model API Interface The ModelFactory createUser method creates a corresponding User in the OID repository The User set methods update the corresponding User entry in OID for all of the attributes The User delete method removes the corresponding User from the OID repository The current semantics of commit is preserved for the User modifications 16 1 4 Wireless User Management Integrated with DAS In Wireless integration mode when you create a user through the User Manager the request is first redirected to OID DAS Delegated Administration Service for entering Oracle Application Server User Common Attribute Values After that the request is redirected back to the User Manager page for entering Wireless specific attribute values The same applies for editing a registered Wireless user The user is first edited through DAS and then through the User Manager 16 2 Integrating Wireless with WebCache Oracle Application Server Wireless is integrated with Oracle WebCache to improve page rendering performance and scalability WebCache is not deployed in the traditional sense with Oracle Application Server Wireless WebCache is usually deployed in front of Web servers serving HTML content and interacting with HTML clients and the Web server to cac
14. O PM 1837 true Guests February 5 2003 1 55 47 PM PST Available Applications gt Add To Group Select All Select None Guests February 5 2003 1 55 09 PM PST Users February 27 2003 6 48 39 PM PST Guests February 28 2003 4 01 33 PM PST Contact Rules 1852 Switcher true Examples 245 NA true 5 5 Creating User Home Root Folders The Render Content tab enables you to group user home folders by user community or by provider Users are assigned to these user home root folders in the User Manager When a user is assigned to a user home root folder that user s home folder becomes the child of the user home root folder by being placed within it In addition user home folders inherit the folder rendering style or display properties of their user home root folder For more information on assigning a user home folder see Section 4 5 Selecting the Render Content tab displays User Home Roots screen Figure 5 9 which includes a table listing the current root folders by name description object ID in the database and by the date that the folder was last modified From this table you can both edit and delete selected user home root folders 5 22 Administrator s Guide Creating User Home Root Folders Figure 5 9 The User Home Roots Screen Render Content Users gt User Home Roots Welcome orcladmin User Home Roots Use this page to manage User Horne Roo
15. encoding of the application if it is specified Use the encoding format of the IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority when specifying the value for input_encoding 15 3 1 2 Encoding for the response of an HTTPAdapter based Application Wireless determines the encoding of the response of an HTTPAdapter based application in the following order 1 Charset as part of the content type header on the response 2 Input encoding if present of the input parameter of the application 3 ISO 8859 1 the default 15 4 Languages Available for On Line Help Users can view the online help for the Wireless Tool and the Customization Portal in 29 languages The site locale configured through the System Manager determines the display language For more information see Section 3 6 1 4 in Chapter 3 Managing the Wireless Server In this release the built in labels and on line help for the Wireless Tools and System Manager display in nine languages The Multi Channel Server ptg rm can display the built in labels in 29 different languages 15 5 Driver Encoding Each driver handles encoding individually 15 6 Administrator s Guide 16 Integrating Wireless with Other Components The chapter includes the following sections a Section 16 1 Overview a Section 16 2 Integrating Wireless with WebCache a Section 16 3 Integrating Wireless with Oracle Application Server Portal a Section 16 4 Notification Engine Int
16. An adapter that retrieves and adapts Web content using WIDL files to map the source content to Wireless XML WIDL Web Interface Definition Language A meta data language that defines interfaces to Web based data and services WIDL enables automatic and structured Web access by compatible applications WIDL file A file written in Web Interface Definition Language that associates input and output parameters with the source content that you want to make available in a Wireless service WML Wireless Markup Language A markup language optimized for the delivery of content to wireless devices XML eXtensible Markup Language A flexible markup language that allows tags to be defined by the content developer Tags for virtually any data item can be created and used in specific applications allowing Web pages to function like database records XSLT Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformations A language for transforming one XML DTD into another XML DTD Glossary 7 Glossary 8 A access control 5 20 10 6 adapters creating 7 14 deleting 7 15 editing 7 15 setting init parameters 7 15 setting input parameters 7 18 Address Book configuration parameters 8 8 configuring 8 7 connecting with the Oracle Collaboration Suite 8 8 linking to 8 12 output parameters 8 15 overview 8 7 alerts basing on an existing master alert 5 31 creating 5 30 entering basic information 5 30 moving 5 32 setting trigger
17. HOMEPH No The home phone number of this A phone number for example contact HOMEPH 650 555 5000 Restriction the white spaces special characters are encoded MOBILEPH No The mobile phone number of this A phone number for example contact MOBILEPH 650 555 5000 Restriction the white spaces special characters are encoded WORKFAX No The business fax number of this Example WORKFAX contact Restriction the white spaces special characters are encoded EMAIL1 No The e mail or the first email An email address for example address of this contact Restriction EMAIL1 scott tiger oracle com the white spaces special characters are encoded EMAIL2 No The second email address of this An email address for example contact EMAIL2 scott tiger homemail com Restriction the white spaces special characters are encoded WADDRLINE1 No The first or only line of the Work The first line of a street address For address of this contact Restriction the white spaces special characters are encoded example WADDRLINE1 123 Main Street Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 17 PIM and Mail Table 8 7 Parameters of the SERIALIZED_CONTACT Group Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value WADDRCITY No WADDRSTATE No WADDRZIP No WADDRCOUNTRY No HADDRLINE1 No HADDRCITY No HADDRSTATE No HADDRZIP No HADDRCOUNTRY No NOTES Yes The city or work address of this contact Restriction th
18. Handing HTTP Requests Many devices with gateway support request applications through the HTTP protocol These devices include WAP phones with WAP gateways and fixed voice lines with VoiceXML gateways Wireless executes this request as follows 1 The Load Balancer dispatches a request sent from the external gateways to Oracle HTTP Server Generally the Load Balancer supports a sticky session Introducing Oracle Application Server Wireless 1 1 Overview meaning that the Load Balancer only handles requests from a new session otherwise the requests of an existing session are delivered to the same Oracle HTTP Server The Load Balancer provides the hardware load balancing solution The Oracle HTTP Server dispatches the received request to the OPMN Worker or to the Multi Channel Server directly based on the configuration Requests are routed to OPMN worker for OC4J based software load balancing Otherwise the request is dispatched directly to the Wireless Web Server The OPMN worker dispatches the request to the appropriate process based on the process load if the request is the first one of the current session Otherwise the OPMN worker dispatches the request to the Wireless Web server process to which the request session has been assigned The Multi Channel Server processes receive the request If the response for the request from this particular requesting device is cached by the WebCache then the response is returned immedi
19. If your handheld device supports more than one way to connect to the Internet you may choose your preferred method 1 Open Preferences by clicking the Prefs icon 2 Select Web Clipping 3 Select the connection name from the drop down list Wireless Gateway Configuration 9 3 Configuring Wireless for Browser Based Applications 9 1 2 3 Accessing the Wireless Server Using MyPalm Application If you have a Palm device with built in wireless Internet access and you have activated your wireless service then you can use the Palm native web browser to access a wireless server 1 Open MyPalm application by clicking the MyPalm icon 2 Enter the URL to the wireless server and click the Go button 9 1 2 4 Installing Blazer Web Browser To install Handspring s Blazer browser 1 Download the Blazer browser software from http blazer handspring com 2 Follow the installation instructions provided by Handspring at http www handspring com software how_to jhtml General instructions about installing software on Palm devices are available here http software palm com download jsp 9 1 2 5 Accessing the Wireless Server Using Blazer 1 Open Blazer by clicking the Blazer icon 2 Click the Go to Web Page icon the opened folder icon 3 Enter the URL to the wireless server and click the OK button Tip Create a bookmark so that you do not need to repeatedly enter the URL 9 1 3 Configuring Wireless for WAP
20. In the following screen use the Move arrows gt and gt gt to move an application from the All Application Categories pane to the Associated Application Categories pane To remove an application link 5 26 Administrator s Guide Categorizing Content from an application link category use the Remove arrows lt and lt lt to move the selected application link category from the Associated Application Category pane to the All Application Categories pane 5 6 2 1 Creating Access Points using the System Manager Access points which display in the Content Manager are created using the System Manager as part of the configuration of the Async Listener A user having System Administrator privileges sets the values for an access points which includes a name delivery type or site address or number For the latter value the address should be the Large Account provided by the Premium SMS operator For more information on configuring the Async Listener see Section 3 6 2 3 For an access point to display in the Content Manager and in turn be selected for an application category the System Administrator cannot select the option Allowed to Access All Applications If this flag is set then this access point cannot be associated with a specific application category because users sending requests to this access point can access all applications not just those grouped into any one application category 5 6 2 2 Editing the Routing Defin
21. Main Menu This command must always take users to the voice main menu If you hear a TTS text to speech read out of the main menu then the application contains a bug Note the place in the application where this bug occurred Help This universal command retrieves help for the application The help must be context sensitive Cancel This universal command which takes users from their current place in the application to a previous place in the application functions similarly to the Back command in a browser Be sure that this command takes users back to an appropriate place Wireless Gateway Configuration 9 13 Configuring Wireless for Voice Applications Table 9 2 Voice Portal Commands Command Location Goodbye This command takes users to an exit dialog and wait for about three seconds to allow an appropriate interval for users to say Cancel Noinput An action not a command that occurs when a user does not say a command for approximately four seconds This dialog should inform the user to speak or it should offer appropriate help Nomatch An action not a command that occurs when the system cannot recognize a user s command The system should ask the user to repeat the phrase or provide help on valid utterances Links to Other Applications Depending on the setup of the voice portal users can access any application at any point by saying the name of the application The following applications are available out of
22. Minute x CCancel Back Step 6 of7 Next Finish 16 2 1 3 Invalidating Cache Content For any caching mechanism to be effective The invalidation of the cached contents must be performed at appropriate intervals The Invalidation of Wireless content residing in WebCache can be either policy based or asynchronous Policy based Invalidation It is possible to specify in advance if a page should be cacheable or not One of the ways to do this is by specifying the invalidation frequency of an application as described in Section 16 2 1 2 When a page is inserted into the cache the 16 10 Administrator s Guide Integrating Wireless with WebCache invalidation frequency of the application to which it belongs is taken into account while determining how long the page should live in the cache It is also possible to dynamically specify the cacheability of a page This is done at the content source If the page is to be specified as cacheable the SimpleResult element should have a SimpleMeta child element This element has a required attribute cache which when set to yes enables caching for the page and when set to no disables caching An optional attribute to be used in conjunction with a yes value for the cache attribute is ttl This can be used to specify in seconds the number of seconds the page should be cached before expiring it For example lt SimpleResult gt lt SimpleMeta cache no gt lt SimpleResult gt
23. The HTTP root to the audio files for catspeech concatenated speech For example if you set this to http localhost 7777 audio catspeech then the catspeech server expects all audio files associated with its libraries to originate from that location If this is set incorrectly then no audio associated with catspeech plays only TTS text to speech plays back The default URL format is http lt server gt lt port gt audio catspeech The URL to the Multimedia Adaptation service s image adaptation servlet in HTTP mode http lt server gt lt http port gt mcs media image The URL to the Multimedia Adaptation service s secure image adaptation servlet in HTTPS mode http lt server gt lt https port gt mcs media image The URL to the Multimedia Adaptation service s voice grammar adaptation servlet The default URL format is http lt server gt lt port gt mcs media vgrammar 3 3 4 Process Management From the Home page of the System Manager you can manage the wireless processes on the local middle tier There are two types of wireless processes a Web based The Wireless OC4J Oracle Containers for Java instance is the Web based Wireless process Many types of wireless OC4J applications run in this process 3 14 Administrator s Guide The Home Page a Standalone The standalone Java processes can be started or stopped individually 3 3 4 1 Web Based Applications When you access the Home
24. This type of statement returns a Simple Result document You can use output filtering with QUERY statements PLSQL to use a PL SQL procedure This type of statement returns results to a database buffer CALL to run a stored procedure SQL92 syntax only This returns either a Simple Result or an Adapter Result element The actual SQL statement that invokes the query PL SQL procedure or stored procedure Note The SQL statement should be entered without a semicolon You can use input variables in the SQL statement You must indicate a variable in the statement by prefixing the variable with a colon For example you can specify an input variable in a PL SQL statement as follows begin mypackage foo expr end Where expr is the name of the variable You must define the parameter manually in the input panel The minimum number of database connections Managing Adapters Table 7 5 Init Parameters for the SQL Adapter Parameter Value Maximum DB Connection Pool Size The maximum number of database connections Increment Size for the Connection Pool The increment by which the database connection pool increases Idle Timeout In Minutes The time in minutes of inactivity that Wireless allows before automatically logging the user off the system 7 5 4 1 2 Setting Init Parameters for the Web Integration Adapter The Web Integration adapter retrieves and adapts Web content The Web Integration adapter wo
25. Value Multi Channel Server HTTP URL Multi Channel Server HTTPS URL Wireless and Voice Portal HTTP URL Wireless and Voice Portal HTTPS URL HTTP Adapter HTTP URL Prefix HTTP Adapter HTTPS URL Prefix Wireless Tools URL Wireless Customization Portal URL The Multi Channel Server URL in HTTP mode This URL is used when the Wireless server uses the Multi Channel server entry point for URL re writing The default URL format is http lt server gt lt http port gt mcs remote The Multi Channel Server URL in HTTPS mode The default URL format is https lt server gt lt https port gt mcs remote The Wireless and Voice Portal URL in HTTP mode The default URL format is http lt server gt lt http port gt ptg rm The Wireless and Voice Portal URL in HTTPs mode The default URL format is https lt server gt lt https port gt ptg rm The URL prefix for the remote JSP page that is invoked by the HTTP Adapter in HTTP mode Entering the URL prefix enables the Wireless server to automatically attach this prefix to a JSP entered in the Input Parameters page of the Service Manager s Master Application Creation Wizard When entering a JSP value in this wizard you need only enter the JSP For example if you enter a remote JSP called myApp jsp into the wizard the Wireless server attaches the URL prefix making this value into http remote_host port apps myApp jsp The default format is http lt server gt
26. You should note the number of connections in the TIME_WATT state If the rate of establishing connections load is known then you can compute the time taken to run out of connections To ensure that new connections are readily available you can decrease the tcp_time_wait_interval toa low value of 10000 ms The following is a list of TCP values recommended for Solaris You can set most of these values using the following UNIX command ndd Example gt ndd set dev tcp tcp_time_wait_interval 10000 These parameters described in Table 13 2 take effect after the application is restarted They should be added to the system startup file so that they are not lost after a reboot You must change the tcp_conn_hash_size in the file etc system after a reboot Table 13 2 Operating System Performance Parameters Parameter Setting Comments tcp_time_wait_interval 10000 The time out for disposing closed connection information This makes new connections readily available tcp_conn_hash_size 32768 Increasing this setting increases TCP Connection Table Access Speed Be sure that there is sufficient memory when increasing this value 13 14 Administrator s Guide Tuning Operating System Performance Table 13 2 Operating System Performance Parameters Parameter Setting Comments tcp_xmit_hiwat 65536 The size of the TCP transfer windows for sending and receiving data determine how much data can be sent without waiting fo
27. device as well as set a default device The Test button enables you to test a selected device by sending a test message to the user If a user cannot receive subscribed notifications then this function indicates that there are problems with sending messages For more information on using the Wireless Customization Portal for general device management and display attributes refer to Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide 4 16 Administrator s Guide Viewing Logs Figure 4 6 Viewing User Devices EE _ Users gt Users gt Jest gt View User Devices You are logged in as orcladmin View User Devices Use this page to create new devices and to manage and test existing ones Add a new Phone Number z Test Set Default Edit Delete wi JY My Primary Email C B My Primary Phone 4 8 Viewing Logs The User Manager enables you to view activity logs that display the accessed Async applications notifications applications and the downloaded media contents that is J2ME applications for a selected user The activity logs display the most recent activity for user or the user s activity within a specific time frame In addition these activity logs tell you if Wireless dispatched applications successfully To view the user logs select a user and then click the View Logs button The summary page of activity log appears Figure 4 7 displaying the last five logged records of t
28. lt SimpleHref target mypath mywireless jsp label Go gt Wireless HelloWorld lt SimpleHref gt The new version JPDK has been updated to understand these wireless properties of a Portlet The JPDK also supports wireless specific request information like location and device information which can be accessed by the Portlets through the JPDK APIs 16 3 3 Oracle Portal Wireless and Single Sign On SSO Both Oracle Portal and Wireless depend on Oracle s SSO solution for user authentication and login This integration allows the user to invoke protected applications defined on both systems and eliminates multiple login dialog boxes for users Wireless Server upgrades the session context of a user to an authenticated state when any service or application HTTP Adapter applications validates the user credentials with the SSO server When Oracle Portal a mobile application validates the credentials of a user with the SSO Server the session context in Wireless is also updated This allows wireless Portlets deployed on Oracle Portal to use services such as User Location Picker Routing Mobile Positioning supported by the Wireless Server 16 3 4 Portlets for Applications Deployed on Wireless Server You can use Oracle Portal s applications to provide a PC Desktop view of your Wireless services You can use Portal s JPDK framework to provide a showPage and editPage for Web based customizations Since the Portal itself ca
29. lt cluster config gt under the lt orion web app gt tag in the file oracle home j2ee 0C4d_ wireless application deployments ptg ptg web orion web xml 9 Start DCM and all processes by running the command oracle home dcm bin demctl start 10 Start EM by running the command oracle home bin emctl start 11 Configure a hardware load balancer to point to the middle tiers Currently high availability support is only available for the core server runtime by default mapped to the URI ptg rn For more information refer to the OC4J documentation 14 6 Administrator s Guide 19 Globalization This chapter includes the following sections a Section 15 1 Overview a Section 15 2 Determining a User s Locale a Section 15 3 Determining the Encoding of a Device 15 1 Overview Oracle Application Server Wireless supports multi locale and multi encoding The Wireless server dynamically determines locale and request and response encoding based on the runtime context 15 2 Determining a User s Locale The Wireless Server dynamically determines the appropriate locale of a user by using such locale information as PALocale the user s preferred locale the Accept Language header and the site locale PAlocale is a HTTP parameter that specifies the preferred value before login The possible value for the PAlocale parameter follows the http accept language header format For example PAlocale en US This format
30. 3 16 3 1 16 3 2 16 3 3 16 3 4 16 4 16 4 1 17 17 1 17 2 17 3 17 3 1 17 3 2 17 3 3 17 4 17 4 1 17 4 2 17 4 3 Glossary Index Integrating Wireless with Oracle Application Server Portal 0ccccccseeeees 16 16 OracleAS Portal as a Wireless Application cccccceccccseseseseseenesesescsesnesessnenens 16 16 Developing Wireless Portlets s scsrnoiiiiiniiss reniir reikia raikasi ENEA Esot 16 17 Oracle Portal Wireless and Single Sign On SSO sssssssssssessesssrrssessessssrenees 16 19 Portlets for Applications Deployed on Wireless Servet cccccsccsesese eee 16 19 Notification Engine Integration cccccccesececcscsesesescceeeseesssseecscssesseseesscssessnesecssenee 16 20 Integrating Wireless with Oracle Workflow cccesseccsssssesesesecteeescseseeeeeeeenens 16 22 Integrating Wireless Notification with Microsoft Exchange OV CL VICW voce eese onite e a cease bu ntsaeies debs nncenintes daveansa sthethes Aa aE a SEa EAEE TE 17 1 Wireless Notification Architecture c cccccccsccsssssesscessecsecssecsecsseessseeeeceseeceecseeesecaeesaeeaes 17 1 Configuring the Microsoft Exchange 2000 Serve ccccceseseesesssesesesesesseseseseneeseseees 17 2 Configuration Overview signage ats ie aaa G aaan pE apa par na Sea E 17 2 Creating an Exchange Notification AcCcount ss sessssessesseesissessesssrssesiesiesesssesees 17 13 Configuring the Notification Setting ASP s ssssssessssssssi
31. 3 10 Connecting PIM Applications to Non Oracle Servers The Collaboration Applications that is the PIM applications Address Book Calendar and Tasks applications can connect to non Oracle collaboration servers such as the Microsoft Exchange and Lotus Domino server To enable these PIM applications to run against the Exchange and Domino severs you must configure these servers in addition to configuring the application specific parameters Note The Mail application does not require additional software Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 59 PIM and Mail 8 3 10 1 Configuring the Microsoft Exchange Server for PIM Applications Configuring the Microsoft Exchange Server for Voice and Wireless PIM applications requires the following software described in Table 8 28 Table 8 28 Required Software Name From Version Microsoft Exchange 5 5 Microsoft Internet Information Services IIS 4 0 Microsoft Collaboration Data Objects MS CDO 1 2 1 Available with the Microsoft Exchange SDK You must install the Microsoft Exchange Server and the Microsoft Internet Information Services IIS server Note You must install cdo dll on the IIS server This library is included with MS CDO 8 3 10 1 1 Configuring the PIM Active Server Pages ASPs To configure the ASPs for the PIM applications 1 Create a directory named oracle on the IIS server For example create C inetpub oracle Copy the
32. 3 45 configuring the multimedia adaptation services 3 43 Content Manager assigning a DRM policy to a J2ME application link 5 11 assigning objects to a user group 5 21 creating application link categories 5 26 creating bookmarks 5 17 creating folders 5 7 debugging an application link 5 16 editing application links 5 15 editing folders 5 10 publishing objects 5 20 search functions 5 5 testing application links 5 16 Content Manager search functions 5 5 D DAS user management 16 5 Data Feeder processes 13 8 database connections optimizing 13 10 Index 2 device mapping 7 4 devices cloning 7 11 creating 7 5 determining encoding 15 4 searching 7 5 viewing from User Manager 4 16 Directory application configuration parameters 8 25 linking to 8 32 output parameters 8 32 overview 8 25 Directory Integration Platform DIP serve 10 11 downloading repository objects 3 55 Driving Directions application input call parameters 8 66 input parameters 8 65 linking to 8 66 overview and required software 8 65 Driving Directions applications output parameters 8 68 DRM policies associating a policiy with a J2ME application 5 11 Count DRM policy and Interval DRM policy 7 25 creating 7 26 creating a customized pacakage 7 28 creating the ORDL Open Digital Rights Language document 7 28 F Fax application configuration parameters 8 34 linking to 8 36 output parameters 8 38 required third p
33. 7 Step 3 Entering New Input Parameters for the Application Link The Input Parameters screen enables you to set the input parameters for your application link The input parameters for the application link are those set for the master application on which you based your application link You can only change the parameters which the Application Developer designated as Modifiable For more information on creating master applications see the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide Table 5 4 describes the input parameters included in the Input Parameters screen Managing Content 5 11 Managing Application Links Table 5 4 The Input Parameters for an Application Link Parameter Value Name Caption Comment Format Mandatory Customizable Value The name of the input parameter The Application Link Creation Wizard sets the name of the input parameter by querying the Master Application definition This field cannot be edited The label describing this parameter used by Wireless when prompting for user input For master applications based on the Web Integration adapter Wireless automatically populates this field with the name of the WIDL service that uses the parameter For application based on other adapters you can use this column to document the parameter The comment is only used internally This field cannot be edited This mask sets the expected data entry mode for the user device For examp
34. 8 24 Administrator s Guide Table 8 14 describes the parameters of the deleteApptResponse group an optional group PIM and Mail Table 8 14 Parameters of the deleteApptResponse group Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value TITLE DATE TIME DURATION NOTES TYPE LOCATION REMIND SHARING Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes The title of the appointment The date of the appointment The time of the appointment The duration of the appointment The notes for the appointment The type of appointment either personal or business The location of an appointment The time interval before the event reminder occurs A flag that enables or disables the sharing of an appointment If True the the appointment is shared if FALSE then the appointment is not shared A string For example TITLE Dinner at Joe s A string For example DATE December 31 2001 A string For example TIME 8 00 p m A string For example DURATION 1 hour A string For example NOTES Remember the brief A string For example TYPE Business A string For example LOCATION Home A string For example REMIND 1 hour For example SHARING TRUE 8 3 3 Directory The Directory application enables users to access LDAP directory servers from any mobile device This application is integrated with the Email application enabling users to browse their corporate directory
35. 8 34 Input Call Parameters of the Driving Directions Application Valid Value Parameter Name Mandatory Description OCOMPANYNAME No The company name of the starting A string For example location OCOMPANYNAME Oracle Corp OADDRESS No The first line of the address for the A string For example starting location OADDRESS 500 Oracle Parkway OADDRESS2 No The second line for the address of A string For example the starting location OADDRESS2 Redwood City CA OADDRESSLL No The last line for the address of the A string For example starting location OADDRESSLL US OBLOCK No The block of the starting location A string For example OBLOCK Block 400 OCITY No The city of the starting location A string For example 8 66 Administrator s Guide OCITY Redwood City Location Table 8 34 Input Call Parameters of the Driving Directions Application Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value OCOUNTY OSTATE OZIP OZIPEXT OCOUNTRY OLAT OLNG ONAME DCOMPANYNAME DADDRESS DADDRESS2 DADDRESSLL DBLOCK DCITY DCOUNTY DSTATE DZIP No No The county of the starting location The state of the starting location The postal code of the starting location The postal code extension of the starting location The country of the starting location The latitude of the starting location The longitude of the starting location The name of the starting lo
36. A string For example BA_ ADDRESS_LINE1 2035 Island Parkway A string For example BA_ ADDRESS_LINE2 Apt P 24 A string For example BA_ CITY Menlo Park A string For example BA_ STATE CA A string For example BA_ COUNTRY USA A string For example BA_ ZIPCODE 91750 idData The Extended Information structure defined in wallet properties All of the fields are returned as request parameters The idData group contains the following parameters described in Table 8 51 This is an optional group Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 99 m Commerce Applications Table 8 51 Parameters of the idData Group Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value ID_SSN No The Social Security A string For example ID_SSN 298459825 Number ID_DL No A driver s licence A string For example ID_DL B239922023 number ID_DL_STATE No The state in which the A string For example ID_DL_STATE CA driver s license has been issued ID_DL_EXP_DATE No The expiration date of A string For example ID_DL_EXP_ the driver s license DATE 04 27 2007 Restriction The format MM DD YYYY is defined in the wallet properties ID_PASSPORT No A passport number A string For example ID_ PASSPORT B293A923CK ID_PASSPORT_ No The expiration date of A string For example ID_PASSPORT_EXP_ EXP_DATE the passport DATE 04 08 1997 Restriction The format MM DD YYYY is defined in the wallet properties 8 5 3 5 Ext
37. A string For example SENDER_CORP Oracle Corp SENDER_PHONE No Sender phone A string For example SENDER_ number PHONE 1 650 123 4567 SENDER_FAX No Sender fax number A string For example SENDER_ FAX 1 650 123 4567 SENDER_ADDRESS No Sender address A string For example SENDER_ ADDRESS Home address SENDER_NOTES No Other sender A string For example SENDER_NOTES email information not joe smith oracle com listed above RECIPIENT_NAME No Recipient name A string For example RECIPIENT_NAME John White RECIPIENT_CORP Yes Recipient company A string For example RECIPIENT_ CORP 1 650 123 4567 RECIPIENT_PHONE No Recipient phone A string For example RECIPIENT_ number PHONE 1 650 987 6543 RECIPIENT_FAX Yes Recipient fax A string For example RECIPIENT_ number FAX 1 650 123 4567 RECIPIENT_ADDRESS No Recipient address A string For example RECIPIENT_ ADDRESS Work address MESSAGE No Short message tobe A string For example MESSAGE An awesome written on cover resume page ATTACHMENT No Attachment to be A string For example faxed ATTACHMENT mydoc resume pdf forwardFax Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 37 PIM and Mail The FAXTODO parameter includes the forwardFax group Table 8 18 describes the parameters of this mandatory group Table 8 18 Parameters of the forwardFax Group Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value FAXID Yes The unique id of the fax to A string For example FAXID 12345 be f
38. Directory Alias Virtual Directory Creation Wizard Virtual Directory Alias You must give the virtual directory a short name or alias for quick reference 10 In the Web Site Content Directory window Figure 17 12 click the Browse button and select the directory that contains the regevent asp file Figure 17 12 Web Site Creation Directory irtual Directory Creation Wizard Web Site Content Directory Where is the content you want to publish on the Web site Integrating Wireless Notification with Microsoft Exchange 17 15 Configuring the Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server 11 In the Access Permissions window Figure 17 13 select Read and Run scripts such as ASP and click Next Figure 17 13 Access Permissions irtual Directory Creation Wizard lx Access Permissions What access permissions do you want to set for this virtual directory B P Allow the following IV Read IV Run scripts such as ASP I write I Browse Click Next to complete the wizard lt Back Cancel 12 Click Finish 17 3 3 1 Enabling Basic Authentication After creating the virtual directory you must enable basic authentication on the directory by performing the following 17 16 Administrator s Guide Configuring the Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server 1 Right click the directory name and select Properties Figure 17 14 Oracle Properties oracle Properties 2 Under the Dir
39. For more information on creating cloning or editing a 15 4 Administrator s Guide Determining the Encoding of a Device device see Section 7 3 2 Section 7 3 3 and Section 7 3 2 1 respectively in Chapter 7 Managing Foundation Services Figure 15 2 Editing the Encoding for a Device Partial View of the Editing Function Available Selected UTF 8 UTF 8 ISO 8859 1 Ss Shift_JIS Move iso 6859 1 cs gt gt Accepted Move All Character lt Encodings Remove lt Remove The following table illustrates how the encoding is determined Table 15 2 Determining the Device Encoding Component Factor Multi Channel Server The encoding of the requesting device Async Listener Determined by the corresponding transport driver Wireless Tools and Encoding of the device called PAPZ The default encoding is Customization Portal UTF 8 Module Application Use UTF 8 for reading the request and writing the response Notification Application Determined by the corresponding transport driver 15 3 1 HttpAdapter Based Service This section describes the encoding for the request and response of a HTTPAdapter based application 15 3 1 1 Encoding for the request of an HTTPAdapter based Application When sending the HTTP request to the remote content provider only the parameters of the HTTPAdapter application are encoded using the input_ Globalization 15 5 Languages Available for On Line Help
40. HTTPS protocol You can add delete or update the certificated file name Use the absolute file name A Base64 certificate file is a text file with the certificate information bounded at the beginning by BEGIN CERTIFICATE and at the end by END CERTIFICATE A PKCS 7 formatted file is in binary code Note You must configure the Secure Sockets Layer to use HTTPS in the HttpAdapter 3 6 1 2 JDBC Connection Pool Pooling for JDBC connections improves resource utilization and reduces the connection establishment overhead when you access database The JDBC Connection Pool page invoked by selecting the JDBC Connection Pool hyperlink in 3 30 Administrator s Guide Site Administration the Site Administration page enables you to configure the JBDC connection for the site including a Minimum number of connections the default is 4 a Maximum number of connections the default is 100 a Incremental allocation of new connections to the connection pool the default is 1 3 6 1 3 System Logging For information refer to Section 3 3 2 1 3 6 1 4 Site Locale The Site Locale page invoked by selecting the Site Locale hyperlink in the Site Administration page enables you to configure the locale and time zone for the site You can specify the default site locale and time zone The default site locale can be selected from the list of all the supported locales of Wireless Wireless ships with 29 supported loc
41. Hees aces les euta dah ee a e E E e e E E 13 10 13 6 Optimizing opm iiti ae a e ea Eee E EE a N E e TTi 13 10 14 15 16 13 7 Optimizing Database Connections cccccccesesesececeeteececscssseseececessnesessseneeeseneseneeeees 13 10 13 8 Optimizing WebCache s scccc s cisccessescucuseectstscasaesesedevcudsdsssoussabecessivvast bysstvate a E EEN 13 10 13 9 Optimizing JVM Performance 0 0 ccc cece cseeceseseseseesessssssessesesesssseeseseseeeseeees 13 11 13 10 Tuning Operating System Performance ccccese cesses sssssseesesesesssseenessesesesees 13 13 Load Balancing and Failover 14 1 OV CLVICW 5 cick cectecue es ek Boats ech te dad bates gaa dne E A N SA N 14 1 14 2 Clustering Architecture ngreis aa ai asicetess E A a a 14 1 14 3 Clustering Configuration s ssssssssissesssssississessssssesnestentissenetentesresntsnensientenesnnenteneeneeneent 14 2 14 3 1 Configuring Oracle Http Server OHS s se sssssssssssissressisresnsssesesresnennsnrennesneeneess 14 2 14 3 2 Configuring Oracle Process Management and Notification OPMN 06 14 2 14 3 3 Corifiguring OGA 2 csssevsiissuinnveicesnitiendaidvantteneaicneetiananeeins 14 3 14 4 Configuring Wireless for High Availability Deployment cece 14 4 Globalization 15 1 DE A AARE A A ERT A E A AEN T 15 1 15 2 Determining a Users Locale ics os scission bor ienia aE 15 1 15 2 1 Aften OG Iti eTe o E IERE D neha Eae A vasdotts eines ina R teens dota me S
42. Input Parameters a FORMFILLURL http www formfillerdemo com a FORMFILLPARAMS First Name fname Last Name Iname Credit Card CC _ NUMBER Email EMAIL Address Address a APPLICATION FormFiller Demo a Output Parameters a FORMFILLURL http www formfillerdemo com a FORMFILLPARAMS First Name fname Last Name Iname Credit Card CC _NUMBER Email EMAIL Address Address a SUCCESSCODE FALSE 8 5 2 Payment Application The Payment Application which integrates with Oracle iPayment processes credit card and bank account transactions through wireless devices Payment processing enables integration with payment mechanisms such as Oracle s CRM iPayment As a result credit card processing and bank account transactions are carried out through direct connections to financial networks You can add other drivers that integrate payment solution providers per customer requests 8 84 Administrator s Guide m Commerce Applications Through integration with Oracle CRM s iPayment component which implements transaction settlement support for credit cards and bank accounts transactions are processed directly through the platform rather than through a merchant deployed processing infrastructure 8 5 2 1 Configuring the Payment Application You must correctly install and configure the Oracle iPayment before you use the Payment application To do this you must follow the instructions from Oracle Applications 11i to install Oracle iPayment Re
43. Input Parameters for Adapters 7 5 4 1 Setting the Initialization Init Parameters for Adapters When you create a non HTTP master application the Init Parameters screen of the Master Application Creation Wizard shows the initialization init parameters specific to the type of adapter selected for the master application When Wireless first invokes the adapter it passes the values that you set in the Init Parameters screen to the adapter Managing Foundation Services 7 15 Managing Adapters 7 5 4 1 1 Setting Init Parameters for the SQL Adapter The SQL adapter retrieves and adapts content from any JDBC enabled data source for a master application based on the SQL adapter the Init Parameters panel includes the following parameters which are described in Table 7 5 Table 7 5 Init Parameters for the SQL Adapter Parameter Value JDBC Connect String JDBC Driver User Name Password Type of Statement The Statement Minimum DB Connection Pool Size 7 16 Administrator s Guide The JDBC connect string for the database on which to query as follows jdbc oracle thin host_name port SID Note Insert all colons for example thin host The Java DriverClass name for example Oracle thin driver Oracle jdbc driver oracle driver The name of the database user The password of the database user The type of SQL statement used by the master application Allowable values include QUERY for a select statement
44. Locale such as the language and country for example en_US indicates English and USA The user s default time zone The user s date of birth The user s gender 10 2 5 Component Extensibility and Security Applications developed and deployed in Wireless can benefit from Oracle SSO functionality through integration as an Oracle SSO partner For more information on SSO refer to the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide 10 3 Configuring the Security Infrastructure to Support Wireless Wireless depends on the security infrastructure to be up both during installation time and runtime Refer to the Oracle Application Server Administrator s guide for details on the security infrastructure Wireless relies on Directory Integration Platform DIP server as one of the mechanisms to asynchronously replicate the essential modified user information Wireless Security 10 11 Configuring the Security Infrastructure to Support Wireless from OID to the Wireless schema For more information refer to Oracle Internet Directory Administrator s Guide for details on how to start the DIP server By default the OID server does not enforce unique constraints on account number that is the orclWirelessAccountNumber attribute of orclUserV2 object class The account number is required for users accessing wireless applications from a regular voice line with the account number and PIN used for the authentication As part of the Wi
45. Messaging The Instant Messaging application provides presence management enabling employees to exchange instant messages from their mobile devices This application is integrated with Jabber Instant Messaging server and the MSN and Yahoo networks 8 3 6 1 Configuring the Instant Messaging Application The Instant Messaging application which uses the Jabberbeans classes to connect to a Jabber Instant Messaging Server requires the installation of third party software Table 8 24 describes the required third party software Table 8 24 Software Required for the Instant Messaging Application Name From Version Instructions Jabber Server 1 4 1 Follow the Jabber server installation guide Yahoo Transport Gateway 0 8 0 Optional Follow the Jabber server installation guide MSN Transport Gateway 1 1 0 Optional Follow the Jabber server installation guide Configuration Parameters The Instant Messaging application includes the following configuration parameters a Jabber Server Name The host name of the machine on which the Jabber server runs such as jabber org a Valid Values Any valid Jabber server a Default Value localhost a Examples jabber org a Yahoo Messaging Transport The Yahoo Instant Messaging transport if any configured on the Jabber Server used by the service For example yahoo jabber org a Valid Values A valid value defined in the jabber xml a Default Value a Example yahoo oraclemobile com a Yahoo
46. Microsoft Exchange Notification Event Settings Screen System gt Wireless Server Administration gt Microsoft Exchange Notification Event Settings Microsoft Exchange Notification Event Settings Microsoft Exchange Server Host Name jexchange company com Name of the Microsoft Exchange server Example server company com Port 143 Port to contact the Microsoft Exchange server Example 143 Mail Protocol IMAP x Mail Protocol to be used to retrieve messages Example IMAP Email Domain mydomain company com Email Domain name served by the Microsoft Exchange server Example company com Notification Event Settings Notification Event Account Jemailnotif Account on the Microsoft Exchange server that is used to forward notification events to Example wireless _notification Password welcome Password for the notification event account Example secret1 Adapter URL Path Joracle URL that maps to the directory on the Microsoft Exchange server containing the Notification Event ASP scripts and DLL Example oracle Table 17 1 describes the parameters in the Microsoft Exchange Notification Event settings screen Table 17 1 Parameters of the Microsoft Exchange Notification Event Settings Screen Parameter Description Possible Values Hostname The name or IP address for the host that runs Microsoft A string value such as Exchange Server exchange company com for a name or 166 123 23 22 for an IP address Port The
47. Name Description queue_size msg_rcv_time msg_rcv_hour start_execute_time end_execute_time error_description service_id async_name message_size timestamp The number of messages waiting in the queue when the message is received The message received time The message received hour The time to start invoking the service requested from the message The time to finish the service invocation The error description on failure of the service invocation The ID of the service the user is requesting to access The Async short name of the service the user is requesting to access The size of the message Time when the message is logged into the database TRANS _LOG Table 12 5 Message Server Activity Log Column Name Description MESSAGE_ID MESSAGE_TYPE DELIVERY_TYPE 12 6 Administrator s Guide The message id assigned by the transport which is unique for every message The type of the message which can be R for received message S for message to send The delivery type which can be a WAP Push a SMS a Voice a Email a Fax a Two Way Pager One Way Pager Activity Logging Overview Table 12 5 Message Server Activity Log Column Name Description REQUEST_INSTANCE_ HOST REQUEST_INSTANCE_ID REQUEST_BEGIN_TIME REQUEST_END_TIME HANDLE_INSTANCE_ HOST HANDLE_INSTANCE_ID HANDLE_BEGIN_TIME HANDLE_END_TIME ENQUEUE_BEGIN_TI
48. ORACLE_ HOME wireless bin To assign this privilege run the following command assignUserSecurityAdminsPrivilege sh cn orcladmin welcome1 Note orcladmin is the user name for the super user and welcome is the password For more information refer to the OracleAS Security Guide This privilege checking applies only to password and not to PIN 4 5 3 Deleting a User To delete a user select a user from the Browse User screen and then click the delete user icon After confirmation Wireless deletes the user from the list 4 6 Viewing Application Links The View Application Links button enables you to view the applications bookmarks folders and notifications accessible by a single user as well as use the simulator to test applications The applications that a user can access include all those assigned to the groups that the user belongs to as well as applications created in the selected user s home folder using Mobile Studio or published through the Service Manager using the Quick Publish function Selecting a user and then clicking the View Application Links button displays the following Table 4 4 Application Link Information Element Description Type The type of objects created by the selected user Name The display name of the folder application or bookmark Object ID The Object ID OID of the application or module in the database Managing Users 4 15 Viewing Devices Table 4 4 Applicatio
49. Page 4 Wireless sends HTTP requests to each image link This is done so that the user s session gets cleaned up in all the partner applications 5 Wireless terminates the user s session 6 If Logout is accomplished through Wireless link then the home page of the guest user is returned 11 3 2 Logging Out from a Partner Application The authenticated user clicks the logout link on the page returned by the SSO based partner application In this case the logout link points to the SSO sign off URL 1 The user clicks on the logout link which points to the SSO sign off URL 2 The SSO server returns the Wireless XML global logout page and a special HTTP header X Oracle SSO logout with value true The global logout page includes one image for each partner application which was active in user session 3 Wireless sends HTTP requests to each image link to clean up the user s session in all the partner applications 4 Wireless terminates the user s session 5 Wireless returns the user s home page if the user has logged in through the Wireless and Voice portal Wireless returns the done_URL of the global logout page if the user logged in by requesting a partner application 11 3 3 Logging Out from a Web based Oracle Application Server Application Since all Web based Oracle Application Server applications are authenticated through mod_osso and are treated as a single partner application logout from any application
50. Page The maximum number of results displayed per page The default value is 10 a Valid Values Any integer value a Default Value 10 a Examples 15 Merge Results If set to true then all of the other public attributes are included in the result of the query If set to false then only the Query Result List Attributes display a Valid Values A boolean value true false a Default Value false Application Setup OMP URL The OMP reference to the URL group a Valid Values Any valid OMP URL for application setup a Default Value omp oracle applications appsetup a Example omp oracle applications appsetup1 Use Voice LSS This option is reserved for future use and must be set to false a Valid Values A boolean value true false a Default Value false Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 31 PIM and Mail 8 3 4 Fax 8 3 3 3 Linking to the Directory Application You can link to the directory application through the following virtual URL omp oracle services pim directory You can configure each element of this application clicking any field after getting the details of a result returns the field value to the caller as the parameter mailto Output Parameters The output parameters for the directory application include the following mailto The value of the field that the user selects For example mailto oraclemobile oracle com mailto John mailto Smith a mailto 650 999
51. Parent Folder Home Folder The filename or DTMF equivalent in the current folder such as Example doc or press 1 Takes the user up one level Takes the user to the highest level 9 2 4 5 Testing the Directory Application The Directory application enables users to search for other users in a corporate directory by spelling the name of the user Note Because the spelling dialog is experimental users may experience some difficulty In the first dialog user select the type of search they want to perform For example users can select Search by Name or Search by Email If only one type of search is available then this dialog is skipped The second dialog asks users to spell the name of the person they are searching for In addition to providing letters users can also use the commands for searching corporate directories which are described in Table 9 6 Table 9 6 Voice Commands for Searching a Corporate Directory Command Description Complete Finishes the spelling dialog and performs the search Delete Deletes the last letter entered by the user String so far More help Pronounces the search string up to the last letter entered Plays additional search string options including special characters In the results dialog 9 18 Administrator s Guide Configuring Wireless for Async Enabled Applications 9 2 4 6 Testing the Address Book Application The Address Book application enables users
52. The Wireless and Voice Portal treats these applications as public applications even if they are not A Wireless and Voice Portal instance uses an HTTP adapter to serve as a proxy browser for such applications 11 2 Wireless Single Sign On The wireless user has two SSO authentication options to authenticate directly from the Wireless and Voice Portal home page or to request a partner application which then performs the authentication This section covers the following topics a Authenticating Through Wireless and Voice Portal a Authenticating by Requesting a Partner Application 11 2 Administrator s Guide Wireless Single Sign On 11 2 1 Authenticating Through Wireless and Voice Portal The wireless user authenticates from the Wireless and Voice Portal public page either by requesting a private application or by an explicit login request identified by the URL parameter PAlogin true to the SSO server Figure 11 1 Interactions Between Oracle Application Server Wireless and the Login Server 8 Wireless sends the home page of the user or the private application result to browser 5 User enters the username password and submits the form Browser 4 Wireless sends the login form to the browser 1 Explicit login request invokes a private application Oracle Application Server Wireless 7 sso Server Wireless sends SSO Server Wireless authent request to the sends the forwards jcate
53. The runtime processes the requests following the traditional code path of invoking the application corresponding to the request and transforming the content 5 The transformed content is now returned as a response to the WebCache request 6 WebCache examines the response to determine if the page is cacheable or not and if it is cacheable for what period of time 7 Assuming that this particular page is cacheable WebCache inserts the page into the cache with an expiration limit set to the page 8 WebCache then serves this page out as a response to the original request from the runtime which in turn uses this page as a response to the client request 16 6 Administrator s Guide Integrating Wireless with WebCache Figure 16 3 A Cache Miss Scenario 4 Runtime invokes service Content Source Client 1 Client request response Wireless Runtime 2 Runtime 3 Cache miss results consults cache in request to runtime y Webcache A Cache Hit Scenario In this case an incoming request from a client is for a page that has been cached by WebCache This sequence depicted in Figure 16 4 is as follows 1 The wireless runtime sends a request to WebCache which examines the cache to see if the page is cached or not 2 If cached it checks to see if the page has expired If the page has not expired it serves it out of the cache to the runtime which in turn uses this page as a response to
54. Value givenname sn cn orclmailemail telephonenumber a Example givenname sn cn orclmailemail telephonenumber a Query Filter Expression Defines the query filter expression For example amp 1 givenname sn orclmailemail telephonenumber objectclass orcluserv2 a Valid Values Any valid filter expression a Default Value amp 1 1 1 givenname sn cn orclmailemail telephone number objectclass orcluserv2 a Example 1 1 1 givenname sn cn 1 orclmailemail telephonenu mber a Query Filter Attribute Display Names Future Use Only a Default Values Enter a name for searching Enter an email for searching Enter telephone number for searching a Query Result List Attributes Defines the query attributes for the result list For example givenname sn mail telephonenumber a Valid Values Any attribute name defined in the Internet Directory server a Default Value givenname sn telephonenumber mail title manager orclguid a Example givenname sn telephonenumber a Query Result List Attribute Display Names 8 28 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail Defines the query attributes display name that appear on the result list Example First Name Last Name Email Work Phone a Valid Values Any caption name a Default Value First Name Last Name Phone Email Title Manager Oracle GUID a Examp
55. Values The OMP URL of the mail application Voice Main Menu OMP URL Defines the OMP URL of the Voice Main Menu application a Valid Values The OMP URL of the Main Menu application a Default Value omp oracle services voice mainmenu Fax OMP URL Defines the fax OMP URL a Valid Values The OMP URL of the Fax application a Default Value omp oracle services pim fax iFS OMP URL Defines the OMP URL for the Files iFS application a Valid Values the OMP URL of the Files iFS application a Default Value omp oracle services pim ifs Instant Messaging OMP URL Defines the OMP URL of the Instant Messaging application a Valid Values The OMP URL of the instant messaging application a Default Value omp oracle services pim im Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 5 Wireless Application Configuration Parameters a Payment OMP URL Defines the OMP URL of the Payment application a Valid Values The OMP URL of the Payment application a Default Value omp oracle services commerce payment a Location Picker OMP URL Defines the OMP URL of the Location Picker application a Valid Values The OMP URL of the Location Picker application a Default Value omp oracle services location picker a Short Messaging OMP URL Defines the OMP URL of the Short Messaging application a Valid Values The OMP URL of the short messaging application a Default Value omp oracle services pim sm a Tasks OMP URL Defines the OMP URL of the
56. Wireless so that all Mobile Studio accounts are also Wireless accounts and Wireless accounts are also Mobile Studio accounts Administering Mobile Studio 6 1 Configuring Mobile Studio 6 2 Configuring Mobile Studio You use the System Manager to configure Mobile Studio To access the configuration page 1 Click Wireless Server Administration The administration pages appears for the Wireless site Figure 6 1 2 Select Mobile Studio located in the General Configuration section For more information on administering the Wireless site see Section 3 6 Figure 6 1 Mobile Studio Configuration Screen Wireless Server System gt Wireless Server Administration gt Mobile Studio Mobile Studio URL of Deploy Server fittp servert foracle com 777 studio Default Site Name Default J2ME Webservices supported Cancel OK Cancel The Mobile Studio configuration screen includes the following parameters which are described in Table 6 1 6 2 Administrator s Guide Accessing Mobile Studio Administration Table 6 1 Parameters of Mobile Studio Configuration Screen Parameter Value URL of Deploy Server Default Site Name J2ME Webservices Supported The URL of the Wireless production instance Applications created by developers in Mobile Studio referred to as the development instance are deployed to this URL For example enter http myserver mycompany com myport studio If you do not e
57. XV Documentation A ccessibility niesna ne tithes NE E E tities xvii More MOA ON aa a ec a a a eea E EaR xvii PartI Overview 1 Introducing Oracle Application Server Wireless 1 1 OVEEVIEW or ae e ea eae a e e A E aet E e NEES 1 1 1 2 Using the Wireless ToolSosiniiinonn s a e aeea ea E aE Ea aE 1 3 1 3 Wireless Module A pplicati ons s ss ccustssieseatizsserevnienseeretine series ieiseenebinesubessboevennaestieeeveas 1 7 1 4 Using THis Guide inisi niaan a e OE ESEK E E ERE rE E ENRE A 1 7 2 Verifying the Wireless Installation 2 1 Starting the Oracle Application Server Wireless Server s sssssssssesissessessesersrereeseess 2 1 2 1 1 Configuring the Wireless Server sss sesssssssesisistisessersssiesessesnsesieniesesneeninneenennens 2 3 2 2 Accessing the Wireless Customization Portal se ssssssessessesssesesstsessiestestesensensneneessess 2 4 2 3 Accessing the Wireless Tools ss sssssssssssessessestissesstsstnsiesenesssnsnestestesensnestentensnsnnsneneeneest 2 5 Part II System Administration Managing the Wireless Server 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 6 1 3 6 2 3 6 3 OVervie Woi a tienes deaslevsttevtiens ss Vaa a enti tere miata a a ibis 3 1 Refreshing the System Manager Screens ccccececsssssscecscssesescecsssesesescecsssnsneseesnes 3 2 Logging Into the System Manager ccccccssesecsscsssesesescsessnesescssseseececssssseseececsssnsnesee
58. a mobile device The m Commerce applications are automatically installed along with Oracle Application Server Wireless m Commerce APIs You can build an m Commerce application using Wireless XML To incorporate any m Commerce component into an application you can add URL links to the moduable application that comply with its APIs If you have already developed an m Commerce application in WML you can run it through the Translator Application by calling its API and by providing the URL of the application The URL adds links from your application to all of the m Commerce modulable applications 8 5 1 Form Filler The Form Filler application is a self teaching form filler one that maintains mappings between application form fields and wallet elements The Form Filler accepts a URL and a list of label and variable names as input parameters and checks if there is a stored mapping from the given labels and variables to wallet fields If there is no such mapping then it enables users to create a new mapping into wallet fields Once a mapping is retrieved or created it calls the wallet asking it for the given mapped information Upon successful completion the application returns a status of Success along with the wallet values corresponding to the label variable name list Otherwise a status code of Failure will be returned Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 75 m Commerce Applications 8 5 1 1 Configuring the Form Filler Ap
59. a selected user home root folder To do this select a folder from the table in the User Home Roots page and then click Edit The editing screen appears and defaults to the general parameters set for the selected user home root folder If you wish to edit the rendering options select Rendering from the menu Click Apply to save your changes Clicking Cancel sets them back to their previous values 5 5 2 Deleting a User Home Root Folder You can delete a user home root folder by first selecting from the table in the User Home Roots page and then by clicking Delete Note You cannot delete a User Home Root folder if it contains any user home folders you must delete all user home folders from a User Home Root folder before you can delete it 5 6 Categorizing Content To support PremiumSMS and ReverseCharge the Content Manager enables you to create application link categories which are sets of similar applications For example in PremiumSMS each set of applications having the same premium level can be put into an application link category Managing Content 5 25 Categorizing Content Each access point for example an Async address can be optionally associated with one or more application link categories Only the associated access points can gain access to applications assigned to a category Figure 5 10 The Categorize Content Screen Categorize Content Application Categories Use this page to group application
60. add them as name value pairs For more information about billing framework refer to the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide 3 6 1 11 Mobile Studio The Mobile Studio page enables you to configure Mobile Studio by defining the parameters described in Table 3 9 Note You must restart the Wireless server for the Mobile Studio configuration settings to take effect For more information on Mobile Studio see Section 6 2 in Chapter 6 Administering Mobile Studio 3 36 Administrator s Guide Site Administration Table 3 9 Parameters of the Mobile Studio Screen Parameter Value URL of Deploy Server The URL of the Wireless production instance Applications created by developers in the Mobile Studio referred to as the development instance are deployed to this URL For example enter http myserver mycompany com myport studio If you do not enter the URL in this field then deployment is disabled Default Site The name of the branding that is the look and feel which is used as the default This is pre seeded with the value Default Application providers can brand the Mobile Studio by customizing its appearance and content and integrate it with an existing Web site You can substitute another branding for this default by entering the name of another branding in this field For more information on branding refer to the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide J2ME Web Services
61. be a determination of whether the condition is satisfied or not or it can be an error 3 6 Site Administration From the Site Administration page Figure 3 15 you configure the Wireless system for the whole Wireless site all of the Wireless servers use this common 3 26 Administrator s Guide Site Administration configuration Also from this page you access functions to download or upload repository objects and refresh the WebCache objects The timestamp on the Site Administration page displays the last time that the configuration data was loaded from the database To update the data on the page click the Refresh icon or update some configuration data Otherwise the timestamp the last time that the configuration data was loaded from the database Figure 3 15 The Site Administration Screen Wireless Server a Server System gt Wireless Server Wireless Server Page Refreshed Apr 8 2003 2 28 32 PM Home Site Performance Site Administration l The settings on this page apply to all wireless servers of the Wireless Site A Wireless Site consists of one or more wireless servers which share the same database General Configuration HTTP HTTPS Configuration JDBC Connection Pool WebCache System Logging User Provisioning Performance Monitor Site Locale WAP Provisioning Billing Framework Mobile Studio gt Component Configuration Utilities Repository Provisioning Repository Objects Download Reposito
62. by the disabled community Standards will continue to evolve over time and Oracle Corporation is actively engaged with other market leading technology vendors to address technical obstacles so that our documentation can be accessible to all of our customers For additional information visit the Oracle Accessibility Program Web site at http www oracle com accessibility Accessibility of Code Examples in Documentation JAWS a Windows screen reader may not always correctly read the code examples in this document The conventions for writing code require that closing braces should appear on an otherwise empty line however JAWS may not always read a line of text that consists solely of a bracket or brace Accessibility of Links to External Web Sites in Documentation This documentation may contain links to Web sites of other companies or organizations that Oracle Corporation does not own or control Oracle Corporation neither evaluates nor makes any representations regarding the accessibility of these Web sites More Information You can also find information on Oracle Application Server Wireless through these resources a Oracle Technology Network Oracle Technology Network is dedicated to providing developers the best information on Oracle s products and technologies Visit http otn oracle com mobile a javadoc wireless doc javadoc a Studio OracleMobile Online Studio is a 100 online environment for quickly building t
63. by the transformer and the Simple Result DTD version Figure 7 8 illustrates this browsing screen Figure 7 8 The Browse Transformers Screen Partial View Transformers Semices gt Transformers Welcome orcladmin Transformers PLAIN_TEXT_JAVA 320 text plain Hee C PTG 266 textAnd oracle mobilexml 1 1 0 From this screen you can delete edit and create transformers 7 4 1 Creating a New Transformer To create a transformer click the Create Transformer button to invoke the Create Transformer screen Figure 7 9 To complete the transformer you must define the following parameters described in Table 7 3 Click Finish to complete the transformer Table 7 3 Parameters of the Create Transformer Screen Parameter Value Name The name of the transformer This name must be unique MIME Type The MIME type that the transformer supports SimpleResult DTD Version The SimpleResult DTD version such as 1 0 0 the default version Java Transformer Specifies a Java class transformer implementation Class Name The name of the class that implements the transformer 7 12 Administrator s Guide Managing Transformers Table 7 3 Parameters of the Create Transformer Screen Parameter Value XSL Transformer Specifies an XSLT style sheet transformer implementation If you select an XSL transformer you can do one of the following a Enter the code for the XSL style sheet in the field next to the Style sheet p
64. categories and associate access points with them Create a user home folder rendering scheme such as setting the sorting order for applications Introducing Oracle Application Server Wireless 1 5 Using the Wireless Tools Table 1 1 Wireless User Roles User Role Description Available Tools System Users assigned the System Administrator perform System Manager This tool Administrator configuration management and performance is packaged with Oracle monitoring for various Wireless servers The Wireless Enterprise Manager and is servers are deployed both as OC4J Oracle accessed through the User Manager End User Containers for Java applications and as standalone Java applications Users assigned the User Manager role perform the following functions Manage users by providing such Help Desk functions as editing a user profile resetting passwords and PINs and creating or deleting users Manage user access privileges a View application links assigned to users Manage user devices a Search for users a View overview information of users Users assigned the end user role are the consumers of Wireless services End users create their own accounts when they register with Wireless using the Wireless Customization End users can also customize their own applications either from a desktop or from a device Customization for end users includes Customize applications download J2ME applications s
65. data from the Exchange Server a Valid Values The URL pointing to Tasks asp a Default Value http localhost oracle Tasks asp a Examples http isserver mycompany com oracle Tasks asp http iisserver mycompany com 8080 oracle Iasks asp a Can user use different server settings Determines if the user can edit the current application settings a Valid Values A boolean value true false Default Value false a Account Name If the Tasks application shares login authentication information with the Calendar or Address Book applications then you must specify the same string value as Account Name from either the Calendar application or Address Book application a Valid Values Any string value a Default Value ExchangeDomain 8 58 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail Examples mydomain SharedAccount a Tasks per page How many tasks should display per page This parameter applies to both WAP and PDA a Valid Values Any integer value a Default Value 10 a Examples 10 15 20 Application Setup OMP URL The OMP URL of the Application Setup Modulable Application a Valid Values The OMP URL of the Application Setup a Default Value omp oracle applications appsetup Examples omp oracle applications appsetup omp oracle applications otherappsetup 8 3 9 1 Linking to the Tasks Application You can link to the Tasks application using the following virtual URL omp oracle services pim tasks 8
66. driver class parameters you can create multiple driver instances based on the same driver different driver instances can use the same class to send and receive messages even though they have different parameter values For example two email driver instances can use different email servers The attributes of a driver instance are as follows a Driver Instance Name The driver instance name a Driver Name The site level driver on which this driver is based You can select from any of the drivers defined at the site level a Number of Sending Threads The number of sending threads used by this driver This field only displays for drivers with either the SEND or BOTH capability If you leave this field blank then the default value specified in Messaging Server Configuration at Site Administration page is used Number of Receiving Threads The number of receiving threads used by this driver This field only displays for drivers with either the RECEIVE or BOTH capability If you leave this field blank then default value specified in Messaging Server Configuration at Site Administration page is used a Enabled By selecting this flag you enable the driver instance otherwise the instance is disabled if you do not set this flag For a driver instance to run both the site and process levels must be enabled At the process level Wireless displays both site level Enable Disable flag and the process level flag 3 18 Administrator s Guid
67. enables you to create an application link based on an existing master application In addition this screen includes buttons that enable you to add folders and bookmarks You can also use the browsing screen to delete debug move and edit these objects For more information on developing multi channel applications master applications see the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide 5 4 Administrator s Guide Managing Application Links Figure 5 2 The Browsing Screen From the Publish Content Tab Publish Content Search Type You may use asterisks as wildcards in your search Category Any gt Content gt Root Folders and Applications Welcome orcladmin Root Folders and Applications Use this page to create application links which enable an application to be published to user groups Delete Categorize X Move X Debug X Edit O Commerce 1827 N A Wif true 0 Guests February 5 2003 1 55 09 PM PST E EA Contact Rules 1852 Switcher Eul true 0 Users February 27 2003 6 48 39 PM PST C a Examples 245 N A Eki true a Guests February 28 2003 4 01 33 PM PST la Location 1832 N A Eil true 0 Guests February 5 2003 1 55 29 PM PST 6 la PIM 1837 N A Eli true 0 Guests February 5 2003 1 55 47 PM PST e o Studio 261 N A Eul true a March 7 2003 5 47 27 PM PST C a Voice Main Menu 1853 Main Menu E l false 0 Users February 28 2003 5 04 10 PM PST A
68. fhttp xlu pc us oralce com 7777 ptg rm 3 3 3 1 Defining the Instance URLs in Integrated Mode If you access the System Manager in the integrated mode that is through the Oracle Enterprise Manager Application Server Control as described in Section 3 2 2 then the Use the Wireless Instance URLs option is selected by default With this option selected the Wireless server uses the URLs defined on this page which are populated by the post installer to enable Wireless to work out of the box After completing the installations for each Wireless server on the Wireless site you then configure the URLs for the Wireless site as virtual URLs and then select the Use the Wireless Site URLs option for each of the Wireless servers When upgrading the Wireless site you select Use the Wireless Instance option for each server until all of the servers on the Wireless site have been upgraded See Section 3 6 1 1 for information on setting the URLs for the Wireless site 3 3 3 2 Defining the Instance URLs in Standalone Mode As in the integrated mode the Use the Wireless Instance URLs option is selected by default if you access the System Manager in the standalone mode as described in Section 3 2 1 After completing the standalone installation you define the local URLs for all the Wireless services The instance URLs include those described in Table 3 2 3 12 Administrator s Guide The Home Page Table 3 2 The Instance URLs Parameter
69. first enter the following URL into a browser http Server 1810 emd console Note The default port is 1810 After you log into the OEM select the Wireless component from the System Components table The System Manager appears and defaults to the Home page Figure 3 3 3 4 Administrator s Guide The Home Page Figure 3 3 The Home Page of System Manager Partial View System gt Wireless Server Wireless Server Page Refreshed Apr 3 2003 10 32 11 AM Home Site Performance Site Administration General Response and Load iy Start All Stop all Active Sessions 0 Pesca Stat U ilabl Average Response Time seconds 0 0 ae newer one Average Session Duration Version 9 0 4 0 0 seconds 0 0 Host xlu pe us oracle com Applications Invoked 0 Configuration Status Not Configured JOME Applications Downloaded 0 Related Link Basic Site Configuration PP Notifications Sent 0 Required configuration for the Wireless Site Messages Sent 0 Messages Received 0 TIP This data is based on the last 10 minutes Web Based Applications Web based applications are the OC4J applications running in the Wireless OC4J instance They must be started and stopped together by starting and stopping the StartOC4J Instance Stop OC4J Instance OC4J instance DYN_HTTPSRYV_1001 Multi Channel Server KD DYN_WEBTOOL_1002 Wireless Tools t Standalone Processes Standalone processes are the Wire
70. following files from Oracle Application Server Wireless middle tier server to the oracle folder on the IIS server ORACLE_HOME OC4J_ Wireless j2ee applications modules modules web pim addressbook asp ORACLE_HOME OC4J_ Wireless j2ee applications modules modules web pim calendar asp ORACLE_HOME OC4J_ Wireless j2ee applications modules modules web pim tasks asp Start the IIS manager and then right click the default Web site Add a new virtual directory Name this virtual directory oracle 8 60 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail 6 Using the Properties dialog box for this folder grant Execute Permissions for Scripts and Executables 7 Select Directory Security and then click Edit in the Anonymous Access pane 8 Set the following values a Do not select Anonymous Access leave this option clear a Select Basic authentication a Select Integrated Windows authentication 8 3 10 2 Configuring the Lotus Domino for PIM Applications Configuring Lotus Domino for the Collaboration Applications that is the PIM applications requires the software described in Table 8 29 Table 8 29 Required Software for Configuring Lotus Domino for PIM Applications Name From Version Instructions Lotus Domino Server 5 5 Install the Lotus Domino Server Lotus Java Toolkit for 5 0 5 Install the Lotus Java Toolkit for Java COBRA Java COBRA Installing the Lotus Domino Toolkit for Java COBRA from www lotus com c
71. gt gt or remove lt or lt lt The selection choices are ascending order or descending order based on name sequence number or date a ORDER _NAME_ASC a ORDER_NAME_DESC a ORDER_SEQNO_ASC a ORDER_SEQNO_DESC a ORDER_DATE_ASC a ORDER_DATE_DESC Note The ascending ASC or descending DESC sorting orders cannot be selected for the same property For example you cannot select both ORDER_NAME_ASC and ORDER_NAME_DESC Managing the Wireless Server 3 39 Site Administration 2 Selecting the display application size under a folder which is the number of applications to display in one folder 3 Selecting from the following options for the user s home folder sorting policy a USE_ORDER_SERVICES default value a USER_SERVICES_FIRST a GROUP_SERVICES_FIRST a Selecting the folder icon and audio settings 4 Configuring the URI for the icons images and audio for folder including Generic Title Icon Home Icon Help Icon Login Icon Top Bar Image and Help Audio Event and Listener This Event and Listener page displays event options and available listeners Using this page you enable or disable event generation by selecting from among the event options and listeners You also use the page to add update or remove a listener for the request events session events or response events The Event and Listener page includes the following configuration options for events You enable these options by selecting appropri
72. lt http port gt The URL prefix for the remote JSP page that is invoked by the HTTP Adapter in HTTPS mode The default URL format is https lt server gt lt https port gt The URL for the Wireless Tools which must be configured to enable the functioning of the utilities on the Site Administration page of the System Manager that is the WebCache refresh for master applications and devices and the repository upload and download The default URL is http lt server gt lt port gt webtool The URL for the Wireless Customization Portal The default URL format is http lt server gt lt port gt mobile Managing the Wireless Server 3 13 The Home Page Table 3 2 The Instance URLs Parameter Value J2ME Provisioning Server URL J2ME Web Service Proxy Server URL XMS Center Base URL Audio Library URL Prefix Image Server HTTP URL Image Server HTTPS URL Voice Grammar Server URL A user s device is redirected to this URL when the user opts to download a J2ME application The default URL format is http lt server gt lt port gt provisioning sun ota The URL to the proxy server that makes the Web services available to the J2ME applications built using the JEME Web Services Client Library The default URL format is http lt server gt lt port gt mcs wsproxy proxy The URL to the MM1 entry point for the XMS Center The default URL format is http lt server gt lt port gt xms mm1
73. network protocol provided from the SMSC to the wireless device for example GSM network security In this scenario there is no secure link between the application server and the SMSC This deployment alternative is end to end secure only when the application server and the SMSC reside within the same secure domain that is both SMSC and application server are co located in the same physically secured zone to reduce risk from internal eavesdroppers or attackers carriers providing applications to their subscribers benefit the most from this solution as it fits their business model Point to point security Another alternative consists in securing the link between the application server and the SMSC with the use of VPN virtual private network or SSL secured connections This deployment alternative applies when the application server and the SMSC reside in different albeit secure domains Unfortunately a problem similar to the WAP gap see Section 10 4 2 2 occurs here because there is a translation from the wireless protocol used for communication between the wireless device and the SMSC to the wired protocol used for the communication between the SMSC and the application server that leaves the data exposed at the SMSC In other words this deployment solution is not considered end to end secure However given current technology this is the optimum deployment scenario for businesses that do not have a pre existing relationship with thei
74. of the Async Agent Screen Parameter Value Async Command Line The command syntax or usage text This text is returned to the user when the user Syntax Help issues an application help command to the Async Server Routing Information Select an item and click Edit to access the editing function for the routing presets For more information see Section 5 3 4 1 Application Specific The application specific address to which users send the service invocation Address List messages Enter this address in the format appropriate to the following device types SMS or Email For example enter stock oraclemobile com as the service address for email This is an optional parameter Async Application The default value for each argument Use the Move Up and Move Down functions to Argument List map the Async application arguments to the input arguments 5 3 4 1 Editing the Routing Presets Wireless includes a pre seeded preset MESSAGE_ROUTE_ whose attributes set the routing information for an Async application Routing information along with application link categories supports PremiumSMS and ReverseCharge The routing information enables such information as billing the Large Account to be associated with the application so that the value is returned with the result message This information is eventually carried over to a PremiumSMS or ReverseCharge operator so that the correct account is charged for the message For more information on app
75. of the which forwarded this request The external user name of the which forwarded this request The type of the adapter which is servicing this request not logged currently Time taken by the adapter to service this request Time taken by the transformer to service this request Activity Logging 12 3 Activity Logging Overview Table 12 1 Service Activity Log Column Name Description timestamp Logged event timestamp generated by trigger Table 12 2 describes the DATAFEEDER_METRICS activity log Table 12 2 DATAFEEDER_METRICS Column Name Description HOST_NAME INSTANCE_NAME FEED_NAME UPDATE_DATE ACTUAL_BATCHTIME DOWNLOADED_ROWS ERROR_DESCRIPTION The host name of this data feeder The instance name of this data feeder The name of this data feeder The date and time of this batch run The actual time spent on this batch The publishing rate data rows stored Errors encountered for this batch for future use Table 12 3 describes the PIG_ALERT_ENGINE_STATS log PTG_ALERT_ENGINE_STATS Table 12 3 Notification Engine Activity Log Column Name Description host_name instance_name malert_name malert_oid subscriber_name device_address 12 4 Administrator s Guide The host name of the machine this alert server instance is running on The alert instance name The name of the master alert service which generates this alert message The Object Identifier o
76. or change the encoding as part of the multi byte character support 7 5 4 2 Setting the Input Parameters for Adapters The Input Parameters screen displays the input parameters for the adapter The Content Manager Tool queries the adapter definition to determine the parameters that appear in this panel The master application passes the input parameter values to the adapter s invoke method every time the adapter executes Some parameters rely on user input for values The values for other parameters such as name of the WIDL application in the WIDL interface PAsect ion are set by the master application or application link PAsect ion is an internal parameter not exposed to the end user In addition to PAsect ion Wireless provides these input parameters which are described in Table 7 7 7 18 Administrator s Guide Managing Adapters Table 7 7 Input Parameters for a Non Htip Master Application Variable Value PAservicepath The relative path to a Wireless application such as UsersFolders joe myChain PAdebug The debugging option If true that is set to 1 then Wireless produces verbose output to the log files In this case in addition to notifications and warnings Wireless writes the results of adapter invocations to the log file This enables you to examine application content in its internal XML format which can help you to create result transformers and solve application and transformer problems PAsection Th
77. overhead The runtime data is generated as files which are less expensive The data thus generated is picked up by the Performance Monitor framework and written onto the database In this way database logging is handled asynchronously without impacting the runtime performance of the respective servers For the Multi Channel Server the logging process is handled in the callback of the different events which are generated that is the beginning of a session and its end These events are enabled by default for logging purposes If the administrator chooses not to generate the logging then there is a provision to turn off the Wireless web server logging When this happens the callbacks do not generate log files For other modules such as the Notification Engine Async Listener and Transport Activity Logging 12 1 Activity Logging Overview Server logging into the files occurs when the corresponding request is fulfilled The Data Feeder logs the runtime data directly to the database in batches The generated log files follow a common directory structure which can be configured using the Wireless system management functions at the node process level The top level Logging Directory is specified here the Logger Framework which all modules use creates sub directories process status and archive At runtime the log files generated by the different modules have distinct file suffixes These files are stored in the process directory and
78. period Average Number of Application Invocations per User The average number of application invocations for each user over the specified period Number of Errors Total number of errors for the specified period Async Listener Performance The performance data over the designated time period displays for each process of the Wireless site Number of Messages Received The total number of messages received for the specified period Average Message Response Time second The average processing time per message for the specified period Average Message Queue Size The average message queue size for the specified period Application Access Count The total number of applications accessed for the specified period User Access Count The number of distinct users who accessed the site within the specified period Number of Errors The total number of errors for the specified period Managing the Wireless Server 3 23 Site Performance Notification Engine Performance The performance data over the designated time period will be displayed for each individual process of the wireless site Number of Notifications Processed The total number of notifications processed over the specified time period Number of Notifications Sent The total number of notifications sent over the specified time period Number of Subscribers Notified The total number of users who received notifications over the specified time period A subscri
79. port for email retrieval from the Microsoft A string value for the port number Exchange Server The default value for POP3 is 110 for IMAP it is 143 Mail Protocol The name of mail protocol used to retrieve email from A string value such POP3 or Microsoft Exchange Server IMAP The default value is IMAP Email Domain The email domain name served by the Exchange A string value such as server This value can be different from the Hostname mydomain company com 17 20 Administrator s Guide Exchange Notification Administration in Oracle Application Server Wireless Table 17 1 Parameters of the Microsoft Exchange Notification Event Settings Screen Parameter Description Possible Values Notification The account on the Microsoft Exchange Server thatis A string value such as emailnotif Account used to collect notification messages Password The password for the notification account A password string such as welcome Adapter URL The URL that maps to the directory on the Microsoft A string value such as oracle Path Exchange Server which contains the notification setting files Oracle Application Server Wireless uses this URL to communicate with Exchange server in the following format http hostname adapter_url_path regevent asp 17 4 2 1 Email Notification Engine Backend Configuration The wireless notification architecture in Wireless supports both Microsoft Exchange mail system and Oracle Unified Messaging system Ho
80. realms associated with each of the preceding Service URLs For multiple realms separate these values with comma a Valid Values A string value a Default Value Authorized_Users a Examples Authorized_Users a Show Service URL This parameter enables the server name to be either hidden or displayed on the Oracle Internet File System application a Valid Values yes no a Default Value yes a Examples no a JDBC IFS Service Names A parameter used by the JDBC version of the Oracle Internet File System a Valid Values A string value 8 40 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail a Default Value Ifs1 a Examples Ifs1 a JDBC IFS Service Passwords A parameter used by the JDBC version of the Oracle Internet File System a Valid Values A string value a Default Value ifspassword1 ifspassword2 a Examples ifspassword1 a JDBC IFS Services Parameter used by the JDBC version of the IFS a Valid Values A string value a Default Value ifsserver1 ifsserver2 a Examples ifsserver1 Application Setup OMP URL OMP reference to the group of URLs to use a Valid Values OMP URLs a Default Value omp oracle applications appsetup a Examples omp oracle applications appsetup 8 3 5 1 Linking to the Oracle Internet File System Application You can link to the Oracle Internet File System application using the following virtual URL omp oracle services pim ifs Input Call Parameters The Oracle Internet File System application i
81. refresh the performance data displayed on these paged by clicking the Refresh icon These applications which are started or stopped using the Start OC4J Instance and Stop OC4 Instance buttons are started as stopped as a group these applications cannot be started or stopped individually Standalone Processes This section lists the Wireless process types which vary according to the installation The System Manager displays each of the processes as a hyperlink by clicking one you access detail pages that enable you to start and stop the process view its performance statistics and configure it You can refresh data on the detail pages by clicking the Refresh icon Instance Configuration From this section pictured in Figure 3 4 you can configure the logging directory view the log file and configure the URLs for the current Wireless instance or middle tier Figure 3 4 The Instance Configuration Section of the Home Page C locationeventservert Location Event Server Instance Configuration Logging Directory Instance URLs View Log File Home l Site Performance Site Administration 3 6 Administrator s Guide The Home Page 3 3 1 Basic Site Configuration The General section includes a link called Basic Site Configuration which enables you to quickly configure the entire Oracle Application Server Wireless site by providing a minimum of information Note The site needs only to be configured once after the instal
82. requests fail as in the case where a destination cannot be reached Other requests could be undergoing processing a Total Number of Sending Requests Failed The total number of all calls that are known to have failed a Average Receiving Processing Time ms The average time taken by the messaging system to deliver a received message to the client The server performance is based on the designated time period for each delivery type of each process of the wireless site a Average Sending Processing Time ms The average time taken by messaging system to send a message starting from the sending method called by the client to the driver delivered the message to the proper gateway a Average Receiving Response Time ms Once a transport driver receives a message the message is passed to the transport system by an onMessage method The response time is the time taken by the onMessage method Once the onMessage returns the received message is saved in a database for dispatching a Total Number of Received Messages The total number of times the transport drivers call the onMessage call back method a Total Number of Received Messages Dispatched The total number of received messages which are dispatched to and are accepted by the listeners Among received messages some may be in processing Others may not have been dispatched to the listeners or the listeners may have failed to process the dispatched messages a
83. results in the page being non cacheable as below lt SimpleResult gt lt SimpleMeta cache yes tt1 300 gt lt SimpleResult gt results in the page being cached for 300 seconds Apart from using the SimpleMeta tag to specify cacheability it is possible to use standard HTTP cache control headers and ESI headers to specify cacheability for a page Refer to your documentation on WebCache on how to specify cacheability using ESI headers The order in which cacheability for a given page is evaluated is as follows a Check for HTTP or ESI cacheability headers These override SimpleMeta tags if any are present a SimpleMeta tags for a given page override the invalidation frequency for the application to which it belongs a Ifneither the HTTP ESI headers nor the SimpleMeta headers are present the default cacheability policy for the application is applied to the page Asynchronous Invalidation Despite specifying the cacheability policy for a page at the time of application creation or during the generation of the page it may be necessary to explicitly Integrating Wireless with Other Components 16 11 Integrating Wireless with WebC ache invalidate content in the cache It is possible to invalidate and refresh content in the cache based on a master application or a device You use the System Manager s WebCache Refresh Utilities screens to explicitly invalidate the content in the cache You access these screens from th
84. see Section 5 3 5 in Section 5 Managing Content Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 1 Wireless Application Configuration Parameters Figure 8 1 Editing the Configuration Parameters of a Wireless Application Oracle Application Server E Fa aae a ae Publish Content Content gt Publish Content gt Root Folder gt PIM gt Calendar Edit Application Link Input Parameters Input Parameters Application URL Address imodules pim calendar jsp Calendar jsp Do XML Validation Send HTTP headers Replace Relative URLs true HTTP Method Past Input Encoding JUTF 6 8 2 Wireless Application Configuration Parameters This section details the configuration parameters and related software requirements for the following Wireless Applications a Section 8 3 PIM and Mail a Section 8 3 1 Address Book a Section 8 3 2 Calendar a Section 8 3 3 Directory a Section 8 3 4 Fax a Section 8 3 5 Oracle Internet File System a Section 8 3 6 Instant Messaging a Section 8 3 7 Mail 8 2 Administrator s Guide Wireless Application Configuration Parameters a Section 8 3 8 Short Messaging a Section 8 3 9 Tasks a Section 8 4 Location a Section 8 4 1 Biz Directory a Section 8 4 2 Driving Directions a Section 8 4 3 Location Picker a Section 8 4 4 Maps a Section 8 5 m Commerce Applications a Section 8 5 1 Form Filler a Section 8 5 2 Payment Ap
85. that users have entered previously The fixed compartments are profiles shipping addresses and Internet accounts A wallet is divided into compartments that can hold one or more instruments For example the Credit Cards compartment holds as many credit cards as a user sees fit to enter The Extended Information compartment however holds only one information set 8 90 Administrator s Guide m Commerce Applications 8 5 3 1 Configuring the Wallet Application The Wallet application provides a convenient single click commerce payment mechanism It is a server side encrypted entity that contains payment instrument identification and address information for registered users It enables users to store all the information required to fill out commerce related forms from any application That information is used to complete transactions and through APIs built and maintained by authorized third party application providers can be made available to authorized partners and e merchants It processes requests using proxies for personal and payment instrument information issued through HTML or WML forms by third parties and presents them to users who decide explicitly what information gets sent back to the third party The wallet stores this information securely for users providing them with an easy secure shopping experience and freeing them from repeatedly entering information The information is encrypted in the Repository using a three p
86. the file names and the machine name are enqueued into a SYS_LOGGER_QUEUE The file can be made available for processing based on a configurable file size Additionally Wireless supports log file aging by which the log file is automatically made available for processing after a fixed time This ensures that the skew introduced by the asynchronous nature of the logging process is reduced The log file age also known as close frequency can be configured using the system management functions for the site level configuration of the Performance Monitor The modules which generate these log files with distinct suffixes provide a Database Log File Handler Class which processes these files The handler classes are created by extending a common abstract class which provides the connection and directory and file information The handler to suffix mapping is pre seeded in Wireless during installation Starting Performance Monitor starts up multiple threads each containing an instance of the different handlers Each logger thread dequeues the filenames belonging to the local machine inspects the file suffix and delegates it to the corresponding handler class for further processing The administrator can control the number of Performance Logger threads using the system management functions for the process level configuration 12 1 2 Activity Log Table Description Note Since these tables tend to grow during the life of the servers the admin
87. the name of has been created Figure 4 4 illustrates the Browse User screen displaying this message Figure 4 4 The New User Message Search User By User Name z Matches z Advanced Search You may use asterisks as wildcards in your search User Search Results You are logged in as Orcladmin View Application Links View Devices Edit Reset Previous 4 12 Administrator s Guide Creating Users Click Finish to complete the user The new user appears in the user list in the Browse User screen along with the message User with the name of has been created 4 5 1 Editing User Profiles From the Users screen select the user from the Users screen and then click Edit The Edit screen appears displaying the current user profile information for the selected user When you edit a user profile the Account Number field in the editing screen corresponds to the Primary Phone Number field in the Create User screen For example Figure 4 5 depicts a partial view of the Editing screen in which the value for the Account Number field 1555555000 is the same as the value entered for the user s Primary Phone Number in Figure 4 4 Changing the value for the Account Number however only changes the account number not the value for the primary phone number You cannot edit the email address for a user To edit the values for the Primary Phone Number and for the email address you must edit the user s devices
88. the site can support Use a java locale such as en_US when adding to the list of supported locales depicted in Figure 15 1 For more information see Section 3 6 1 4 in Chapter 3 Managing the Wireless Server Globalization 15 3 Determining the Encoding of a Device Note You can also set the site locale using the Basic Site Configuration wizard accessed from the Home page of the System Manager For more information see Section 3 3 1 in Chapter 3 Managing the Wireless Server Figure 15 1 The Site Locale Screen of the System Manager Partial View Wireless Server System gt Wireless Server Administration gt Site Locale Site Locale Locale English z Time Zone 00 00 Universal Time z Supported Locales English en C Arabic ar C Portuguese Brazil pt_BR French Canada fr_CA Czech cs Danish da C Dutch nl Finnish fi C French fr 15 3 Determining the Encoding of a Device The content encoding of a logical device is used to transport of the result of the device type The default encoding for all of the devices that ship with Wireless is set to UTF 8 The encoding format of a device is that of the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA Using the Foundation Manager you can edit the browser capabilities of a device in the Wireless repository to update it to the encoding appropriate to a given country or locale Figure 15 2
89. time zone using the drop down lists in the Site Locale section Figure 3 6 Configuring the Entry Points for Basic Site Configuration Wireless Server System gt Wireless Server gt Basic Site Configuration Entry Points and Site Locale Basic Site Configuration Entry Points and Site Locale Voice Entry Point Voice Access Phone Number 1 800 123 4568 Async Listener Access Points Email Address fteste1 oracle com SMS Phone Number 18001234567 Example 18001234567 Instant Messaging Address jabberlfoo jabber org Use the format of lt network lt User ID gt Example jabber foo jabber org icq 1 2345 Two Way Pager Address 18001234567 Example 180012343567 or 180001 234567 too com or 1800123 4567 Site Locale Locale English gt Time Zone 00 00 Universal Time X After you complete this wizard the configuration status in General section displays as Configured Note For the Messaging Server function properly that is to send many messages you must also configure such messaging driver instance class parameters as username and password within a messaging server 3 8 Administrator s Guide The Home Page 3 3 2 System Logging From the System Logging section on Home page pictured in Figure 3 7 you can designate the location for the system logging and view the system log file Figure 3 7 The System Logging Section of the Home Page System Logging Logging Directory View Log
90. to listen to the details of contact in the address book or to call or email someone A natural interface is also available for this application which enables quick calling or emailing Users retrieve the contact details by saying the name of the person or by pressing the appropriate key tone when prompted Users hear a list of contacts by saying List The contact details dialog enables The Address Book application responds to the voice commands described in Table 9 7 Table 9 7 Voice Command for the Address Book Application Command Description Call Work Calls someone at their office number Call Home Calls someone at their home number Call Mobile Calls someone s mobile phone Email Person Address Book Menu Initiates an email composing dialog Returns the user to the main Address Book Menu The Address Book Menu includes the following quick commands Call lt person name gt at work Call lt person name gt at home Call lt person name gt on the mobile phone Email lt person name gt Details for lt person name gt 9 3 Configuring Wireless for Async Enabled Applications Async enabled Wireless applications can be accessed using such messaging devices as an SMS phone two way text message capable two way pagers and email Async related terms in Wireless include the following Site address The entry point to the Async Listener akin to a URL to a web site Users send messages to the address to invok
91. to the main body of lt web app gt 14 4 Configuring Wireless for High Availability Deployment In Oracle9iAS 9 0 2 wireless applications cannot be clustered using the Oracle9iAS clustering mechanism However you can configure Oracle9iAS 9 0 2 to achieve a high availability deployment by completing the following steps Note You must back up all files before you modify them 1 Install the Oracle9iAS 9 0 2 Infrastructure tier on one machine and install multiple middle tiers on separate machines Ensure that each of these middle tier installations point to the infrastructure tier 2 Shut down DCM and all of process by running the command oracle home dcm bin dcmctl stop 3 Shut down Oracle Enterprise Manager OEM by running the command oracle home bin emctl stop 14 4 Administrator s Guide Configuring Wireless for High Availability Deployment Verify that the file oracle home opmn conf ons conf exists on each of the mid tiers Verify that the infrastructure tier contains IP address entries for all the other tiers If not file and add missing IP address entries On each middle tier increase the number of processes that need to participate in the default island for the OC4J_Wireless OC4J instance to the desired number This can be done from the Oracle Enterprise Manager Application Server Control or by modifying the file oracle home opmn conf opmn xml For details and concepts of OC4J instance and OC4
92. topic for the alert Click Move Here The Alert Topic browse screen reappears showing the new destination topic as the current context topic The alert displays in the table Clicking the destination topic reveals the alert in its new location Clicking 5 32 Administrator s Guide Managing Alerts Deprecated Cancel while you are in the Move Alerts screen terminates the operation and returns you to the Topic Alert browsing screen 5 7 6 Creating a Topic You can further organize your alerts by creating Topics To create a topic click Add Subtopic in the browsing screen The New Subtopic screen appears where you enter a topic name If you want the topic to be visible and accessible to an end user select Visible Click Add to complete the topic 5 7 7 Editing a Topic You can edit a topic s name and visibility by selecting it from the browsing screen and then by clicking Edit 5 7 8 Assigning Alerts and Topics to a User Group The Group tab enables you to assign alerts and topics to user groups making them available to several users To make an alert or topic available to a group you select the group to which you want to assign the objects and then click Assign Alerts From the Assign Alerts screen select the objects that you want to assign to the group and then click AddToGroup 5 7 9 Removing Alerts and Topics from User Groups To remove an alert or topic from a user group select the object that you want to remove and th
93. used to determine the type of overall action that service requests Table 8 46 describes this mandatory parameter Table 8 46 Input Parameters for Wallet_Action Valid Value Description Requirement GETSTRUCTURE GET_FORM_DATA GET_INET_ACCT GEN_USER_PASS Used to retrieve the Wallet structure definition Triggers WALLET_STRUCTURE Used when a third party application wants getWallet InfoRequest to request information from the user s mobile wallet Triggers generateUserResponse as output Used to add Internet account information createInternetAccountRequest in the user s wallet Used to automatically generate the username and password information Triggers generat eUserResponse as output getWalletinfoRequest Table 8 47 describes the parameters of this optional group Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 93 m Commerce Applications Table 8 47 Parameters of the getWalletinfoRequest Group Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value FORM_TITLE Yes This parameter is displayed as__ A string For example part of the Wallet application ie for the d ratiohof th cali FORM_TITLE Movie Ticket Purchase GET_DATA Yes A comma separated string of Valid values in this string are tokens which specify which CC triggers creditCardData as values to retrieve from the output wallet BA triggers bankAccountData as output a FN triggers FIRSTNAME as output
94. with the same user experience but with different back ends In its Lotus Domino mode it fully integrates with a Lotus Domino server to enable mobile Domino users In its Microsoft Exchange Mode it fully integrates with a Microsoft Exchange server to mobile enable Exchange users The Tasks application requires third party software For more information refer to Section 8 3 10 1 and Section 8 3 10 1 1 Configuring the Task Module The Tasks application includes the following configuration parameters a Tasks Java Driver class The java driver implementing the Tasks backend a Valid Values For Microsoft Exchange Server oracle panama module pim tasks exchange ExchangeTaskService For the Lotus Domino Server oracle panama module pim tasks domino DominoTaskService a Default Value oracle panama module pim tasks exchange ExchangeTaskService Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 57 PIM and Mail a Tasks Server The server name or IP address for the Tasks server a Valid Values In Exchange mode enter the name or IP address of the Exchange server In Lotus Domino mode enter the name and port of the Lotus Domino server separated by colon The port is where the DIOP and HTTP services are running on the Domino server Default Value localhost Examples exchange mycompany com dominoserver mycompany com 82 a Exchange Data URL The location of the ASP page Tasks asp residing on the IIS server that fetches the
95. you can publish Wireless applications to user groups and to manage user groups The Content Manager s step by step wizards enable you to create the following objects Application Links The Content Manager enables you to publish the master applications as an application link This pointer inherits the parameters of a master application but can also be used to tailor the core application to the needs of a particular user group or situation For example for a master application to deliver restaurant information for an entire city its adapter takes a single parameter a location and returns a list of restaurants throughout the city While the master application can specify a broad location such as the city itself you can create application links based on a specific parameter such as a district or area within that city You can then distribute the Managing Content 5 1 Overview of the Content Manager application links as appropriate to user groups that you assemble based on the users locations Folders Folders enable you to organize application links and bookmarks When you assign a folder to a user group you make its subfolders application links and bookmarks within it accessible to that user group Modules Modules or moduable application are reusable Wireless and Voice applications that can be invoked as a normal application or by another application to return a result Wireless provides several applications that are
96. you create Web Integration applications provide these parameters a OutputType Managing Foundation Services 7 17 Managing Adapters a PAsection a InputEncoding The OutputType specifies the type of XML output that the adapter should return You can specify RawResult to return content in Adapter Result format or SimpleResult to return content in Simple Result format For returning the raw result format you must create a result transformer that converts the result into Simple Result for the device transformer The result transformer should have the same name as the value you use for the PAsect ion parameter that is it should have the same name as the WIDL application You use RawResult for chained services PAsection is the name of the WIDL application that you want the master application to invoke A WIDL interface can include more than one WIDL application Wireless lists the WIDL application names in a selection list in the value field InputEncoding specifies the encoding used to encode the source document The source document is the URL that was used to create the WIDL file for this application The default value of this parameter is UTF 8 If the language of the source document is an Asian language you can change the default encoding to the appropriate multi byte encoding according to the IANA standards for the particular Asian language that is used in the source document The Input Encoding parameter enables you to specify
97. your PIN Click here to change your PIN Access by Web Browser Launch your device s browser screen and enter the Device The system may be accessed by sending and receiving text Portal URL Enter your User Name and Password if prompted messages such as SMS Email Instant Messaging or Two Bookmark this site for easier access in the future Way Pager Click here to learn more about access by 2 way messaging Device ee https dsunran22 us oracle com 7777 ptg rm Email Access askdemo2 dlsun1897 us oracle com User Name orcladmin Address xmsdemo2 dlsun1897 us oracle com 2 3 Accessing the Wireless Tools This section describes how to log into the Oracle Application Server Wireless Tools to access the User Manager Service Designer Foundation Manager and Content Manager If you access the Oracle Application Server Wireless Tools in standalone mode then you can also access the System Manager Access the login page for the Oracle Application Server Wireless Tools through the following URL http lt host gt lt port gt webtool login uix Verifying the Wireless Installation 2 5 Accessing the Wireless Tools For example you access the login page through the following URL http hostname 7777 webtool login uix Note 7777 is the default port number for Oracle Application Server Wireless The port number range is 7777 to 7877 To ensure that you are using the correct port number check the port number for Ora
98. 0 installed on your RightFax server for server side application conversion On Solaris installations this cover page is located at ORACLE _ HOME iaswv20 wireless j2ee applications modules modules web images pim fax FCS doc On Windows NT installations this cover page is located at ORACLE __ HOME iaswv20 wireless j2ee applications modules modules web images pi m fax FCS doc To use the provided fax cover page 1 Copy the FCS doc to the directory RightFax FCS on the machine in which you installed your RightFax server 2 Specify which cover sheet to use a Run Enterprise Fax Manager Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 33 PIM and Mail b Highlight Users under the appropriate server and double click the user ID Administrator 3 Click the Default Cover Sheets tab 4 In the Cover Sheet Defaults group box check Send Cover Sheets and select the cover sheet file FCS doc in the Cover Sheet Model field 5 Highlight Groups under the appropriate server and double click the group ID Everyone 6 Click the Basic Information tab 7 Select the cover sheet file FCS doc in the Cover Sheet Model field Note See the RightFax Administrator s Guide for detailed instructions on fax cover sheets Configuration Parameters The Fax application includes the following configuration parameters a Fax server URL The fax server HTTP URL It can be an IP Address or a domain name addre
99. 003 should be in the MM YYYY form This also must be defined in wallet properties CC_LANDMARK_ NAME Yes The Location Mark A string For example CC_ of the credit card LANDMARK _ Restriction the NAME Office at Oracle parameters for the street address such as CC_ADDRESS_ LINE1 are built on the fly as Wallet Module knows that Billing Address is a reference toa location mark CC_ADDRESS_LINE1 No A string For example CC_ ADDRESS_LINE1 500 Oracle Pkwy CC_ADDRESS_LINE2 No A string For example CC_ ADDRESS_LINE2 CC_CITY No A string For example CC_ CITY Redwood Shores CC_STATE No A string For example CC_ STATE CA CC_COUNTRY No A string For example CC_ COUNTRY USA CC_ZIPCODE No A string For example CC_ ZIPCODE 94065 bankAccountData The Bank Account structure defined in wallet properties All of the fields are returned as request parameters Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 97 m Commerce Applications Table 8 50 describes the parameters of this optional group Table 8 50 Parameters of the bankAccountData Group Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value BA BA_HOLDER_NAME BA_HOLDER_ADDRESS_LANDMARK BA_ACCT_NUMBER BA_ACCT_TYPE BA_FI_ROUTING_NUMBER BA_FIl_ NAME 8 98 Administrator s Guide Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes The short name for the bank account The name of the holder of the bank account Statement Address this
100. 1 1 Configuring the Biz Directory Input Parameters This application requires a Wireless business directory provider as described in Table 8 30 Table 8 30 Requirements for the Biz Directory Application Name External Provider s Instructions From Business Directory Provider otn oracle com See application providers 2 0 8 4 1 2 Configuring the Input Parameters The Biz Directory includes the following input parameters WEB URL Reserved for future use a Valid Values Any valid URL a Default Value localhost a Examples localhost Records per page a Description The number of items displayed per page used to indicate how many businesses or business categories are displayed per page a Default Value 9 a Examples 9 Application Setup OMP URL The OMP reference to the URL group a Valid Values OMP URLs a Default Value omp oracle applications appsetup a Example omp oracle applications appsetup Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 63 Location 8 4 1 3 Linking to the Biz Directory You link to the Biz Directory application using the following virtual URL omp oracle services location bizdir Table 8 31 describes the input call parameters of the Biz Directory application Table 8 31 The Input Call Parameters of the Biz Directory Application Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value PH No Phrase keywords to A string For example PH Pizza search for PH Restaurants PH Oracl
101. 1 1 Overview of Activity Logger Internals s ss sesssesssesiesisseessissessessersiesesnesneneenesses 12 1 12 1 2 Activity Log Table Description s sss ssssesssssessississtessssiesiestesenssesiestesrienesnrsneenienesses 12 2 Optimizing Oracle Application Server Wireless 13 1 OVETVIEW e oi en i es Seats eieaa i e aE e E a Aa a aa a aas oaa E Ee orae Ea 13 1 13 2 Transport Performance Monitoring e ssesssrssssissesssstesissisnesninsesresnesnennieseenreseesseseenet 13 2 13 2 1 Factors Affecting Transport Performance se ssssseesserissesssesresiesressieresnesnseseeresses 13 4 13 3 Optimizing the Async Listener Performance ss sssessesisresssssirtesresssssresiesessressesseseesee 13 6 13 3 1 Tuning the Performance of the Async Listener e ssesssssiesississssssesiestesreseesseseenee 13 7 13 4 Optimizing Data Feeder Performance sssssesssesississsstertisiesisssesiesiesessrenieseesressesseseenee 13 8 13 5 Optimizing the Oracle HTTP Server sessssesssssessissessestesissessesnintisresnesneenieseeseessesneseenee 13 9 13 5 1 EESE E a EERE E A A E A EE 13 9 13 5 2 MaxRe q estsPerChild eneisniiiien Site t E E E E E 13 9 13 5 3 Maxopareservers korpan Aui e AA a N ANS 13 9 13 5 4 MUN Sp are Servers sisisi iea a aaan as a r EEEE S EErEE S RE E RE Sota 13 10 13 5 5 Start Servers ied sdedstevntesteasderSecwsiesldeevelastiecvavbiddienatiescha e eensiealdeasteiess 13 10 13 5 6 Timeouts 55 et secsven boa tecoates
102. 10 5 that is WTLS encrypted data must be decrypted and be SSL encrypted The WAP gap refers to this split second when the data is in the clear at the WAP gateway this alone breaks end to end privacy and is a cause of concern for the banking industry and the most security conscious For WAP 1 x deployments bridging the WAP gap can be accomplished by redirection to subordinate pull proxy gateway with WAP 1 2 If in addition to the WAP gateway at the carrier side there is another WAP gateway residing within the same physically secured trusted domain as the application server that is both are owned by the same company then communication can be redirected to this enterprise gateway and can thus be considered end to end private In this way the WTLS connection would be established with a gateway located at the site of the application service provider and it would also allow for WTLS class 3 client and server authentication Some gateways such as the OpenWave s Mobile Gateway server already support the deployment of proxy gateways at the premises of the content provider In this model after the subordinate proxy discovery process requests will be rerouted to the proxy gateway installed within the secure premises of the provider hosting the Wireless application server The network operator retains the control of the calls at the cost of sharing the burden of supporting the infrastructure required for end to end secure communications T
103. 12 defining in integrated mode 3 12 defining in standalone mode 3 12 specifying for middle tier 3 11 user groups assigning alerts and topics to 5 33 publishing objects to 5 21 user home root folders creating 5 22 editing 5 25 User Manager creating anew user 4 9 editing user profiles 4 13 Quick Search function 4 8 resetting user passwords 4 14 search functions 4 7 viewing application links 4 15 viewing devices 4 16 viewing user logs 4 17 user provisioning configuring 3 32 user roles 4 2 users creating 4 9 creating with DAS or OID DAS creating users 4 5 editing user information 4 13 logging information 4 17 resetting password 4 14 searching for 4 7 UTF 8 pages adjusting display 4 14 V virtual users provisioning 3 32 voice access provisioning voice gateway phone numbers 9 8 voice enabled applications testing 9 13 WwW Wallet application configuration parameters 8 91 configuring 8 91 linking to 8 92 output parameters 8 95 overview 8 90 WAP security 10 15 WAP gateways configuring 9 4 WAP phones configuring 9 5 WAP profiles 3 33 Web Integration Adapter setting init parameters 7 17 setting input parameters 7 17 Web based applications refreshing performance data 3 6 WebCache 13 10 configuring 3 31 integration with Wireless 16 5 optimizing 13 10 setting the refresh 3 59 WIDL Interface parameter 7 17 Wireless Portlets developing 16 17 Wireless server acces
104. 3 configuring for mobile applications 5 11 Index 4 Open Digital Rights Language ORDL documents 7 28 opmn xml updating 3 16 optimizing performance by increaseing heap size 13 8 Oracle HTTP Server optimizing performance 13 9 Oracle Internet File System application configuration parameters 8 39 input call parameters 8 41 linking to 8 41 output parameters 8 42 overview and required software 8 39 OracleAS Portal accessing Wireless 16 16 P partner applications in wireless single sign on 11 5 to 11 7 PAsection parameter 7 20 Payment application capturing transactions 8 89 configuring 8 85 linking to 8 86 overview 8 84 Performance Monitor configuring 3 35 PIM overview 8 7 PIM applications ASPs 8 60 connecting to Microsoft Exchange Server and Lotus Domino Server 8 59 PL SQL procedures in applications 7 16 Pocket PC devices accessing the Wireless server from 9 2 portlets development 16 17 PremiumSMS 5 13 5 25 processes managing Web based and standalone processes on the middle tier 3 14 standalone 3 15 standalone processes 3 15 Web based applications 3 15 Provisioning Server configuring 3 53 Proxy Server configuring HTTP HTTPS 3 26 3 27 configuring through the Home page 3 7 publishing objects to a user group 5 20 R redirection agent in Single Sign On 11 3 Region Modeling Tool 7 24 ReverseCharge 5 13 5 25 routing presets editing 5 13 S security access c
105. 9999 There are no restrictions for this parameter Examples To return a first name configure the mailto parameter as follows mailto john To return an email address configure the mailto parameter as follows mailto john smith mycompany com The Fax application enables users to send documents text and Web pages to any fax machine Required Software Table 8 15 describes the required third party software for the Fax application 8 32 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail Table 8 15 Required Software for the Fax Application From Name Instructions Version s RightFax Server available from Install the RightFax server 7 2 RightFax RightFax Integration Module Install the Integration module on fax server 7 2 available from RightFax RightFax PFD module available Install the PFD module on the fax server 1 2 from RightFax RightFax Java API available from Copy RFJava_api zip Fax server s 7 2 RightFax RightFax Production xml java directory to ORACLE_ HOME wireless lib on Solaris to ORACLE_ HOME wireless lib on NT Include this zip file in the OC4J classpath by adding the following line to ORACLE_ HOME j2ee OC4J_Wireless config application xml lt libarary path wireless lib RFJava_api zip gt Sample Cover Page Because the Fax application uses a customized cover sheet file you should use the provided sample cover page To use this cover page you must have Microsoft Word 200
106. Active Sessions 0 Average Response Time seconds 0 0 Average Session Duration seconds 0 0 Applications Invoked 0 J2ME Applications Downloaded 0 Messages Sent 0 Notifications Sent 0 Messages Received 0 Component Performance Multi Channel Server Asyne Listener Location Related Notification Engine Messaging Server Home Site Performance Site Administration Clicking the links in the Component Performance section of the page enables you to view performance metrics within a selected time frame The Performance page and the individual component performance pages each have a timestamp with a Refresh button which enables you to reload the page to update the performance or status information Multi Channel Server Performance The performance data over the designated time period is displayed for each process of the Wireless site a Average Response Time second The average application response time over the specified period a Average Session Duration second 3 22 Administrator s Guide Site Performance The average session duration for session which invoked applications over the specified period Number of Users The number of users who invoked applications over the specified period Number of Applications Invoked The number of applications invoked over the specified period Average Number of Application Invocations per Session The average number of application invocations for each session over the specified
107. Additional Information screen the final page of the wizard Select the Visible checkbox Click Finish 4 You now publish the application link by assigning it to a user group Select the Access Control Content Tab The Groups screen appears Select a Group such as Guests and then click the Assign Application button Select DataService from the list of Available Services and click the Add To Group button Click Finish You can now access the application from the device portal The time stamp displayed as a result of invoking DateService does not change for 40 seconds indicating that the application has been cached for 40 seconds and invalidated after When the page in the cache expires content is fetched from the content source only 16 14 Administrator s Guide Integrating Wireless with WebCache on a by demand basis That is after 40 seconds elapse WebCache does not refresh the content immediately but will do so only after a new request for the page is received 16 2 1 6 Dynamic Specification of Page Invalidation The time for which the cache can retain the page without refreshing it has been set to 40 seconds during the application creation However this value can be changed dynamically at the time of generation of the Mobile XML This can be done in two ways 16 2 1 7 Mobile XML Markup In this case the generated Mobile XML can have a SimpleMeta tag to attain this For more information see Policy based Invalidati
108. Application Server Wireless stored in Oracle home install portlist ini For more information on port usage see Oracle Application Server Installation Guide and the Oracle Application Server Administrator s Guide After you enter the URL the login page for the Wireless Customization Portal appears This page includes the following buttons Table 2 1 Login Screen Buttons Button Description Login Clicking this button logs you in after you have entered the correct user name and password Help Clicking this button displays a list of help topics Page Help Clicking this button displays help topics specific to this screen 4 Enter your user name and then enter your password If you are an administrator enter orcladmin as your user name The password is set during installation but can be changed with the User Manager 5 Click Login 2 4 Administrator s Guide Accessing the Wireless Tools After you successfully log in the Welcome screen appears Figure 2 3 which includes your addresses for accessing Oracle Application Server Wireless applications Figure 2 3 The Welcome Screen of Wireless Customization Partial View Oracle Application Server f E D 7 8G You are logged in as orcladm Access Information Access by Voice _ Dial one of the Access Numbers and enter your Account Number which is also your Primary Phone Number and PIN Account 46605065029 umber PIN Enter
109. Applications 8 21 PIM and Mail Input Call Parameters for the Calendar Application The input call parameters of the calendar application include the getApptDetails group This optional group includes the following input call parameter which is described in Table 8 9 Table 8 9 The ID Parameter Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value ID Yes The input ID required to A string For example ID 1324 retrieve appointment details Table 8 10 describes the parameters of add Appt group Table 8 10 Parameters of addAppt Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value TITLE Yes The title of the appointment A string For example TITLE Dinner at Joe s DATE Yes The date of the appointment A string For example DATE December 31 2001 TIME Yes The time of the appointment A string For example TIME 8 00 p m DURATION Yes The duration of the appointment A string For example DURATION 1 hour NOTES Yes The notes for the appointment A string For example NOTES Remember the brief TYPE Yes The type of appointment either A string For example personal or business TYPE Business LOCATION Yes The location of an appointment A string For example LOCATION Home REMIND Yes The time interval before the event A string For example REMIND 1 reminder occurs hour SHARING Yes A flag that enables or disables the For example SHARING TRUE sharing of an appointment If True the appointment is shared if FA
110. Apply saves any changes Clicking Cancel sets the parameters back to their previous values and returns you to the browsing screen Managing Foundation Services 7 13 Managing Adapters 7 4 3 Deleting a Transformer To delete a transformer select a transformer from the browsing screen and then click Delete 7 5 Managing Adapters Selecting the Adapters tab invokes the browsing screen for the adapters Figure 7 10 This screen includes a table which lists the current adapters by their object IDs in the repository their status as valid adapters that is available to master applications and by the Java class that either implements the adapter or serves as an entry point to the classes that implement the adapter Figure 7 10 Partial View of the Browse Adapters Screen Adapters Services gt Adapters Welcome orcladmin Adapters HttpAdapter OC4JAdapter 440 SQLAdapter 442 WeblntegrationAdapter 443 oracle panama adapter http HttpAdapter oracle panama adapter http LocalHttpAdapter oracle panama adapter sql SQLAdapter oracle panama adapter wi VVeblntegrationAdapter o a a Create Adapter You use this screen to create edit and delete adapters 7 5 1 Creating an Adapter To create an adapter click Create Adapter in the browsing screen The Create Adapter screen appears To create an adapter you must define the following parameters which are descri
111. BR Portuguese Brazil es_ES Spanish Spain ro Romanian fi Finnish ru Russian fr French sk Slovak fr_CA French Canada sv Swedish hu Hungarian th Thai it Italian tr Turkish iw Hebrew Zh_CN Chinese PRC ja Japanese Zh_TW Chinese Taiwan You enable these locales after you have entered them as described in Section 6 4 2 and reset the system by clicking the Reset button For example to support users whose preferred locale is ru you add ru and then the locale s description for example Russian and then click the Reset button to enable the locale for users 6 4 5 1 Adding New Locales If you want to support a locale that is not among those listed in Table 6 2 or if you want to add a locale to your own branding then you may have to create additional supporting resources such as text translations For more information see the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide 6 6 Administrator s Guide Managing Locales 6 4 6 Resolving Locales The following is a description of the algorithm used by Mobile Studio to resolve which locale to use given the list of preferred locales for the user which can be obtained from the request 1 Mobile Studio searches for the preferred locale L for example in the list of enabled locales for Mobile Studio If Mobile Studio finds L then Mobile Studio returns it and stops the search If L cannot be found then Mobile Studio performs another search on a new L by using o
112. By default these appear in order by sequence number and then by name You can enter values in the sequence fields to rearrange the order in which the application links appear and then set parent folder renderer type as System and the parent folder sorting option as Sequence Number By default Wireless sorts applications in ascending order by sequence number then by name See Section 5 3 2 2 for more information on setting the System folder rendering option The invocation cost to the user for accessing the application link If the cost of the application link is not zero 0 then Wireless logs the application link cost invocation in the tx_panama log file A drop down list of display languages for the application link Users cannot access an application link if their display language differs from that associated with this application link The URI of an image used as the icon that appears on top of the screen when this application link becomes the current application You do not need to specify the format type in this URI as Wireless selects the image format appropriate to the user s device The URI of an image used as the icon that appears next to the application link in a menu listing You do not need to specify the format type in this URI as Wireless selects the image format appropriate to the user s device The URI of the audio file for example a wav file read aloud by voice reader software when users access a service You do
113. C_ used for the variable name NUMBER Email EM variable The parameters must AIL Address Addres be URL encoded s APPLICATION No Specifies the application name A string For ReturnGroup to identify the request to the example Form Filler which in turn passes it to the m Wallet When it is not specified the URL will be treated as the application name This must be URL encoded APPLICATION For m Filler Demo 8 5 1 7 Output Parameters The Form Filler s output parameters include the following ReturnGroup This group includes the following parameters which return the values for the Form Filler Table 8 42 describes the parameters of the ReturnGroup 8 82 Administrator s Guide m Commerce Applications Table 8 42 Parameters of the Return Group Parameter Mandatory Description Valid Values FORMFILLURL Yes FORMFILLPARAMS Yes SUCCESSCODE Yes The URL of the form to be filled Restriction URL encoded The parameters inside the form Restrictions The parameters must be URL encoded a For successful retrievals the parameters should be a comma separated ordered list of Ylabel variable name value pairs Where label is the label used in the form that is used for the variable name variable value contains the result from the m Wallet applicaiton a For unsuccessful retrievals the parameters return nothing The success code indicates whether there was a successful req
114. DR gt lt PROCESS_ D gt null Thread HttpRequestHandler 6079693 5 main lt PROCESS_ID gt lt USER_ID gt xlu lt USER_ID gt lt HEADER gt lt PAYLOAD gt lt MSG_TEXT gt HttpRequestHandler 6079693 webtool common PtgErrorLog outputText PtgErrorLog java 19 train Couldnt find enclosing form lt MSG_TEXT gt lt PAYLOAD gt lt MESSAGE gt lt MESSAGE gt lt HEADER gt lt TSTZ_ORIGINATING gt 2003 04 03712 08 35 065 08 00 lt TSTZ_ORIGINATING gt lt ORG_ID gt ORACLE lt ORG_ID gt lt COMPONENT_ID gt WIRELESS lt COMPONENT_ID gt lt MSG_TYPE TYPE ERROR gt lt MSG_TYPE gt lt MSG_LEVEL gt 1 lt MSG_LEVEL gt lt HOST_ID gt xlu pe lt HOST_ID gt lt HOST_NWADDR gt 144 25 172 231 lt HOST_NWADDR gt lt PROCESS_ D gt null Thread HttpRequestHandler 6079693 5 mainj lt PROCESS_ID gt lt USER_ID gt xlu lt USER_ID gt 3 3 2 3 Configuring the Site System Logging From the General Configuration section Figure 3 9 on the Site Administration page you can change the log level for the whole using the configuration page accessed by clicking System Logging 3 10 Administrator s Guide The Home Page Figure 3 9 Accessing the System Logging from the Site Administration Page System gt Wireless Server Wireless Server Home Site Performance Site Administration The settings on this page apply to all wireless servers of the Wirel servers which share the same database General Configuration HTTP H
115. Figure 4 5 Editing a User Profile Oracle Application Server Wireless Users Users gt johnguestuser Edit User Basic Information User Name fiohnguestuser SCS Display Name fiohnguest s lt CSsS Password Password Confirmation o Account Number ji5555555000 PIN DO Edit the values as needed See Section 4 5 for information on the parameters of a user s profile The password and PIN are not required when editing user profiles but you can edit these values if needed Managing Users 4 13 Creating Users Click Finish The Users browse screen appears displaying any changes pertinent to the labels in the Users screen for example the user name Note A user assigned to the User Manager role but not assigned to the Super User role can only edit his or her own user profile the user profiles for end users and the profiles of other users assigned only to the User Manager role Users can view the Wireless Tools in 11 languages and the Wireless Customization in 29 languages The languages available for Wireless Customization include the 11 languages available to the Wireless Tools in addition to 18 more 4 5 1 1 Viewing UTF 8 Pages in Localized Languages with Netscape 4 7 or Lower Some languages may not display properly if you use Netscape 4 7 or a lower version In some cases characters may display as boxes To fix this problem configure the Netscape preferences as follows From the Netscape too
116. File 3 3 2 1 Configuring the Logging Directory To configure the logging directory 1 Click the Logging Directory link The logging page appears 2 Enter the name of the logging directory 3 Click OK Note For the log directory change to take effect you must restart all of the Wireless processes including Wireless OC4J Instance and all the standalone processes 3 3 2 2 Viewing a Log File You can view a log file by clicking the View Log File link Depending on the log level specified at Site level you can view error messages warning messages and notify messages Wireless provides extensive runtime exception logging When fatal exceptions occur Wireless logs the exceptions and stack traces in the system log file Using the View Log File page Figure 3 8 you specify the number of lines from the end of the log file that the System Manager displays You can also print a selected segment of the file as a text file by clicking Printable Page The page displays the segment of the log file to be printed Use the browser s back button to navigate from this page Managing the Wireless Server 3 9 The Home Page Figure 3 8 The View Log File Page Partial View Wireless Server System gt Wireless Sener gt View Log File C iasw904 wireless logs log xml View Log File C iaswv904 wireless logs log xml View Last 200 lines Z lt HOST_ID gt xlu pe lt HOST_ID gt lt HOST_NWADDR gt 144 25 172 231 lt HOST_NWAD
117. Group Name 8 44 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail The initial group name to assign to Yahoo buddies acquired whenever the Yahoo transport is configured It can be any string For example My YahooFriends a Valid Values Any name a Default Value Yahoo a Example Yahoo Friends MSN Transport The MSN Instant Messaging transport if any configured on the Jabber Server used by the service For example msn jabber org a Valid Values A valid value defined in the jabber xml a Default Value a Example msn oraclemobile com MSN Group The initial group name to assign to MSN buddies acquired whenever the MSN transport is configured It can be any string Example MyMSNFriends a Valid Values Any name a Default Value MSN a Examples MSN Friends Refresh Timelb The refresh page timeout for some pages accessed by the service This value is in milliseconds a Valid Values Any value in milliseconds a Default Value 20000 a Examples 30000 Log Length The maximum number of messages the service will display between you and another user a Valid Values Any integer a Default Value 10 a Examples 15 Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 45 PIM and Mail a Use Proxy This parameter is obsolete It is include for backward compatibility only a Proxy Host This parameter is obsolete and is included for backward compatibility only a Proxy Port This parameter is now obsolete and is included for b
118. ID number You cannot create a virtual user Wireless creates virtual users dynamically This parameter does not apply to registered users or to anonymous users Select Registered for registered Wireless users Select Anonymous when creating an anonymous user an entity that Wireless automatically assigns to an unknown user An unknown user is a user whose device does not send any identifiable numbers through the HTTP header when accessing a Wireless site Creating an anonymous user enables unknown users to access public applications and explore the site before registering The user s gender select either male or female The user s date of birth You can select this from the calendar or enter it in the field using the mm dd yyyy format Selecting this check box enables users to log in Leaving this check box clear prevents a user from logging in By default this option is enabled A drop down list of display languages This is a required field See Section 4 5 1 1 A drop down of time zones for the user s locale Note Wireless generates and delivers notifications to the time zone selected by the user rather than by the time zone of the Wireless server itself This is a required field A drop down list of root folders which can represent user communities or providers The Content Manager creates these folders which provision the home folders for users This is a required field Creating Users Table 4 3 Parameters of the Cr
119. INE only for Bank Account transactions The transaction type This could be an authorization only capture only or authorization and capture transaction This parameter informs the Wallet Application of the types of instrument allowed by the merchant credit cards only bank accounts only or both A valid float number For TRXID example 100 00 A valid Cybercash CheckFree or Verisign ID Restriction the merchant should be a registered Wireless user ONLINE online transaction for Credit Cards OFFLINE offline transaction for both Credit Card and Bank Accounts Offlline transactions will be processed by a batch job in CRM IPayment AUTH Authorization only CAPTURE Capture previously authorized transactions AUTH_CAPTURE Authorize and Capture transaction at the same time CC When the merchant accepts only Credit Card transactions BA When the merchant accepts only Bank Accounts transactions CC BA When the merchant accepts both Credit Cards and Bank Accounts transactions TRXID TRXID TRXID TRXID Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 87 m Commerce Applications Table 8 44 Input Call Parameters for the Payment Application Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value Triggers Output DESCR No The description of this Any string with TRXID transaction if the description information merchant wants tosavea Example DESCR Book personalized message for
120. J islands refer to the OC4J Administration Guide For instance if you modify opmn xm1 a typical entry to start four OC4J processes in the default island would be of the form lt oc4j maxRetry 3 instanceName 0C4J_Wireless gid 0C4J_ Wireless numProcs 4 gt In the mod_oc4 j configuration file for each middle tier that is oracle home Apache Apache conf mod_oc4j conf modify the mount point entries for the Wireless runtime If two mid tiers M1 and M2 are used the entries should be of the form Oc4jMount ptg instance ml cl mysite com 0C4J_ Wireless m2 c2 se4637 u sr006 us oracle com O0C4J_Wireless and Oc4jMount ptg instance ml cl mysite com 0C4J_ Wireless m2 c2 se4637 u sr006 us oracle com O0C4J_Wireless c1 and c2 are the respective Oracle9iAS 9 0 2 instance names You determine instance names by running the command oracle home dcm bin dcmctl whichInstance These entries should be exactly the same for all middle tier machines Run oracle home dcm bin demct1 updateConfig to update the DCM repository with the configuration file changes On slow machines a DCM error timeout of the form ADMN 906005 may appear If this occurs run the command oracle home dcem bin dcemctl getReturnStatus and wait until the command exits This confirms that the changes have been propagated to the DCM repository Load Balancing and Failover 14 5 Configuring Wireless for High Availability Deployment 8 Add the tag
121. LN triggers LASTNAME as output a EMAIL triggers output EMAIL as output PHONE triggers phoneData as output a INT_ACC triggers internetAccountData as output SHIP triggers shippingData as output For example a GET_DATA FN LN SHIP a GET_DATA CC PHONE INT_ACC APPICATION No The application name A string For example displayed to the user and APPLICATION Bookshop Application stored in the History file so that the user always knows which applications are requesting the user s wallet information ISEXCLUSIVE No If set to True then the user can A boolean chose either Credit Card or Bank Account This parameter is used only by the Payment application 8 94 Administrator s Guide m Commerce Applications Table 8 47 Parameters of the getWalletinfoRequest Group Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value DOMAIN Yes A string For example ACCOUNT__ Yes ID PASSWORD Yes DOMAIN http wwww oraclemobile com A string For example ACCOUNT_ ID smurgle A string For example PASSWORD 237894 8 5 3 4 Output Parameters of the Wallet Application Table 8 48 describes the output parameters of the Wallet application Table 8 48 Output Parameters for the Wallet Application Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value WALLET_SELECT Yes WALLET_STRUCTURE No Indicates that the operation completed correctly If the user cancels the wallet operation this variable contains False Th
122. LSE then the appointment is not shared 8 22 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail The Calendar application also includes the delet eAppt group Table 8 11 describes the deleteAppt parameter Table 8 11 The deleteAppt Parameter Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value ID Yes The input ID required to select an A string For example ID 1324 appointment Output Parameters of the Calendar Application The Calendar application includes the following output parameters The output parameters of the calendar application include the getApptDetailsRresponse group This optional group includes the following parameters which are described in Table 8 12 Table 8 12 The Output Parameters of the getApptDetailsResponse Group Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value TITLE Yes The title of the appointment A string For example TITLE Dinner at Joe s DATE Yes The date of the appointment A string For example DATE December 31 2001 TIME Yes The time of the appointment A string For example TIME 8 00 p m DURATION Yes The duration of the A string For example DURATION 1 hour appointment NOTES Yes The notes for the appointment A string For example NOTES Remember the brief TYPE Yes The type of appointment A string For example TYPE Business either personal or business LOCATION Yes The location of an A string For example LOCATION Home appointment REMIND Yes The time interval befo
123. Load Start AIL Stop All Active Sessions 0 Average Response Time seconds Average Session Duration seconds Status Up Version 9 0 4 0 0 A an Applications Invoked 0 ost dsunran2e us oracle com J2ME Applications Downloaded 0 OC4J Instance OC4J Wireless Notifications Sent 0 Configuration Status Configured Messages Sent 1 Related Link Basic Site Configuration Messages Received 0 Required configuration for the Wireless Site TIP This data is based on the last 10 minutes plications ons are the OC4J applications running in the Wireless OC4J instance They must be started and stopped Start OC4J instance Stop OC4J instance ogether by starting and stopping the OC4J instance t DYN_ADAPTATIONSERVER_1072 Multimedia Adaptation Server t DYN ASYNCAGENT 1074 lAsvne Listener K Web Based 3 1 1 Refreshing the System Manager Screens The Home Site Performance and Administration pages each have a timestamp that indicates the status of the data displayed on the page To update this data click the the Refresh icon Refreshing the Home and Site Performance pages reloads the 3 2 Administrator s Guide Logging Into the System Manager performance or status information not the configuration data To refresh the configuration data that is to force the configuration data to be reloaded from the database click the refresh icon on the Site Administration page The timestamp on the Home and Site Perform
124. ME ENQUEUE_END_TIME DEQUEUE_BEGIN_TIME DEQUEUE_END_TIME PROCESS_STATUS CODE PROCESS_BEGIN_TIME PROCESS_END_TIME The transport instance host on which the message is accepted For a sending message this is the host of the client for a received message this is the host of the driver The Wireless instance id on which the message is accepted For a sending message this is the instance id of the client For a received message this is the host of the transport server that the driver is on The time the message is to be accepted For a sending message it is the time the send method is called For a received message it is the time the onMessage method is called All time is Java system time The time the message is accepted For a sending message it is the time the send method returned For a received message it is the time the onMessage method returned The host name on which the message is dequeued to a process For a sending message it is the host on which the driver ran For received message it is the host on which the driver ran The Wireless instance id on which the message is dequeued to process The time the dequeue method to be called The time the message is processed For sending message the message is sent For received message the message is processed by the listener The time the enqueue call started The time enqueue call returned The time the dequeue call started The time the dequeue call retu
125. Oracle Application Server Wireless Administrator s Guide 10g 9 0 4 Part No B10188 01 September 2003 ORACLE Oracle Application Server Wireless Administrator s Guide 10g 9 0 4 Part No B10188 01 Copyright 2003 Oracle Corporation All rights reserved The Programs which include both the software and documentation contain proprietary information of Oracle Corporation they are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are also protected by copyright patent and other intellectual and industrial property laws Reverse engineering disassembly or decompilation of the Programs except to the extent required to obtain interoperability with other independently created software or as specified by law is prohibited The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice If you find any problems in the documentation please report them to us in writing Oracle Corporation does not warrant that this document is error free Except as may be expressly permitted in your license agreement for these Programs no part of these Programs may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of Oracle Corporation If the Programs are delivered to the U S Government or anyone licensing or using the programs on behalf of the U S Government the following notice is applicable Restricted Rig
126. RNE 15 2 15 2 2 Before EO Sin cet tececscsecviiied eaae ee e Moti e a a a e 15 2 15 2 3 Setting the Locale for a User Profile sssssssssssessesssestsstesesssesiesresensresinsiesensresnesneene 15 3 15 2 4 Setting the Site Locale i i seseris p area dared as A E EEEE EE aE 15 3 15 3 Determining the Encoding of a Device ss sssssssssestsstissessestetisressesssnsesnesnesntnniesieseenenss 15 4 15 3 1 HttpAdapter Based Service n icsiescsieecastbssseetetcaasedecesstchacuses esaa E aa EK ATEEK 15 5 15 4 Languages Available for On Line Help ss sesssssssssrsssissessestetisressesnensessesnesnenrennesnesnenne 15 6 15 5 Driver Encodings are scics s2de theses csssscesehtetessnaeiases siesta Sei ea A Eaa a eE ASE SAE ae 15 6 Integrating Wireless with Other Components 16 1 DA SA ANAA A E AE ERIE A EEE E AE 16 1 16 1 1 Repository Synchronization after User Authentication ss sssssssssessesssrsissessesseess 16 2 16 1 2 PL SQL Based Asynchronous Synchronization ss ss ssssssessssseesiesississsesieseeseeseess 16 4 16 1 3 Oracle Application Server Wireless Programmatic Model API Interface 16 5 16 1 4 Wireless User Management Integrated With DAS 0 cceccsesesesessnsseseseseeeeeeees 16 5 16 2 Integrating Wireless with WebCache ceescccsssessesesesesssssesesesessesesesssesesescscseseseeesees 16 5 16 2 1 Configuring Caching for Wireless 0 cccccc cece cece ceeeeeeecesenseeeenesesesseeseeneeeseess 16 8 16
127. Response Time seconds The average time a message stayed on the server Average Message Queue Size The average size of the message queue on an hourly basis for today Service Access Count The number of times that each application was accessed today 13 6 Administrator s Guide Optimizing the Async Listener Performance User Access Count The number of messages issued by each user device Number of Errors The number of errors on an hourly basis 13 3 1 Tuning the Performance of the Async Listener The following knobs are available in Wireless to tune Sync Server Performance Topics include a Section 13 3 1 1 Tuning the Working Threads for the Async Listener a Section 13 3 1 2 Adjusting thitherto Pool Size of Messaging Server Client a Section 13 3 1 3 Adjusting the Sending and Receiving Threads 13 3 1 1 Tuning the Working Threads for the Async Listener You can change the number of worker threads for the Async Listener using the System Manager s Async Listener Configuration screen Figure 13 3 which you access from the Administration page By default the value for the Working Threads parameter is 10 You can increase this parameter to a higher value to accommodate a higher request rate Figure 13 3 Configuring the Async Worker Threads Wireless Server System gt Wireless Server Administration gt Asyne Listener Configuration Async Listener Configuration Working Threads fio Filtered Subject Line Prefix fr
128. SO Otherwise it proceeds to step b below a SSO performs the sign on process using the Wireless Web Server process After the sign on succeeds the original request resumes b The Wireless Web Server dispatches the original request to the mobile application provider to request the mobile content in mobile XML 3 The Async Listener adapts the received response into the native format of the requesting device and sends the adapted response to the Messaging Server 4 The Messaging Server dispatches the response to the requesting device Handling a Messaging Request The Wireless platform can also push any message to any device using different protocols Out of the box any message can be pushed out as an SMS message an email a voice mail a fax or it can be pushed to the Oracle Mobile Message Gateway The request is handled as follows 1 Messaging applications including the XMS Server Notification Engine or external applications compose a message and send it by calling push APIs 2 The Messaging Server asynchronously delivers the received message to the delivery provider through the specified protocol 3 The Messaging Server also asynchronously queries the delivery status if supported by the provider 4 The messaging applications can either pull the delivery status or be notified 1 2 Using the Wireless Tools Wireless provides a complete set of Web based tools which provide functions for developing and publishing mo
129. Shop Transaction the particular transaction Example DESCR Mobile If the transaction receives Transaction the default no information then the message Payment Application generates a default description CURRENCY No The currency for this The three letter string TRXID transaction The default currency codes per ISO currency is defined as a 4217 1995 For example application input USD EUR BRL parameter Default Currency and this value is used as default If the merchant wants to use a different currency then provide it in this request parameter APPLICATION No Name of the application Any string with the TRXID calling the Payment application name For Application This name is example stored in the user s transaction history If this is not present then the Payment Application stores the default value as 3rd Party App APPLICATION Book Shop Application or APPLICATION Mobile Transaction This is the default message 8 5 2 4 Output Parameters The Payment application s output parameters include the following TRXID This group includes the following parameters which return the values for the Payment application Table 8 45 describes the parameters of TRXID 8 88 Administrator s Guide m Commerce Applications Table 8 45 Parameters of TRXID Parameter Mandatory Description Valid Values TRXID Yes The transaction ID for a successful An integer representing the transaction If the transact
130. Site Administration Table 3 18 XMS Runtime Parameters Parameter Value Failover Processing Interval minutes How often the background failover processing thread is invoked to process address failover default is 10 Interval to Cleanup Processed How often the database purges processed failover data The default Records hours value is 48 hours Maximum Days to Keep Request in The maximum lifetime for a failover record in the database All Failover Table failover records whether they have been processed or are still pending are deleted after this period The default value is 30 days Maximum Levels of Failover The maximum number of failover address delivery types Supported combinations allowed per recipient The portion which exceeds the limit will be truncated and lost The default value is 5 XMS Center The XMS Message Center XMSC supports MMS Center functionality out of the box so that a device with MMS browser can receive notification messages and retrieve messages stored on the Wireless server through HTTP It also supports MO mobile originated messages to another phone and message storage and notifications for other delivery channels besides MMS To configure the XMSC you define the following two parameters a Enable XMSC Selecting this option enables the XMSC By default XMSC is enabled set to true Message Life Time The maximum amount of time that a message can be stored
131. TTP protocol 17 3 Configuring the Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server This section details the configuration tasks described in the Overview This section includes the following Section 17 3 1 Configuration Overview Section 17 3 1 1 Requirements Section 17 3 1 2 Creating A System User for Registering COM Objects Section 17 3 1 3 Registering Event Sink and Registration COM Objects Section 17 3 1 4 Creating Out of Process COM Components 17 3 1 Configuration Overview To enable the wireless notification for Microsoft Exchange Email you must perform the following configuration tasks on the machine that runs Microsoft Exchange Server 1 Create A System User for Registering COM Objects For the event sink and event registration to work the corresponding COM objects must have access to all of the users inbox folders Therefore you must create an Exchange system user in the Exchange server domain who is given full access to the entire Microsoft Exchange Store Register the Event Sink and Registration COM Objects Create two COM applications using the provided dll files NotificationSink dll and RegCom dll a One COM application is activated by notification setting ASP file to create notification event registration The COM application is activated by the Exchange Server when new emails arrive in the folders b Create the Exchange Notification Account A special email account needs to be created to receive notific
132. TTPS Configuration JDBC Connection Pool System Logging User Provisioning Site Locale WAP Provisioning Mobile Studio From the System Logging page Figure 3 10 you specify the log file size in bytes and the log levels Error Warning and Notify By default error and warning messages will be logged in the system log file Figure 3 10 The System Logging Page Wireless Server System gt Wireless Server Administration gt System Logging System Logging Maximum Log File Size bytes 2147483647 Log Level M Warning M Error I Notify 3 3 3 Configuring the URLs of the Current Wireless Instance From the Instance URLs page depicted in Figure 3 11 you to specify the URLs used by a Wireless middle tier server as entry points to the Wireless services This page enables you to define the instance URLs that is the local URLs for a middle tier server or direct a middle tier server to use the URLs defined for the entire Wireless site Managing the Wireless Server 3 11 The Home Page Figure 3 11 Configuring the Instance URLs for a Wireless Server System gt Wireless Serer gt Instance URLs Instance URLs Use the Wireless Site URLs Click here to configure the Wireless Site URLs Use the Wireless Instance URLs Multi Channel Server HTTP URL http xlu pc us oralce com 7777 mcsiremote Multi Channel Server HTTPS URL https xlu pe us oralce com 4443 mces remote Wireless and Voice Portal HTTP URL
133. Tasks application a Valid Values The OMP URL of the Tasks application a Default Value omp oracle services pim tasks a Translator OMP URL Defines the OMP URL of the Translator application a Valid Values The OMP URL of the Translator application a Default Value omp oracle services commerce translator a Viewer OMP URL Defines the OMP URL of the Viewer application a Valid Values The OMP URL of the viewer application a Default Value omp oracle services pim viewer a Voice Mail OMP URL Defines the OMP URL of the Voice Mail application a Valid Values The OMP URL of the voice mail application a Default Value omp oracle services voice mail 8 6 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail a Wallet OMP URL Defines the wallet OMP URL a Valid Values The OMP URL of the wallet application a Default Value omp oracle services commerce wallet 8 3 PIM and Mail Oracle Application Server Personal Information Management PIM Service enables customers to integrate corporate email directory address book calendaring and instant messaging applications into their mobile enterprise portals Each of these applications is built as a module that can be called either directly by mobile users from their devices or by other applications These mobile PIM and email applications are fully integrated within one another enabling a user to access such features as an address book based recipient selection or a directory when composing email m
134. The major configuration file for OPMN is opmn xml located in ORACLE_ HOME opmn conf directory 14 2 Administrator s Guide Clustering Configuration The oc4J oc4jInstancelD in opmn xml should be the exactly same as it appears in the mounting specification of the mod_oc4j conf The number of islands the number of processes and the other configuration parameters are also defined within opmn xml A sample configuration is as follows lt oc4j oc4jInstanceID OC4J_Wireless gid OC4J_Wireless gt lt config file path ORACLE_ HOME j2ee OC4J_Wireless config server xml gt lt base port ajp 0 jms 2402 rmi 2502 gt lt island id OC4J_WirelessIslandA numProcs 2 gt lt island id OC4J_WirelessIslandB numProcs 3 gt lt oc4j gt For this OC4J_Wireless cluster two islands O0C4J_WirelessIslandA and OC4J_ WirelessIslandB share the request workload OC4J_WirelessIslandA is comprised of two wireless server processes while OC4J_WirelessIslanaB is comprised of three Wireless server processes Altogether five ports are needed for each type of protocol The port number range is from the base port number to the base port number plus five The base port numbers are dynamically allocated during the installation time By default the Wireless server lt oc4 j gt element should be populated within opmn xml However the populated entry only supports single Wireless server pro
135. The mapping s form label variable name Varname and matching wallet parameters appear in the right frame You can then modify the mapping by using the drop down lists to select different matching 8 78 Administrator s Guide m Commerce Applications wallet parameters Click Done after you have completed your changes Clicking Delete removes the mapping Figure 8 4 The Existing Mappings Tab of the Form Filler Administration Stored Maps Map number 1 1 for URL http www formfillerdem Search here for existing maps E i Search by URL Get All http www formfillerdemo com Modify Approve or Remove submitted mappings here Email EMAIL eoem O FILE EMAIL Address Address SHIP ADDRESS_LINE1 The Pending Mappings tab Figure 8 5 enables you to search for edit delete and approve any pending unapproved mappings You can retrieve a pending mapping either by searching by URL or by user To retrieve all the pending mappings select Get All The mappings appear in the pane in the Stored Maps section of the screen To select a mapping click on the mapping The mapping s form label variable name Varname and matching wallet parameters appear in the right frame You can then approve the mapping or delete it Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 79 m Commerce Applications Figure 8 5 The Pending Mappings Tab of the Form Filler Administration ORACLE Wt Form Filler Adminis
136. The port is where the DIOP and HTTP services are running on the Domino server Default Value localhost 5730 Examples PIM and Mail cal server com 5730 00_ calsched cal myhost mycompany com 1521 mySIDexchg mycomp com domino abc com Account Name If this application shares login authentication information with the Address Book or Tasks applications then you must specify the same string value as that used for the Account Name parameter of the Address Book or Tasks applications a Valid Values Any string value a Default Value OraAddressBookCalDomain a Examples mydomain sharedAccount Exchange Data URL This should point to Calendar asp the ASP page that gets the data from the Exchange Server This is required for MS Exchange configuration a Valid Values A URL pointing to Calendar asp on the MS IIS server a Default Value http localhost oracle Calendar asp a Examples http mycomp com oracle Calendar asp http www abc com oracle Calendar asp Application Setup OMP URL The OMP URL of the Application Setup modulable application a Valid Values the OMP URL to the Application Setup a Default Value omp oracle applications appsetup a Examples omp oracle applications appsetup omp oracle applications otherappsetup 8 3 2 1 Linking to the Calendar Application You can link to the calendar application using the following virtual URL omp oracle services pim calendar Configuring the Out of the Box
137. Users assigned the Foundation Developer role perform Foundation Manager Developer the following functions Content Manager a Create modify and delete devices Create modify and delete transformers a Create modify and delete regions a Create modify and delete digital rights policies Create modify and delete API scan policies Users assigned the Content Manager role perform the Content Manager following functions Manage application folders and bookmarks a Create application links based on Application Developer created applications a Create notifications based on alerts deprecated in this release Create application categories and associate access points with them Create a user home folder rendering scheme such as setting the sorting order for applications Wireless Security 10 7 Resources Protected by Oracle Application Server Wireless Table 10 1 Wireless User Roles User Role Description Available Tools System Users assigned the System role manage the system using Wireless system management Administrator the System Management Tool functions through the Oracle Enterprise Manager Application Server Control User Manager Users assigned the User Manager role perform the User Manager following functions Manage users by providing such Help Desk functions as editing a user profile resetting passwords and PINs and creating or deleting users Manage user access privi
138. WAP devices use the WAP protocol for communication Because the Wireless server does not support the WAP protocol directly you need a WAP gateway to convert the WAP protocol to HTTP S If you connect to the Internet through your Wireless service provider then the carrier must have already configured a WAP gateway for you However if you connect to the Internet or Intranet through a dial up PPP connection then you must install and configure a WAP gateway 9 1 3 1 Installing and Configuring a WAP Gateway Ensure that the WAP gateway you plan to install is a certified WAP gateway The certified WAP gateways are listed at 9 4 Administrator s Guide Configuring Wireless for Browser Based Applications http mobile us oracle com ompm site product devices certified certified_ gateways_wap jsp Follow the installation instructions provided by your WAP gateway vendor Some gateways WAPLite for example have a configuration parameter for the Default WML Home Page Set this parameter to the Wireless server main page to save users from entering this parameter repeatedly 9 1 3 2 Configuring a WAP Phone The WAP phone configuration is specific to the phone model and to the wireless service provider In general the phone must be configured for a dial up network connection this is not applicable to GPRS phones the WAP gateway and the home URL for your WAP browser Generally your phone is reconfigured by your wireless service provide
139. Whether the Web services feature of Mobile Studio should be enabled By default Supported this option is not selected the flag is set to false By selecting this option Mobile Studio s interface displays an additional tab that includes functions that enable developers to register Web services which can be accessed from J2ME MIDlets 3 6 2 Component Configuration The component configuration section Figure 3 16 contains the configurations specific to different Wireless subcomponents which are represented as links To access these links you expand the Component Configuration section by clicking the plus sign Figure 3 16 The Component Configuration Section of the Administration Screen Component Configuration Multi Channel Server Async Listener Messaging Runtime Access Paint Drivers Device Async Listener Messaging Server Configuration Folder Messaging Server Client XMS Configuration Event and Listener Location Related Notification Event Collector Multimedia Adaptation Service Location Management Microsoft Exchange Notification Event Settings Location Services Di Notification Engine Location Event Serer Provisioning Server Notification System Location Mark Address Format Provisioning Server Messaging Server Client 3 6 2 1 Multi Channel Server The Multi Channel Server component includes the following configurations Managing the Wireless Server 3 37 Site Administration Runtime The Runt
140. Wireless 13 5 Optimizing the Async Listener Performance 13 2 1 2 AQ Tuning AQ Advanced Queuing operations result in high number of insertions and deletions from the database Hence I O values on the database will be high and will need careful tuning Based on the volume of operations you should consider increasing the number of I O controllers on the machine In the test environment the following observations have been verified a With the 3 I O controller a throughput of 40 messages second with 7 sending threads was achieved a With the 12 I O controller a throughput of 100 messages second with 9 sending threads was achieved 13 2 1 3 Moving Transport Operations to Database Machine Running the transport process on a machine that runs the Database and running PTG ona separate machine enables improved performance 13 3 Optimizing the Async Listener Performance The System Manager displays the performance related data for an Async Listener process The performance logging framework at the Web Server level collects this data To view this data you first drill down from the Async Listener process located in the Web Based Processes section of the System Manager s Home page to the detail page Clicking the Performance tab invokes the Performance page for the process The page includes the following performance metrics Number of Messages Received The number of messages received grouped by process ID Average Message
141. Wireless server provides pre configured voice portal which contains the following mobile applications L Email a Address Book with Voice Dialing a Calendar 9 6 Administrator s Guide Configuring Wireless for Voice Applications a Corporate Directory a Files These user friendly applications have an enhanced voice user interface The voice portal is comprised of the Main Menu master application Table 9 1 describes the input parameters of the Main Menu master application Table 9 1 Input Parameters of the Main Menu Master Application Parameter Default Value ORACLE _SERVICES_PIM_MESSAGE_INPUT_ ENCODING ORACLE _SERVICES_PIM_MAIL_ PROTOCOL ORACLE _SERVICES_PIM_MAIL_ SERVER_NAME ORACLE _SERVICES_PIM_MAIL_ SERVER_PORT ORACLE_SERVICES_PIM_MAIL_SMTP_SERVER_NAME ORACLE _SERVICES_PIM_MAIL_AUTODOMAIN ORACLE _SERVICES_PIM_MAIL_FOLDER_INBOX ORACLE _SERVICES_PIM_MAIL_FOLDER_SENT ORACLE _SERVICES_PIM_MAIL_DEFAULT_ EMAILDOMAIN ORACLE _SERVICES_PIM_MAIL_MSGFETCH_SETSIZE ORACLE _SERVICES_PIM_MAIL_SERVER_CONNECT_ TIMEOUT ORACLE_SERVICES_PIM_MAIL_AUDIO_TMP_DIR ORACLE _SERVICES_PIM_MAIL_ AUDIO_TMP_URL ORACLE _SERVICES_PIM_MAIL_ MAIL _CONFIG_ CLASS ORACLE _SERVICES_PIM_CALENDAR_SERVER_NAME UTF 8 IMAP The name of your email server localhost The email server port For IMAP the value is 143 for POP the value is 110 The name of the SMTP server The domain of your o
142. a Prolog to be appended at the beginning of the device result Login Page lt xslistylesheet version 1 0 xmmins xsE http Avww w3 org 1999 XSUTransform gt lt xsl output encoding UTF 8 gt lt xsl template match gt lt wml gt card id Main gt lt p gt lt input type text name name title Username gt lt input type password name password f Login page for overwriting the default device login page lt xslistylesheet version 1 0 xmins xsE http Avww w3 org 1999 XSL Transform gt lt xsl output encoding UTF 8 gt lt xsl template match gt lt wml gt card id error gt lt p gt lt xsl for each select PanamaError gt lt xsl apply templates gt lt xsl for each gt x Error page for overwriting the default device error page Error Page CAEAD 7 3 2 1 Editing a Device The Edit button in the device browsing screen enables you to edit all of the information of a device To edit a device first select the device and then click the Edit button The editing screen appears and defaults to the parameters defined for the basic information of the device Figure 7 7 You can select other device properties by selecting the appropriate links in the menu on the left side of the editing screen Click Apply to save any changes that you make to the parameters Clicking Cancel returns you to the device browsing page Refer to the steps described in Section 7 3 2 for descr
143. ackward compatibility only a Jabber Directory Service This parameter is now obsolete and is included for backward compatibility only a Jabber Conference Service This parameter is now obsolete and is included for backward compatibility only 8 3 6 2 Linking to the Instant Messaging Application You can link to the Instant Messaging application using the following virtual URL omp oracle services pim instantmessaging Input Call Parameters of the Instant Messaging Application The input call parameters of the Instant Messaging application includes the IMMessage parameter which is described in Table 8 25 Table 8 25 The IMMessage Parameter Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value IMMessage No The text of a message A string For example that is sent through the IMMESSAGE How are you doing today service a IMMESSAGE I am sending you this message through IM Output Parameters An example of the IMMessage output parameter is calling the module to send a simple message For example 8 46 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail 8 3 7 Mail Input Parameter IMMessage Do you want to go see a movie The Mail application enables users to access their email messages from any mobile device The Mail application integrates with any IMAP or POP3 server including Microsoft Exchange and Lotus Domino servers 8 3 7 1 Configuration Parameters The Mail application includes the following parameters Inc
144. acle Notification Unified Messaging Collector Notification Event Formatter Microsoft Exchange 1 Oracle Workflow Adapter 2 Oracle Unified Messaging Adapter 3 Microsoft Exchange Alert Adapter Applications outside of Wireless can use two different mechanisms to interface with the Notification Engine the push interface and the pull interface Using the push interface applications send notification events over HTTP to the Notification Event Collector Service which is based on a servlet The Notification Event Collector Service then passes the notification event data to the Notification Event Feeder which is a customized data feeder to the Notification Engine The pull interface enables the notification event collector process to connect to the application and retrieve the notification events The notification event data is then passed onto the Notification Event Feeder The notification event collector process consists of a number of different adapters each adapter is specific for a particular application You can enable and disable adapters by configuring the notification collector process Using the System Manager you can start or stop a notification event collector process The notification event handler is a customized system level notification application that reads data from the notification event feeder The data indicates the target user for this notification as well as the type of notification and o
145. age For more information see Section 3 3 3 If you use site URLs then you configure the Tools URL from the HTTP HTTPS Configuration page accessed from the Site Administration subtab For more information see Section 3 6 1 1 a The Wireless Tools must be running because the actual functions are hosted there 3 6 3 1 Repository Objects Download The Repository Objects Download page Figure 3 17 invoked by selecting the Repository Objects Download hyperlink in the Utilities section of the Administration page enables you to download repository objects You can specify the types of repository objects to download For example you can download only adapters In addition you can download by OID and you can download applications by folder or by user You can also download all objects by user You can only download repository objects to a local file To download repository objects 1 Enter the location for the log files If you use the System Manager in standalone mode then enter the password This required field only appears when you use the System Manager in the standalone mode 2 Enter the location of the logging activity This is a server side generated log file For example enter temp activity log 3 Enter the location for logging errors This is a server side generated log file For example enter temp error log 4 Specifying the Objects for Download by entering the filter expression for the name of the objects
146. al setup for the E420 Solaris box with four 450Mhz processors and four GB RAM to support 2000 concurrent users Table 13 1 Typical Setup for the E420 Solaris Box Attribute Recommended Value Xms 256m Xmx 1024m XX NewSize 64m XX MaxNewSize 128m XX SoftRefLRUPolicyMSPerMB 10000 Xss 512K XX UseLWPSynchronization This thread model should be used 13 10 Tuning Operating System Performance This section describes tuning methods for the operating system s performance of Oracle Application Server Wireless 13 10 0 1 TCP IP Tuning Correctly tuned TCP IP settings improve performance The indicators for changing default parameters are primarily TCP connection drops while making the three way handshake and the system refusing connections at a certain load Using the following UNIX command to check for TCP connection drops netstat s grep Drop Note the following value tcpListenDrop tcpListenDropgQo tcpHalfOpenDrop Optimizing Oracle Application Server Wireless 13 13 Tuning Operating System Performance Any value other than zero suggests the need for changing the tcp connection queue size While any value for tcpListernDrop suggests a bottleneck in executing the accept call and value for tcpListenDropQoO It is an indication of SYN flood or denial of services attack Use the following UNIX command to check if connections should be replenished more quickly netstat grep TIME_WAIT we 1
147. ales which enable the translation of end user messages into 29 languages The administrator can add new locale or delete a locale using this page For more information see Section 15 2 4 in Chapter 15 Globalization 3 6 1 5 WebCache WebCache is an component used by Wireless to accelerate site performance by caching the content transformation Wireless performs transformations at two levels At the first level of transformation Wireless converts the adapter result which is obtained as a result of the adapter pulling content from an external data source The runtime adapters convert this into SimpleResult XML Wireless performs a second transformation that is content transformation when converting the SimpleResult XML into a device specific markup language The WebCache configuration page enables you to set the cache policy Table 3 4 lists these parameters Managing the Wireless Server 3 31 Site Administration Table 3 4 Parameters of the WebCache Configuration Screen Parameter Value Enable WebCache Selecting this check box enables caching WebCache Server URL The URL of the WebCache server WebCache Invalidation Port The port in the WebCache machine to which the invalidation messages are sent WebCache Invalidation Password The invalidation password for WebCache WebCache Timeout second The interval in seconds after which the WebCache times out For more information on WebCache see Section 16 2 1 i
148. aminna hnet Incoming mail falaa Performance Monitor You can configure the number of working threads Location Event Server To configure a location event server process you enter the number of positioning schedulers Each location event server can have one or more positioning schedulers that process the location based conditions This setting specifies the number of positioning schedulers for each location event server You base this setting on the system workload If many location based conditions are created and processed then you should enter a number greater than 1 such as 5 or 10 However if few location based conditions are created and processed one positioning scheduler will suffice You can adjust this value according to the performance of the location event server 3 4 Wireless Server Performance The Response and Load section displays the following Wireless statistics which are an overview of the process performance metrics based on the last 10 minutes for the local mid tier a Number of Active Sessions The number of sessions which invoked applications in the last 10 minutes 3 20 Administrator s Guide Site Performance Average Response Time second The average response time for applications invoked in the last 10 minutes Average Session Duration second The average session duration for sessions invoked applications in the last 10 minutes Number of Applications Invoked The total number of applications i
149. an Multi Channel application based on the HTTP Adapter the Caching Information Integrating Wireless with Other Components 16 9 Integrating Wireless with WebC ache page appears as Step 6 in the wizard for an application that is based on another adapter a non HTTP Mulitchannel Application the Caching Information page appears as Step 2 Figure 16 6 For more information on creating applications see the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide To cache enable an application check the Cacheable checkbox In the Invalidation Frequency section specify the frequency at which pages corresponding to the application must be removed from the cache When the Content Manager publishes a cacheable master application the resulting application link is automatically cacheable For more information on creating application links with the Content Manager see Section 5 3 4 Figure 16 6 The Caching Information Page of the Application Creation Wizard Applications bd amp O You are logged in as orcladmin Previous Builtin Parameters Caching Additional Info Create Application Caching Information Back Step 6 of7 Next Cacheable M Invalidation Frequency _ Define your caching invalidation frequency For example if you want to invalidate the cache every 3 months on the 2nd day of the month at 9 30 am You should specify the parameters as follows Cardinal 3 Unit Month Day 2nd Time 09 30 00 Cardinal 5 Unit
150. an control how the given application style is rendered on the device to which the style set is bound across the whole system For example if a PDA 7 22 Administrator s Guide Managing Adapters device is bound to the StyleSet Default then changing the prompt style in the default StyleSet to bold from plain results in all prompts appearing in bold rather than in plain when rendered on client devices in the PDA device grouping Defining a ColorSet The lt ColorSet gt element helps the renderers for a device render application colors into markup language For a given device this application color is mapped to a color code which can be modified by the system administrator to produce the optimal rendering For example if a PDA device is bound to the ColorSet Default then changing the background color in the default ColorSet to grey from white results in the background color for all applications on client devices in the PDA device grouping to be grey rather than white A lt ColorSet gt element consists of multiple lt Color gt elements The following table describes the propertis common to each lt ColorSet gt Table 7 11 ColorSet Elements Properties Property Name Required Multiple Description Name Inherits Color Device Yes No The name of the ColorSet Yes No The parent ColorSet from which color traits are inherited Often an administrator wants only to change a single application color between two device
151. an explicitly purge the pages of a specific device from the WebCache To purge and refresh the pages of a selected logical device just select the device and click the Refresh Content button See Section 16 2 1 in Chapter 16 Integrating Wireless with Other Components for more information on WebCache Managing the Wireless Server 3 59 Site Administration 3 60 Administrator s Guide 4 Managing Users This chapter includes the following sections a Section 4 1 Overview a Section 4 2 Logging into the User Manager a Section 4 3 Using the User Manager a Section 4 4 Searching for Users a Section 4 5 Creating Users a Section 4 6 Viewing Application Links a Section 4 7 Viewing Devices a Section 4 8 Viewing Logs 4 1 Overview The User Manager is a Web based tool used to perform such user support tasks as creating a new user resetting the PIN and password for a user assigning a special role to a user or investigating any problems that a user may encounter when using the mobile applications In the latter case the User Manager enables you to view a user log view and test user applications and user devices The User Manager provides help desk functions for both developers and end users Wireless customers In addition the User Manager supports third party content developers using Mobile Studio Managing Users 4 1 Overview Note Users granted the Super User or User Manager r
152. an external content source that can be invoked from an HTTP adapter Although this example creates a cacheable application that is based on the HTTP Adapater a cacheable application does not need to be HTTP adapter based any adapter will suffice Designate the content source as a simple JSP page which displays the current time in Mobile XML For example 16 12 Administrator s Guide Integrating Wireless with WebCache lt page language java gt lt page import java text SimpleDateFormat gt lt 3 page import java util Date gt lt page session false gt lt s page contentType text html charset iso 8859 1 gt lt SimpleResult gt lt SimpleContainer gt lt SimpleText gt lt SimpleTextItem gt lt Date date new Date SimpleDateFormat formatter new SimpleDateFormat yyyy MM dd G at hh mm ss a zzz gt lt formatter format date gt lt SimpleText Item gt lt SimpleText gt lt SimpleContainer gt lt SimpleResult gt 2 Create a master application this jsp as the content source From the Service Manager click the Applications tab In the browsing screen click Create Application In the application type screen select either Multi Channel Application the default and then click Create The Basic Info page appears Complete the mandatory fields marked by an asterisk in the Basic Info screen by entering the value Date Serv for the Name of applicatio
153. ance pages displays the current time because the data is retrieved in real time the timestamp on the Site Administration page however displays the last time that the configuration data was loaded from the database To refresh the page you must either click the Refresh icon or update some configuration data Figure 3 2 The Refresh Icon on the Home Page Wireless Server g Server System Wireless Server You are logged in as orcladmin Wireless Server Page Refreshed Aug 25 2003 5 00 30 PME Home Site Performance Site Administration 3 2 Logging Into the System Manager You can log into the System Manager through the standalone mode or through the Oracle Enterprise Manager Application Server Control 3 2 1 Accessing the System Manager in Standalone Mode To access the login page for the System Manager in standalone mode enter the following URL into a browser http 91ASWEServer domain port webtool login uix For example enter http 91ASWEServer domain 7777 webtool login uix After you enter your user name and password the System Manager appears defaulting to the Home subtab Note You must have the System or Administrator role to access the System Manager Managing the Wireless Server 3 3 Logging Into the System Manager 3 2 2 Accessing the System Manager through OEM To access the System Manager from the standalone version of the Oracle Enterprise Manager Application Server Control you must
154. and receiving threads for a driver instance are set at the Site level through the Messaging Server Configuration screen accessed from the Site Administration page of the System Manager For more information on setting the site wide values for a driver instance see Messaging Server Configuration in Section 3 6 2 5 From this screen you can change the increase the number of threads set in the Sending Threads field Figure 13 2 The Driver Instance Properties Screen Wireless Server System gt Wireless Serwer gt messagingserverl gt XmsDriver Instance XmsDriver Instance Properties Driver Instance Name kmsDriver Instance Driver Name ISS Delivery Categories SMS EMS Sending Threads p Receiving Threads M Enabled M Site Driver Enabled For a driver instance to run both the site driver and the driver instance have to be enabled Driver Specific Parameters A the account id or short fare number to the SMSC the password for this false account to the SMSC sms account password 13 2 1 1 2 Increasing the Number of Receiving Threads for a Driver To increase the rate of enqueuing you can increase the number of receiving threads You can adjust the number of receiving threads using the method described in Section 13 2 1 1 1 For more information about driver instances see Process Level and Site Level configuration for the Messaging Server in Section 3 3 4 2 Optimizing Oracle Application Server
155. and then send an email to a particular contact or to compose a recipient list from the directory 8 3 3 1 Configuring the Directory Wireless includes all of the required JAR files This application requires no scripts The Mobile directory application includes the following configuration parameters 8 3 3 2 Configuration Parameters LDAP Server Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 25 PIM and Mail The name of the installed LDAP server such as Idap mydomain com a Valid Values Any LDAP server a Default Value localhost a Examples dap netscape com ldap mydomain com a LDAP Server Port Enter the port number for the LDAP server For example enter 389 a Valid Values Any valid port a Default Value 389 a Examples 389 4130 a Administrator Login Access to LDAP Server If set to false then the LDAP server is accessed using a guest account If set to true then both the Internet Directory Administrator username and password must be specified a Valid Values A boolean value true false Default Value false LDAP Server Administrator Username The user name for the Administrator account in the Internet directory server such as orcladmin a Valid Values Any username with administrator privileges a Default Value a Examples administrator orcladmin a LDAP Server Administrator Password The password for the LDAP server administrator user such as welcome1 a Valid Values Any valid password for the LDAP se
156. ansformer types include a Result transformers which convert Adapter Result content into SimpleResult content a Device transformers which convert SimpleResult content into the final target format A device transformer can be either the default transformer for a virtual device or a custom transformer which is used to render a specific application for a specific physical device Adapter objects represent the Wireless interface to content sources Adapter objects have an attribute called classes which identify the archive file that contains the actual Java implementation of the adapter Wireless uses regions to enable developers to assign a location to an application making the application location based unique to a specified area A digital rights policy specifies the execution or usage policy of J2ME applications MIDlets after users download them For example if a downloaded MIDlet can be executed only twice then you package that application with a digital rights policy to assure that it is executed only twice Other digital rights policies can be time based limiting the execution of MIDlets to prescribed time periods and be of varying complexity An API scan policy specifies invalid API calls within J2ME application to the API scan process which certifies J2ME applications MIDlets The invalid APIs are defined with package names class names and method names in the API scan policy object The Foundation Manager prov
157. application should provide this value This URL must be accessible from Mobile Studio Service URL The service used by the Wireless server at runtime for the application This URL points to the hosting location of the sample service This URL must be accessible from Mobile Studio Visible The sample service can be hidden from users by setting the Visible to No users can view and use the service if you set the Visibile flag to Yes Figure 6 5 The Edit Sample Services Screen Partial View Oracle Application Server Wireless E Edit Sample Service Name caltrain The name of Application that would appear on User s mobile device Description This sample shows how to use location ba The Description for the Application Sample Source URL studio samples caltrainNew html The URL ofthe HTML Source Code of the Sampie Application Service URL studio samples caltrainNew jsp The Application URL Visible Yes No Click Save to commit your entries and add the service Administering Mobile Studio 6 9 Managing Sample Services 6 5 2 Editing a Sample Service You use the Edit button to change the values for a selected service Clicking the Edit button invokes the Edit Sample Service page where you can change the values for the Name Description Sample Source URL name the Service URL and the visibility status of the sample service Click the Save button to store your changes 6 5 3 Deleting a Sample Service
158. arameter then click Finish Using a text editor open an existing XSL style sheet copy and paste the lines that you want to use and then click Finish a Click the Import button to import an existing XSL style sheet XSL Stylesheet The actual XSLT style sheet that implements the transformer You can cut and paste a transformer from another editing environment into this field ava Transformer ecifies a Java class transformer implementation T f Specifi lass t f impl tati ava Class e name of the class that implements the transformer Cl Th f the class that impl ts the t f Figure 7 9 The Create Transformer Screen Create Transformer Please specify the attributes of the new transformer and then click on Done Name WIG_WML11 MIME Type text Simple Result DTD Version 1 0 0 Transformer Type XSL Transformer XSL Style Sheet fexclude result prefixes p2g lt xsloutput encoding UTF 8 gt lt xsl template name halign gt lt xsl choose gt lt xsl when test boolean halign gt lt xsl attribute name align gt 4 Import lt xsl value of select halign gt lt xslattribute gt lt xslwhen gt lt xskwhen test boolean A halign gt z Java Transformer Java Class 7 4 2 Editing a Transformer To edit a transformer select a transformer from the browsing screen and then click Edit The editing screen appears with its fields populated with the values defined for the selected transformer Clicking
159. arameters of the Mail application a The parameter ORACLE _SERVICES_PIM_MAIL_AUDIO_TMP_DIR must have read and write permissions for user groups a The URL value entered for the parameter ORACLE_SERVICES_PIM_MAIL_ AUDIO_TMP_URL must point to the value entered for ORACLE_SERVICES_PIM_MAIL_ AUDIO_MAIL_AUDIO_TMP_URL Click Apply to save your changes 9 2 3 2 5 Configuring the Voice Main Menu to Prefetch the Mail Application You can configure the Voice Main Menu application so that it can prefetch the mail application enabling it to load more quickly and thus improve the user experience To configure the Voice Main Menu application to prefetch the mail application a The ORACLE SERVICES MAINMENU_PREFETCH input parameter is set to true Using the Content Manager you can only edit the input parameters of an application which have been designated as Modifiable by the Service Manager For more information refer to the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide for information on developing master applications a The parameter ORACLE SERVICES_PIM_MAIL_AUDIO_TMP_DIR must have read and write permissions for user groups a The URL value entered for the parameter ORACLE_SERVICES_PIM_MAIL_ AUDIO_TMP_URL must point to the value entered for ORACLE SERVICES PIM MAIL AUDIO MAIL AUDIO_TMP_URL Click Apply to save your changes The mail application now loads faster See Chapter 5 Managing Content for more information on editing a
160. ars 6 4 2 Adding a Locale To add a locale click the Add button Mobile Studio adds a new row to the list of locales with empty Name and Description fields To create this locale you must enter values into these fields For example enter ru in the Name field and Russian in the Description field Click Save to commit store the values 6 4 3 Editing a Locale You can edit a locale by modifying the name and description values After you have changed the appropriate value or values click Save to commit the changes Note You cannot edit the name of a default locale 6 4 4 Deleting a Locale To delete a locale select the locale and then click the Delete button To commit the deletion click the Save button To undo the deletion click the Undelete button The Undelete button appears if you have just deleted any configuration parameters but have not yet saved your changes Note You cannot delete a default locale Note Also The change and deletions are not committed until you click the Save button 6 4 5 Enabling the Default Locales Mobile Studio ships with default bundles for 28 different locales listed in table Table 6 2 Administering Mobile Studio 6 5 Managing Locales Table 6 2 The Default Locale Bundles for Mobile Studio Name Description Name Description ar Arabic ko Korean cs Czech nl Dutch da Danish no Norwegian de German pl Polish el Greek pt Portuguese es Spanish Pt_
161. art key comprised of a combination of the following a A system key specific to each deployment of the product a A user specific key uniquely identifying users within the system and retrieved when a function is applied to specific user information a The user s trading password Each portion of the three layer key can be changed independently but each one is required to decrypt information stored in the wallet This combination is never stored only an encrypted alias assigned to each entry during its creation or modification is sent over the wireless network Because security is central to the Wallet application you must configure HTTPs to access the Wireless server 8 5 3 2 Configuration Parameters The Wallet application includes the following configuration parameters Show Wallet Confirmation Page Whenever a third party application requests user information from the Wallet the user must agree to share this information This parameter is set regardless of whether this confirmation card is presented to user The valid values for this input parameter include a Yes Always show the confirmation card user The user cannot override this value Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 91 m Commerce Applications a No Never show the confirmation card to the user and automatically return the user information to the third party application a USER Unless otherwise specified by the user always show the confi
162. art of the notification picture is receiving notification events from Microsoft Exchange server formatting the notification content and delivering notification messages according to users preferences A notification event collector module in the architecture contains notification processing components to handle different event delivering method and event content from each supported notification application including Microsoft Exchange All the notification processing components use the same notification sender component which perform contact rule look up and the actual delivery of notification messages using the transport APIs in Wireless Wireless communicates with Microsoft Exchange Server using standard internet protocols The users notification settings are sent to the Microsoft Exchange Server host through the HTTP protocol Exchange notification events are delivered to a 17 18 Administrator s Guide Exchange Notification Administration in Oracle Application Server Wireless specific Exchange notification account in standard email form The exchange notification processing component in the notification event collector retrieves those event emails through standard IMAP or POP3 protocol 17 4 1 Site Level Configuration For Wireless to process notification messages from Microsoft Exchange Server you must configure the accessing details to the Exchange Server in the system The notification setting interface uses these configurati
163. arty software 8 32 sample cover page 8 33 folders assigning rendering options to 5 9 configuring sorting order and display 3 39 creating 5 7 creating with the Content Manager 5 6 editing 5 10 selecting sorting options 5 9 use with application links 5 2 Form Filler application configuring mappings 8 77 configuring the guessing heuristics 8 76 input call parameters 8 81 input parameters 8 80 linking to 8 81 overview 8 75 Foundation Manager accessing 7 3 cloning a device 7 11 creating a device 7 5 creating a digital rights DRM policy 7 26 creating adapters 7 14 creating API scan policies 7 30 searching for a device 7 5 H headings H2 Head2 13 2 Home page configuring the proxy server and entry points 3 7 process management 3 6 viewing log files 3 6 HTTP adapter in wireless single sign on 11 2 HTTP header names configuring 3 39 HTTP headers device mapping 7 4 HTTPS 10 14 security in LAN gateway 10 14 security in LAN gateways 10 14 Instant Messaging overview 8 44 Instant Messaging application configuration parameters 8 44 linking to 8 46 required third party software 8 44 Integrating 16 16 J J2ME applications assigning DRM policies to 5 11 JVM optimizing performance 13 11 L languages availablity 4 14 setting display 4 14 listeners configuring 3 40 locale detection Accept Language header 15 1 PAlocale 15 1 localization 4 14 Location Picker applica
164. as follows The application reads variables from the request to retrieve a value for an specific field from the wallet This variable name is defined in the attribute 0 CREDIT_CARD fieldl item0 lt request_variable_name i e CC_HOLDER_NAME gt The label that appears to the end user is defined in the attribute 1 It is a key to a value defined in portal properties for internationalization purposes CREDIT_CARD fieldl iteml lt key in portal properties i e modules commerce wallet creditcard holdername Each field can be either optional or mandatory depending on the compartment rules This is defined in attribute 2 CREDIT_CARD fieldl item2 lt MANDATORY OPTIONAL gt The format of this field for display on WML and HDML WAP devices is defined in attribute 3 and is a reference of a format previously defined in wallet properties Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 101 m Commerce Applications 8 5 4 Transcoder The CREDIT_CARD fieldl item3 lt format i e MIXED_FORMAT NUMBER_FORMAT DATE_FORMAT gt Ifthe field contains a list of possible values such as credit card types then they are listed in attribute 4 Use a comma to separate these values CREDIT_CARD fieldl item4 lt comma separated list of values i e Visa Master AmEx Discover Diners gt Attribute 5 is used if the current field stores an address by having a reference to a
165. ate check boxes If you do not select a check box then the option is disabled the default setting Table 3 11 describes the request session and response event options Table 3 11 The Request Session and Response Event Options Option Definition Request Event Enable before request Event Declares a request event to be just received Enable after request Event Declares a request event as request object has been released Enable transform begin Event Declares an request event to be before the transformation Enable request begin Event Declares a request event to begin being processed Enable service begin Event Declares a request event to be before the adapter is invoked Enable transform end Event Declares a request event to be transformation complete Enable request end Event Declares a request event to be request has been completely processed Enable service end Event Declares a request event to be adapter execution complete 3 40 Administrator s Guide Site Administration Table 3 11 The Request Session and Response Event Options Option Definition Enable request error Event Declares a request event to be error occurs during request processing Session Event Enable before session Event Declares a session event to be before session starts Enable session authentication Event Declares a session event to be session has
166. ately If the request is to access a privileged service then the Wireless Web Server redirects the request to SSO Single Sign On Otherwise it proceeds to step b below a SSO performs the sign on process using the Wireless Web Server process After the sign on succeeds the original request resumes b The Multi Channel Server dispatches the original request to the mobile application provider to request the mobile content in mobile XML The mobile application provider which are the external mobile applications processes the request and returns the mobile XML to the Wireless Web Server process Oracle Portal is another mobile application provider Multi Channel Server adapts the received content to the network and device and returns to the request device The mobile content is visible on the requesting mobile device in its native form Handing an Async Request The Wireless server can also process requests from non HTTP based devices such as SMS device Pager or Email The request is handled as follows 1 The Messaging Server receives an application invocation request message and dispatches it to the Async Listener which runs inside the Wireless Runtime Server process The Async Listener preprocesses the request The response is returned immediately If the request is to access a privileged application then the 1 2 Administrator s Guide Using the Wireless Tools Multi Channel Server will redirect the request to S
167. ation Services 7 29 Managing API Scan Policies 7 7 3 Deleting a Digital Rights Policy To delete a digital rights policy from the repository select a policy from the browsing screen and then click Delete 7 7 4 Enabling or Disabling a Digital Rights Policy To enable or disable a digital rights policy from the repository select a policy from the browsing screen and then click Enable Disable 7 8 Managing API Scan Policies An API scan policy defines the malicious APIs which can be invoked from a J2ME application that compromise a user s device The API scan policy definition includes the malicious API package as well as the class and method names During the certification process the Wireless server references the API scan policy objects when scanning a J2ME application for the APIs defined in the API scan policies For information on how to scan a J2ME application refer to Section 5 3 5 1 You use the API Scan Policy subtab to manage the API scan policies When you click the API Scan Policy subtab the API scan policy browsing page appears Figure 7 15 displaying a list of the API Scan Policies in the repository Figure 7 15 The Browsing Screen for API Scan Policies API Scan Policies You are logged in as Orcladmin API Scan Policies test test v Create 7 8 1 Creating an API Scan Policy The API scan policy creation wizard enables you to create a policy To access this wizard click the Crea
168. ation event emails from event sink This email account also needs to be configured in Oracle Application Server Wireless as Notification Account Configure the Notification Setting ASP In this task you must create a virtual directory in the Internet Information Server web site This virtual directory name also needs to be configured in the Oracle Application Server Wireless as 17 2 Administrator s Guide Configuring the Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server ASP Virtual Path In addition you must enforce basic authentication on the folder and copy the rule setting ASP file into that directory Note This section describes configuration steps that are performed on the Microsoft Exchange Server Machine for information on configuring the machine running Oracle Application Server Wireless see Section 17 4 Exchange Notification Administration in Oracle Application Server Wireless 17 3 1 1 Requirements You must install the following on the server machine before you can configure the Microsoft Exchange 2000 server Microsoft Windows 2000 XP NT Server with Active Directory correctly configured Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server plus Service Pack 3 Microsoft Internet Information Server with the HTTP Server enabled Note All of these components must run properly 17 3 1 2 Creating A System User for Registering COM Objects The Exchange notification sink and registration COM objects need to be run as a server proc
169. ault value must contain a valid Wallet compartment and field name The administrator for the Form Filler knows the compartment and the field name For example a Input Parameter Name ORACLE SERVICES_COMMERCE_ FORMFILLER_ SUGGESTIONS_Credit Card a Default Value CREDIT CARD CC_NUMBER The dynamic mapping suggestions are controlled by a class that implements the GuessingHeuristic interface The factory method inside the FormFillerManager to retrieve the implementation of the guessing heuristic takes the class name from the Form Filler application parameters The key of the property is ORACLE_SERVICES_COMMERCE_FORMFILLER_HEURISTIC 8 76 Administrator s Guide m Commerce Applications 8 5 1 3 Setting Up the Guessing Heuristics The guessing heuristics uses keys that are defined in the parameters for Form Filler application The parameter ORACLE_SERVICES_COMMERCE_FORMF ILLER_ HEURISTIC defines the property used by the GuessingHeuristic implementor of the Form Filler application This value must be the fully qualified class name of the class implementing the GuessingHeuristic interface This is an optional field as the default dynamic heuristic provider is set to oracle panama app services modules formfiller WalletGuessingHeuristic The following are input service parameters are examples of the configurati
170. b2 2533 N A Eal true a February 27 2003 7 38 14 PM PST C A b_test 2544 N A Eli false 0 March 7 2003 5 09 37 PM PST I tb 2554 N A ail false 0 March 7 2003 5 47 11 PM PST Delete Categorize Move Esait Add Folder Add Bookmark Add Application 5 3 1 Searching for Repository Objects The browsing screen screen s search function enables you to search for and display the following repository objects a Application a Module a Async Application a Bookmark a Folder The search field when used in conjunction with two drop down lists the Type and Category lists enable you to narrow your searches to a specific type and category The results display in the Search Result screen which is described by Table 5 2 Managing Content 5 5 Managing Application Links Table 5 2 Elements of the Search Result Section of the Applications Screen Element Description Name The name of the folder or service Clicking the name of a folder displays its subfolders Object ID The Object ID stored in the database Full Path The route to a repository object with Applications at the root Each node on the route is displayed as a hyperlink Clicking a hyperlink reveals a browse screen displaying the subfolders applications and bookmarks organized under the folder Using this browse screen you can perform such functions as creating and deleting applications bookmarks and f
171. bed in Table 7 4 7 14 Administrator s Guide Managing Adapters Table 7 4 Parameters of the Create Adapter Screen Parameter Value Name The name of the adapter The name must be unique Valid Specifies whether the adapter is available to the master applications If selected the adapter is available If this option is clear then the adapter is invalid and therefore unavailable As a result all of the master applications that use the adapter are also invalid Java Class The Java class that either implements the adapter or serves as the entry point for the classes that implement the adapter After you enter the needed parameters click Create The browsing screen reappears displaying the new adapter Clicking Cancel clears any values entered and returns you to the browsing screen 7 5 2 Editing an Adapter To edit an adapter select the adapter from the browsing screen and then click Edit The Edit Adapters screen appears displaying the values for the selected adapter Click Apply to commit your changes Clicking Cancel clears any values entered and returns you to the browsing screen 7 5 3 Deleting an Adapter To delete an adapter from the repository select the adapter and then click Delete 7 5 4 Setting Adapter Parameters The following sections describe the uses and parameters of the Wireless adapters a Section 7 5 4 1 Setting the Initialization Init Parameters for Adapters a Section 7 5 4 2 Setting the
172. been authenticated Enable session begin Event Declares a session event to be session has been validated Enable session end Event Declares a session event to be session has expired implicitly and explicitly Enable after session Event Declares a session event to be session object has been released Response Event Enable response error Event Declares a response event to be error in response object See the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide for more information on event listeners Hook You can change the hook implementation class for a selected hook using the Hook page Table 3 12 describes the hooks Table 3 12 Hooks Hook Description wireless http locator signon pages hook class The hook to generate the sign on page on the device The default is oracle mwa core omap panama MWASignOnPage wireless http locator caller location hook class Declares the hook for which acquires the user s current location The default is oracle panama rt common LocAcq wireless http locator service visibility hook class Declares the hook to check for the show or hide status when Wireless starts The default is oracle panama rt common ServiceVisiblity Managing the Wireless Server 3 41 Site Administration Table 3 12 Hooks Hook Description wireless http locator listener registration hook class wireless http home folder sorter hook class wireless http locato
173. ber is a user who accesses a notification and sets trigger conditions for a notification Number of Application Invocations The total number of application invocations over the specified time period In this version of Wireless the notification message content is generated by invoking an application Number of Errors The total number of errors occurred over the specified time period Messaging Server Performance The performance data are separated by client side performance and server side performance The client performance is based on the designated time period for each individual delivery type of the wireless site Average Sending Response Time ms The average time of a sending method On the client side a sending method is called to send a message This time is the period from when the method is called to the time the method returns When the method returns the message is saved in a database persistently but is not delivered Total number of Sending Requests The total number of times that the sending method is called by the client process The sending method can be called once to send a message to a set of destinations Total Number of Sending Requests Sent 3 24 Administrator s Guide Site Performance The total number of successful calls where a message is delivered to a proper gateway and its receipt is acknowledged The client process can call the sending method many times to send many messages Some of these
174. bile applications creating mobile users providing help desk support to mobile users and managing the Wireless server These tools each include step by step wizards which enable users to quickly accomplish any task The wizard pages include inline hints and tips which provide information for new users to quickly learn the tools In addition the online help enables experienced users to utilize the advanced features Out of the box Wireless provides the following tools a Service Manager System Manager Introducing Oracle Application Server Wireless 1 3 Using the Wireless Tools a Content Manager a Foundation Manager a User Manager Wireless also provides the Wireless Customization Portal which enables end users to personalize Wireless applications and manage their personal profiles including their devices and Location Marks The Customization Portal can be used as the out of box Web based portal along with the device based portal The Wireless Tools are role specific Wireless users can only access the tool which corresponds to the role or roles that they have been granted These user roles which are described in Table 1 1 span all of the Wireless resources from server management application development application publishing and help desk to subscription to the Wireless applications Because these tools are Web based they require no client side installation After installing and starting the Wireless server multiple users
175. by voice reader Region Name Visible Personalizable software along with a folder in a menu listing You do not need to specify the format type in this URI as Wireless selects the audio file format appropriate to the user s device The area such as a continent country or city that is associated with the folder If you assign a region to a folder then users can only view that folder and its contents when they are in the assigned region Selecting this check box makes the folder visible to the end user If you do not select this option then the folder and its contents are neither visible nor accessible to the end user Selecting this option enables end users to customize their user views using the Wireless Customization or on the device by reordering hiding or showing this folder 5 8 Administrator s Guide Managing Application Links Figure 5 4 The Create Folder Screen General Parameters Content gt Root Folders and Applications gt New Folder New Folder General Folder Name Stock Serices Description a Sequence Poono Renderer Type System Title Icon URI c temp imagesistockfolder Menu Icon URI JeAtemplimages stockfolder Title Audio URI eAtemp audio stockfolder Menu Audio URI Region Name Fresno CAN SsS S Sf Click on the flashlight to select a region Visible Personalizable M 5 3 2 2 Step 2 Assigning the Rendering Options The Rendering screen displays options specific to the re
176. c was created or the last time the alert or topic was edited 5 7 2 Creating an Alert Deprecated To create an alert you first click the Add Alert button The General screen of the Create Alert wizard appears Step 1 Entering General Alert Information n the General screen you define the name and optionally add a description for the alert Table 5 13 describes the fields in this screen Table 5 13 Fields of the General Screen of the Create Alert Wizard Field Description Alert Name The name of the alert Description A description of the alert 5 30 Administrator s Guide Managing Alerts Deprecated Step 2 Basing the Alert on an Existing Master Alert In the Master Alert screen of the Alert Creation Wizard you select a master alert on which to base your alert This master alert serves as the template for the alert that you customize and publish to users Step 3 Entering Alert Input Parameters The Input Parameters screen displays the input parameters for the master alert selected in Step 2 If needed define the parameters in this screen Table 5 14 describes the master alert input parameters Table 5 14 The Master Alert Input Parameters Input Parameter Description Name Caption Data Type Value The name of the alert This field cannot be edited The label used by Wireless when prompting input from users while they subscribe to alerts The table column data type format for the i
177. can access the Wireless tools through normal desktop browsers You do not need to manually configure any server files or code with APIs to access the out of box features of the Wireless server unless you want to expand the Wireless server functions 1 4 Administrator s Guide Using the Wireless Tools Table 1 1 Wireless User Roles User Role Description Available Tools Application Users assigned the Application Developer role perform Service Manager Developer the following functions Create modify delete and test applications a Publish applications to the Application Developer s folder Create modify and delete notifications Create modify and delete data feeders a Register and delete J2ME Web services Develop preset definitions Foundation Users assigned the Foundation Developer role perform Foundation Manager Developer the following functions Content Manager a Create modify and delete devices Create modify and delete transformers a Create modify and delete regions a Create modify and delete digital rights policies Create modify and delete API scan policies Users assigned the Content Manager role perform the Content Manager following functions Manage application folders and bookmarks a Create application links based on Application Developer created applications a Create notifications based on alerts deprecated in this release Create application
178. cation The company name of the destination location The address first line of the destination location The address second line of the destination location The address last line of the destination location The block of the destination location The city of the destination location The county of the destination location The state of the destination location The postal code of the destination location A string For example OCOUNTY San Mateo A string For example OSTATE CA A string For example OZIP 94065 A string For example OZIPEXT 5423 A string For example OCOUNTRY US Double For example OLAT 37 2433 Double For example OLNG 122 3452 A string For example ONAME Golden Gate Park A string For example DCOMPANYNAME Oracle Corp A string For example DADDRESS 500 Oracle Parkway A string For example DADDRESS2 Redwood City CA A string For example DADDRESSLL US A string For example DBLOCK Block 400 A string For example DCITY Redwood City A string For example DCOUNTY San Mateo A string For example DSTATE CA A string For example DZIP 94065 Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 67 Location Table 8 34 Input Call Parameters of the Driving Directions Application Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value DZIPEXT No The postal code extension of the A string For example destination location DZIPEXT 5423 DCOUNTRY N
179. cess Note Users must provide their account numbers and PINs to access the portal Use the PAoid lt oid gt attribute to enable users to log into a particular application such as the Voice Main Menu For the Voice Main Menu to execute the playlist items the number of new email messages and appointments use the start true attribute 9 2 3 1 Provisioning Mobile Studio for Voice Access When provisioning Mobile Studio for voice access point the VoiceXML gateway to a URL for a start or login page in the Wireless and Voice Portal in the form of http lt hostname gt ptg rm 9 2 3 2 Setting up the Voice Main Menu Service In addition to regular voice access Oracle Application Server Wireless also provides a voice portal that plays the number of new messages and appointments for the user and contains links to such PIM applications as mail calendar address book files and directory Using the Content Manager This section includes a discussion on how to use the Content Manager one of the Oracle Application Server Wireless Tools to enable applications to return to the Voice Main Menu application and how to optimize the loading of the mail application to improve user performance For more information on using the Content Manager see Chapter 5 Managing Content To access the Content Manager you must be granted either the Super User or Content Manager roles For more information on user roles see Section 4 1 1 in Chap
180. cess and thus is not suitable for load balancing and failover The configuration for load balancing and failover must be manually added 14 3 3 Configuring OC4J The OC4J related configuration files are located in ORACLE_HOME j2ee OC4J_ Wireless config directory The default configuration is set for running single Wireless server process To support load balancing and failover features you must modify the the OC4J configuration files orion web xml and WEB INF web xml as described in the following steps 1 Modify orion web xml There are two orion web xml files one for Multi Channel server and one for the wireless modulable applications They are located in the following directories Load Balancing and Failover 14 3 Configuring Wireless for High Availability Deployment a ORACLE_HOME j2ee OC4J_ Wireless application deployments ptg ptg web ORACLE_HOME j2ee OC4J_ Wireless application deployments modules modules web For both of these files add the following to the main body of the lt orion web app gt tag lt cluster config gt 2 Modify WEB INF web xml There are two web xml files one for Wireless web server and one for the Wireless modules They are located in the following directories a ORACLE_HOME j2ee OC4J_Wireless applications ptg ptg web WEB INF a ORACLE HOME j2ee OC4J_Wireless applications modules modules web WEB INF For both of these files add the lt distributable gt tag
181. ck Add Another Row A blank row appears Define the name for the input parameter and any other needed parameters in this row which are described in Table 7 8 7 5 4 3 1 Setting Input Parameters for the AppsFramework Adapter The AppsFramework adapter enables the development of enterprise applications on top of Wireless It provides system wide standard application look and feel enhanced application widgets support and data binding to enterprise data The AppsFramework adapter includes the input parameter classname which must be the package and class of the implementation of the MobileApplicationHandler interface 7 20 Administrator s Guide Managing Adapters 7 5 4 3 2 Modifying the Style Color and SDU Information for the Mobile Application Framework Adapter The Mobile Application Framework adapter uses style and color mappings to provide a uniform look and feel that can be customized across all applications running on the server In addition carrier specific information can be specified to the Mobile Application Framework adapter to optimize the content delivered by the adapter The StyleColorLoader command line utility is used to modify the style color and SDU size information used by the Mobile Applications Framework adapter Downloading the Style Color SDU Repository To download the Style Color SDU Repository 1 Change directory to ORACLE_HOME wireless sample 2 Enter updateStyleColor bat D lt filename gt where lt fil
182. ckward compatibility The temporary audio directory URL is modules pim mail audiotemp a Encoding Enter the encoding to be used while sending an email Use IANA character set names The list of names is published at http www iana org assignments character sets 8 50 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail If there is no value entered for this parameter that is it is left blank then the system s default encoding is used for the outgoing messages The user can override this setting in the Mail application under Setup a Valid Values Valid encoding a Default Value UTF 8 a Examples UTF 8 ISO 8859 1 OID Administrator username Username for Administrator account in the OID Server This parameter is needed only when the Mail application is configured to connect to Oracle Internet Directory OID to retrieve Inbox Filters a Valid Values A valid administrator account on the OID server a Default Value orcladmin a Examples orcladmin administrator OID Administrator Password The password for the OID administrator user This parameter is only needed when the Mail application is configured to connect to Oracle Internet Directory OID to retrieve Inbox Filters a Valid Values A password for the OID admin user a Default Value An empty value a Examples welcomel password Mail JDBC Driver Type Select the mail JDBC driver type used for connecting to the Oracle Internet Directory OID server This parameter is need
183. cle Application Server Wireless stored in Oracle home install portlist ini For more information on port usage see Oracle Application Server Installation Guide and the Oracle Application Server Administrator s Guide Enter your user name and then enter your password If you are an administrator enter orcladmin as your user name The password is set during installation but can be changed with the User Manager The Oracle Application Server Wireless Tools appears with the User Manager displaying by default as displayed in Figure 2 4 Figure 2 4 The Oracle Application Server Wireless Tools with User Manager Displayed Oracle Application Server ill eee Overview Search User By User Name gt Matches ral Advanced Search You may use asterisks as wildcards in your search You are logged in as orcladmir User Overview Users ooo Groups o E Total Number of Users 39 Total Number of Groups 4 Total Number of Currently Logged in Users 1 Guests 36 SelfTest 6 StudioUsers 6 Roles Users 9 Total Number of Roles 6 System Administrator 5 User Manager 5 Foundation Developer 5 Application Developer 5 Content Manager 5 Superuser 5 Users Foundation Services Content Logout View Log Help Copyright 1996 2003 Oracle All rights reserved 2 6 Administrator s Guide Accessing the Wireless Tools Verifying the Wireless Installation 2 7 Accessing the Wireless Tools 2 8 A
184. conditions for 5 31 API scan policies associating with an application link 5 15 creating 7 30 application link categories creating 5 26 application links certifying APIs 5 15 creating 5 10 debugging 5 16 description 5 1 editing 5 15 Index moving 5 19 testing on a phone simulator 5 16 viewing application links from the User Manager 4 15 Applications Setup 8 3 AppsFramework Adapter setting input parameters 7 20 AQ Advanced Queuing 13 6 ASPs creating for PIM applications 8 60 Async applications adding to an application link category 5 26 configuring 9 19 Async Listener adjusting the working threads 13 7 configuring 3 45 configuring Messaging Server client 3 45 authentication through email 10 9 through SMS 10 9 through voice 10 10 through WAP 10 9 authentication dynamics wireless single sign on 11 3 to 11 7 B Billing Integration Framework configuring 3 35 Biz Directory application input parameters 8 63 linking to 8 64 overview 8 62 bookmarks Index 1 creating 5 17 description 5 2 moving 5 19 C Calendar application configuration parameters 8 19 connecting to the Oracle Collaboration Suite 8 19 input call parameters 8 22 linking to 8 21 output parameters 8 23 overview 8 19 required software 8 19 clustering configuration configuring OC4J 14 3 configuring OHS 14 2 configuring OPMN 14 2 Communication Data Privacy 10 1 configuring Messaging Server client
185. content from any JDBC enabled data source Glossary 5 Glossary 6 stylesheet An XSLT eXtensible Stylesheet Language Transformations instance that implements content presentation for XML documents Wireless transformers can be either XSLT stylesheets or Java programs target format The format required to deliver data to a specific type of client device Thin HTML A minimal version of HTML implemented by a transformer in the starter Wireless repository Thin HTML does not include support for frames JavaScript or other advanced features transformer A Wireless object that converts content returned by the Wireless adapters Result transformers convert Adapter Result documents into Simple Result documents Device transformers convert Simple Result documents into the target format TTML Tagged Text Mark up Language A lightweight version of HTML suitable for most PDAs user agent An object that associates an end user with a device type user group A Wireless object that represents a set of users that are grouped together based on common criteria such as interests subscription level or geographic location VoxML A markup language that enables the use of voice to interface with applications WAP Wireless Application Protocol A wireless standard from Motorola Ericsson and Nokia for providing cellular phones with access to email and text based Web pages WAP uses Wireless Markup Language WML Web Integration adapter
186. cribes the style element properties Table 7 9 Style Element Properties Property Name Required Multiple Description Name Yes No The name of the Style FontFace Yes No The name of the font face of the given style FontSize Yes No The font size of the given style FontColor Yes No The name of the font color of the given style FontStyle Yes No aa of the font style of the given style that is Bold Italic ain In addition to the lt St yle gt element the StyleSet contains elements described in Table 7 10 Table 7 10 StyleSet Element Properties Property Name Required Multiple Description Name Yes No The name of the StyleSet If a StyleSet is not associated with the device then the StyleSet named Default is assigned to the device Inherits Yes No The parent style sheet from which style definition are inherited Often the administrator wants only to change a single style between two devices In such a case the administrator defines a single StyleSet which has all of the style definitions for the first device The second device then inherits this StyleSet and only overwrites the styles that are different between the two StyleSets Style Yes No This element defines a style Device Yes No Describes the type of devices associated with a style set The two types of devices supported are Phone and PDA By modifying application style definitions in a given lt StyleSet gt the system administrator c
187. cts to the older generation pool Copying Major Collection The Collection of older generation objects Mark Compact The first step in tuning is to observe the frequency of GC by using the following command line options gt java verbose gc classname This command results in output similar to the following GC 866K gt 764K 1984K 0 0037943 secs GC 1796K gt 1568K 2112K 0 0068823 secs Full GC 2080K gt 1846K 3136K 0 0461094 secs gt gt gt gt GC 2047K gt 1955K 3136K 0 0157263 secs The following knobs are available within Java 1 3 1 to change this default behavior Xms Xmx The total size of the heap is bounded by the Xms and XMxX values Xms is the minimum size of the heap and Xmx is the maximum size to which the heap can grow Having a larger heap will reduce the frequency of collections You should increase the heap size as the number of processors increase since allocation can be done in parallel Optimizing Oracle Application Server Wireless 13 11 Optimizing J VM Performance The following list of parameters is specific to Sun s HotSpot VM XX NewSize XX MaxNewSize The young generation size is bounded by these values Having a smaller generation means a faster rate of collection by minor collection and lower frequency of major collections This is ideally suited for web applications By changing these four parameters you can change the frequency of collec
188. current location if mobile positioning is enabled a Location Mark selected by the user a recent location used by the user or a new location to be entered by the user The Location Picker application is used by other applications to acquire a location from the user When used directly by the user Location Picker provides management of the user s Location Marks and allows the user to set a preferred location which is either the user s current location when the mobile positioning is available and enabled or the user s default Location Marks Other location applications include Driving Directions Maps and Biz Directory These applications use the Location Picker to acquire locations from the user if the user does not have a preferred location or if the user specifically wants to change the location used for those applications 8 4 1 Biz Directory The Biz Directory application provides users with a complete business directory This application is built on the Wireless Location Application Component API 8 62 Administrator s Guide Location This application provides a yellow pages type interface to search for the addresses and phone numbers of registered businesses within a given radius The application enables searches for business names or categories and enables users to browse categories If no location parameters are passed to this application then the Location application is invoked to obtain location data for the search 8 4
189. cy using HTTPS which is HTTP running over an SSL secured link Figure 10 3 Since there are no intermediate nodes performing protocol translations at the security layer as there are WAP 1 x data communication is end to end private between the browser and the application server Figure 10 3 PCs Browsers HTTPS PC Browser Oracle Application Server Wireless Because Wireless supports HTTPS connections PC browser connections are point to point secure 10 4 2 2 Pocket PCs The wireless extension to the PC browser is through the use of HTTP devices that connect to a wireless LAN gateway as it is in the case of Pocket PCs with wireless LAN card adapter The connection from the device to the wireless LAN gateway follows the 802 11b standard for wireless communication which is interoperable with the wired Internet protocol since it uses the Ethernet protocol Since both protocols wired and wireless are interoperable at the security layer point to point secure communication is also carried out through HTTPS from the device to the Application Server as depicted in Figure 10 4 10 14 Administrator s Guide Installing and Configuring Oracle Application Server Wireless Security Figure 10 4 Wireless LANs and Other HTTP Based Devices E a _ PocketPC Wireless LAN Gateway Oracle Application Server Wireless Without HTTPS security at the application layer wireless LANs are insecure even with the use of the Wired Equivalen
190. d similarities of security in both wired deployment and wireless deployment 10 1 1 1 Wired Application Deployment Figure 10 1 depicts the basic arrangement of deployment in the wired world a wired device such as a PC connects over the network to an application server Figure 10 1 Wired Deployment wired network wired device The nitemet application server The main security characteristics of the wired deployment scenario are a Data travels across the wire This data may be protected by a secure communication protocol such as SSL Encrypted communication between the device and the application server is regarded as end to end secure as the communication can be carried out without intermediate nodes that intercept and modify the information a Online application access is usually controlled through user name and password authentication traveling over the protected communication link More secure schemes make use of digital certificate based technology or tokens for example RSA SecurIDs a Access control is carried out at the application server side by checking the permissions set for the authenticated user Wireless Security 10 3 Overview a Data integrity is provided along with communication data privacy through encryption a Wired applications requiring some measure of non repudiation usually resort to using transaction logs Strong non repudiation can be carried out through digital signatures a Sen
191. ded HADDRCOUNTRY U S A A short description of the person in the contact for example NOTES This the chief of staff in CCC Co Output Parameters Table 8 4 describes the output parameters for the Address Book Table 8 4 Output Parameters of the Addressbook Parameter Name Mandatory Description mailto No An email address of a contact This must be an email address For example mailto scott tiger orcale com smPhone smphone is a phone number of a contact returned with additional parameters used by the Short Messaging application usually when the user selects a phone number in the Address Book application Table 8 5 describes the smPhone parameters Table 8 5 Parameters of smPhone Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value type Yes The type of short messaging service desired VOICE FAX Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 15 PIM and Mail Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value destinationAddress Yes The recipient number of A phone number for example address for the short message 4 actination Address 650 555 5000 usually a phone number faxNumber faxNumber is the fax number of a contact returned with additional parameters used by the FAX or Short Messaging applications usually when the user selects a fax number in the Address Book application Table 8 6 describes the parameters of the faxNumber group Table 8 6 Parameters of faxnumbe
192. des an extensible and flexible framework to model billable services capture billable action and integrate with any external billing engine To enable the billing of all services select Enable Billing Billing is disabled by default To complete the billing enabling process provide the implementation of two interfaces the BillingDataCollector interface and the BillingDriver interface and then configure them as the implementation classes Note The out of the box implementation of the BillingDataCollector interface is pre seeded in the configuration as oracle wireless billing BillingDataCollectorImpl Managing the Wireless Server 3 35 Site Administration The Billing Collector Class fetches all of the component specific billing attributes and then plugs them into the service detail record SDR which encapsulates the billable action The Billing Collector Class considers the following components Runtime Notification Server Provisioning Server and Messaging Server In addition you define the Billing Provider Driver the driver implementation provided at the customer end which communicates with the external billing system To enter this value you enter the full class with the package name such as oracle wireless billing SampleBillingDriver You can select delete or add the driver class initialization init parameters If this billing driver implementation class expects initialization properties then you
193. device registered with Wireless In addition to creating user groups and assigning objects to them you can also remove objects from user groups 5 4 1 Managing a User Group Clicking the Access Control Content tab invokes the Groups page Figure 5 7 which includes a table listing the current user groups From this table you can select a user group using the Select button and then edit it delete it or manage the objects assigned to it Figure 5 7 The Groups Page Access Control Content Content gt Access Control Content Welcome orcladmin Groups Use this page to publish application links to user groups and enable users to view applications on any registered device Apply Assign Application e fes OOS S o c Studilsers ooo LoS E KE C e Be ooo E leke _ T C C SY Create Group Group Name E Description E S y y S SS i E Table 5 9 describes the fields and functions of the Groups screen 5 20 Administrator s Guide Defining Access Control Table 5 9 Elements of the Groups Page Element Description Delete You can delete a group by selecting it from the table and then by clicking Delete Apply After you edit the name or description of a selected group in the table click Apply to save your changes Assign Application Selecting a group and then clicking this button invokes the Application Content page which enables you to manage the objects assigned
194. devices in the repository From this screen you can search for create clone delete and edit a device Figure 7 1 The Browse Devices Screen Wireless _ Devices Transforr japter Reg Digital Rights Policie PIS F Search Device By Name z Keywora Devices SelectName Description Manufacturer Model User Agent JASYNC Cc AvantGo Mozilla AvantGo C BLAZER UPG1 Blazer C Blackberry857 RIM 857 RIM 857 Wireless Handheld C CHTML BlackBerry C Danger_Hiptop Danger Hiptop Mozilla Danger hiptop C DoCoMo DoCoMo 7 4 Administrator s Guide Managing Devices 7 3 1 Searching for a Device From the Device browsing screen you can search for devices by keyword name manufacturer model user agent or transformer To search for a device Select one of the following search options Name a Manufacturer Model a Transformer a User Agent Enter the keyword for your search Click Go The Search Results screen appears Figure 7 2 Figure 7 2 The Search Results Screen for Devices Devices ransforme Adar gions gital Rights f can Search Device ByfUser Agent m Keyword Mozilla Devices TINY_HTML Wie oa en ee 7 3 2 Creating a Device The device creation wizard enables you to create a device by prompting you through each step in the creation process The wizard dedicates a screen to each of these steps you progress thr
195. ding and deploying e business portals It provides an environment for accessing and interacting with enterprise software services and information resources OracleAS Portal provides a framework that integrates Web based resources such as Web pages applications business intelligence reports and syndicated content feeds within standardized reusable information components called portlets A portlet is an area of HTML XML located within a defined area of a Web page Portlets communicate with the portal through an entity called a provider Portlets form the fundamental building blocks of an OracleAS Portal page Each portal page consists of content presented through one or more portlets and links that allow the user to navigate to another page to take some action Portlets summarize promote or provide basic access to an information resource The portlets allow information resources to be personalized and managed as an application of OracleAS Portal The portal framework provides additional services including single sign on content classification enterprise search directory integration and access control OracleAS Portal supports Desktop PC Web browsers and enables OracleAS Portal pages to be accessed from wireless devices OraclePortal working in conjunction with Wireless automatically transforms the portal page structure that is appropriate for the wireless devices OracleAS Portal generates the Page structure in Wireless XML for all request f
196. dministrator s Guide Part Il System Administration This section includes the following chapters Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Managing the Wireless Server Managing Users Managing Content Administering Mobile Studio Managing Foundation Services 3 Managing the Wireless Server This chapter includes the following sections a Section 3 1 Overview a Section 3 2 Logging Into the System Manager a Section 3 3 The Home Page a Section 3 4 Wireless Server Performance a Section 3 5 Site Performance a Section 3 6 Site Administration 3 1 Overview System Administrators use the System Manager to manage the Wireless site and server as well as to manage and configure processes and monitor system performance data to assess system health and centrally manage and configure Wireless All configuration data is stored in the database In addition the System Manager enables users to upload and download repository objects The System Manager which is part of Oracle Enterprise Manager in integrated mode provides you with two views to manage the Wireless system the Wireless Server view and the Site view The Wireless Server view enables you to monitor and manage system performance for each server and to start and stop the server processes From the Site view you create a common configuration for the Wireless servers and monitor the performance data for the entir
197. e The Home Page a Site Enabled The value displayed which is read only from the driver instance page states whether the site driver has been enabled for the site a Driver class parameters You define these parameters to specify the driver class parameter values Each parameter has multiple attributes which are defined at the site level such as parameter name description mandatory flag displayed as True or False and parameter value Although the driver table in this page displays all of the driver s site defined attributes you can only specify the parameters values at the process level their default values are set at the site level For a mandatory parameter you must provide a value to successfully create or update a driver instance If you do not define a mandatory parameter then Wireless generates an error Updating a Driver Instance To update the driver instance you select the driver instance from the Messaging Server process detail page and then click Edit Creating a New Driver Instance To create a driver instance you use the Add Driver Instance page Figure 3 13 which is invoked by clicking the Add Driver Instance button in the process detail page You then select the site driver on which to base the new driver instance Wireless retrieves the class parameter list from the site driver and populates the values for the new instance which you can update In addition to the class parameter values Wireless also ret
198. e Figure 5 6 Figure 5 6 Adding a New MIME Type Access Control Content Publish Content New Bookmark Mime Type ftextAnd wap wml URL jwww oracle com 5 3 9 Editing a Bookmark You can edit the values for a bookmark using the Edit Bookmark screen which you access by selecting a bookmark and then by clicking Edit 5 3 10 Moving Folders Application Links and Bookmarks You can organize application links folders and bookmarks in a business context appropriate to a user group by using the Content Manager s Move function To move application links folders or bookmarks 1 From the browsing screen select the folder application link or bookmark that you want to move 2 Click Move 3 Select the new folder for the object If necessary click the folder to drill down to the appropriate subfolder Wireless tracks your position in the hierarchy through the navigation path For more information on the navigation path see Section 5 3 2 4 Click Move Here The Content Manager displays the selected object in its new folder Managing Content 5 19 Defining Access Control 5 4 Defining Access Control The Content Manager enables you to create edit and delete user groups Using the Content Manager you can publish application links to users by assigning them to user groups When an object such as a folder has been published to a user group an end user belonging to that group can access the object from any
199. e FC No Full category of the A string For example business This category is FC Business Restaurant Italian For defined in the YP mapping example XML file which is FC Business Automotive Dealer New specified using the Oracle BMW Application Server Wireless Tools CN No Company Name A string For example CN Oracle Corp FL No Address First Line A string For example FL 500 Oracle Parkway SL No Address Second Line A string For example SL Redwood City CA LL No Address Last Line A string For example LL US BL No Block A string For example BL Block 400 CI No City A string For example CI Redwood City CT No County A string For example CT San Mateo ST No State A string For example ST CA PC No Postal Code A string For example PC 94065 PCE No Postal Code Extension A string For example PCE 5423 CO No Country A string For example CO US LT No Latitude Double For example LT 37 2433 LN No Longitude Double For example LN 122 3452 N No Name A string For example N Golden Gate Park 8 64 Administrator s Guide Location Output Parameter Table 8 32 describes the output parameter of the Biz Directory application Table 8 32 Output Parameter of the Biz Directory Application Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value STATUS No The status of a mobile OK call CANCEL Cancelled 8 4 2 Driving Directions The Driving Directions application provides users with turn by turn driving directio
200. e fw fwd fwd Specify a list of prefixes in the email subject line which indicates the subject line should be ignored and not be interpreted as user commands Example Re Fwd I Disable Multiple Async Command Support per Request Cancel OK Command Format Help Command ih Application Help Command help UUU Optimizing Oracle Application Server Wireless 13 7 Optimizing Data Feeder Performance 13 3 1 2 Adjusting thitherto Pool Size of Messaging Server Client Increasing the size of the thread pool enables the Messaging Server client to handle higher loads You can adjust the size of the thread pool from the Messaging Server Client screen of the System Manager To access this screen Figure 13 4 select Messaging Server Client located under Notification Engine in the Component Configuration section on the Administration screen For more information on configuring the Messenger Sever client see Section 3 6 2 3 Figure 13 4 Adjusting the Thread Pool Size Wireless Server System gt Wireless Server Administration gt Messaging Server Client Messaging Server Client Cancel OK Thread Pool Size fi Number of Queues fi Recipient Chunk Size 180 Number of message recipients Carrier Finder Hook Class Name Driver Finder Hook Class Name Pre send Hook Derete e i M Rov Add Another Row 13 3 1 3 Adjusting the Sending and Receiving Threads You can also increase the se
201. e if you expect the user to enter numbers for the parameter you use the format code N This works only with WML 1 1 compliant devices The default format is M Other formats include a A for entry of uppercase letters or punctuation a a for entry of lowercase letters or punctuation a N for entry of numbers a X for entry of uppercase letters a x for entry of lowercase letters For a complete list of formats see the Wireless Application Protocol Wireless Markup Language Specification Version 1 1 Mandatory Select this check box if this parameter must have a value Remove the selection for optional parameters Default Value For most parameters this value represents the default value for the parameter If you specify a default value Wireless does not prompt the user for a value Default values can be overridden by a value specified by an application link created by the Content Manager or if the parameter is visible to the user in the Wireless Customization Portal The PAsection parameter is used by the Web Integration adapter For PAsection this value is the name of the WIDL application that the Web application should use You can select the names from a drop down selection list If you do not specify a value for PAsect ion the Wireless application includes all WIDL applications in the WIDL interface 7 5 4 3 Adding a New Input Parameter to the Adapter From the Input Screen of the Master Application Creation Wizard cli
202. e the User attributes in the local repository are synchronized with the attributes stored in the OID Note The user attributes must be synchronized with OID because the PL SQL notification mechanism does not guarantee real time notifications Integrating Wireless with Other Components 16 3 Overview 16 1 2 PL SQL Based Asynchronous Synchronization The Oracle Application Server Wireless installation registers a PL SQL procedure with OID The PL SQL procedure is invoked when a user is modified or deleted in OID Figure 16 2 Interactions between PL SQL and OID Oracle Intemet Directory Wireless Wireless Wireless instance instance 2 instance 3 Advanced Queue Call Registered PL SQL procedure Provisioning PL SQL Sync Agent Procedure modify delete BroadC ast user entry Refresh Cache message Oracle Application Server Wireless Repository Figure 16 2 depicts the events triggered when a user is modified in OID The sequence is as follows 1 User attribute is modified or the user is deleted in OID 2 The Provisioning Synchronization agent picks up the modifications and calls the registered PL SQL package 3 The PL SQL package accomplishes appropriate changes in the PanamaUser table if required 16 4 Administrator s Guide Integrating Wireless with WebCache 4 The trigger on the PanamaUser table broadcasts a RefreshCache message to all running instances of Wireless
203. e 24 bit color code of the given color for example White FFFFFF 7 5 4 3 3 Setting Input Parameters for the SQL Adapter You can configure SQL input parameters in the same way that you configure the Web service parameters You specify input parameters in the SQL statement you use to implement the service 7 6 Managing Regions When you click the Regions tab in the Foundation Manager the main display of the region modeling tool appears Figure 7 11 7 24 Administrator s Guide Managing Digital Rights Policies Figure 7 11 The Main Display of the Region Modeling Tool Devic Transformers Adapte Regions Rights Policies PI Sc Search By name gt Al region yoo Regions You are logged in as Orcladmin Regions Create from collection Create from address Create folder Add to collection Select All Select None canes Custom regions Collection a EE EN NE Create from collection Create from address Create folder The region modeling tool enables administrators of a wireless portals to create custom regions that can be associated with location based applications You create a location dependent application by specifying a region This region can be a system defined region one provided out of the box with Wireless or a custom region one created with the region modeling tool A region is a geographic entity or location A region can be small such as a street address or lar
204. e 3 12 Hooks Hook Description wireless http locator authentication hook class Declares the hook for user authentication The default is oracle mwa core omap panama OMAPAuthenticat ion wireless http locator useragent class Default implementation of the device recognition class The default is oracle panama core xform UserAgent Impl wireless http locator normalizeaddress hook class Stores the address field of the DeviceAddress in normalized form which is used to look up objects and to send the address by the transport For example the normalized form of an email delivery type can be lower case letters making the normalized form of Scott Tiger Oracle com into scott tiger oracle com The normalized form of the SMS delivery type could be all non numeric characters For example the normalized form for 650 555 5000 is 6505555000 If some carriers have a space between the area code then the normalized address logic converts the phone number to 650 555 5000 3 6 2 2 Multimedia Adaptation Service Multimedia adaptation services provide device specific adaptation of images ringtones voice grammar as well as audio and video streams Wireless provides the default implementation for these services To use different implementations change the corresponding provider class name on Multimedia Adaptation Service configuration page Note When changing the class name be sure that the class is on the Wireless classpath
205. e Instance URLs page located on the Home page For more information on the Instance URLs page see Section 3 3 3 If you do not select this option then the Wireless servers use their local URLs instead Table 3 3 The Instance URLs Parameter Value Multi Channel Server HTTP URL The Multi Channel Server URL in HTTP mode This URL is used when the Wireless server uses the Multi Channel server entry point for URL re writing The default URL format is http lt server gt lt http port gt mcs remote Multi Channel Server HTTPS URL The Multi Channel Server URL in HTTPS mode The default URL format is https lt server gt lt https port gt mcs remote Wireless and Voice Portal HTTP URL The Wireless and Voice Portal URL in HTTP mode The default URL format is http lt server gt lt http port gt ptg rm Wireless and Voice Portal HTTPS URL The Wireless and Voice Portal URL in HTTPs mode The default URL format is https lt server gt lt https port gt ptg rm 3 28 Administrator s Guide Site Administration Table 3 3 The Instance URLs Parameter Value HTTP Adapter HTTP URL Prefix HTTP Adapter HTTPS URL Prefix Wireless Tools URL Wireless Customization Portal URL J2ME Provisioning Server URL J2ME Web Service Proxy Server URL XMS Center Base URL The URL prefix for the remote JSP page that is invoked by the HTTP Adapter in HTTP mode Entering the URL prefix enables the Wireless se
206. e Utilities section of the System Manager s Administration page The WebCache Utilities section contains two screens a WebCache Refresh Master Application a WebCache Refresh Device To invalidate all pages belonging to a master application click Refresh WebCache Master Application In the WebCache Refresh Master Application screen select a master application in the table and then click Refresh To invalidate all pages with a given device markup click Refresh WebCache Device In the WebCache Refresh Device screen select a device from the table and then click Refresh 16 2 1 4 Administration If WebCache is reinstalled on a different machine or port you must reconfigure the the WebCache settings as detailed in section Section 16 2 1 1 If the Wireless instance is reinstalled on a different machine you must modify the location of the Wireless instance should be modified in the Application Servers of WebCache s administration console See the WebCache Configuration Guide for details on how to perform this task 16 2 1 5 Building a Cacheable Application In this section describes how to build a sample application that is cacheable using WebCache This section also describes methods of controlling the cacheability of such an application dynamically The sample application displays the current time and therefore immediately demonstrates the cached status of the page To create the application 1 Create
207. e WIDL adapter uses this value to identify the application that serves as the entry point in the chained application sequence PAuserid The user name PApassword The user password PAsid The Wireless session identifier Table 7 8 describes the Wireless input parameters Table 7 8 Input Parameters Attributes Parameter Value Name The name of the input parameter The Service Manager sets the name of the input parameter by querying the adapter definition Caption The caption is the label that Wireless uses for the parameter when prompting for user input Comment In the case of master applications based on the Web Integration adapter Wireless User Customizable automatically populates this cell with the name of the WIDL application that uses the parameter For applications based on other adapters you can use this column to document the parameter The comment is only used internally Specifies whether the end user can set a value for this parameter using Wireless Customization You can make most input parameters customizable by the user In particular you should set this option for parameters that may be difficult for a user to enter from a mobile device This includes email addresses and personal identification numbers Managing Foundation Services 7 19 Managing Adapters Table 7 8 Input Parameters Attributes Parameter Value Format This mask sets the expected data entry mode for the user device For exampl
208. e contact your local Oracle Support Services xiii xiv Preface The Administrator s Guide discusses how you can use Oracle Application Server Wireless to develop and deliver mobile applications The guide includes these chapters a Chapter 1 Introducing Oracle Application Server Wireless Describes the Oracle Application Server Wireless Architecture developement tools and the Wireless users a Chapter 2 Verifying the Wireless Installation Describes how to access the Wireless development and administrations tools a Chapter 3 Managing the Wireless Server Provides an overview of the System Manager and of Wireless system management a Chapter 4 Managing Users Provides information on using the User Manager tool to create users and provide help desk support to Wireless users a Chapter 5 Managing Content Describes how to use the Content Manager to publish applications and create user groups a Chapter 6 Administering Mobile Studio Describes how to configure the Mobile Studio and use its administrative functions to manage locales and applications a Chapter 7 Managing Foundation Services XV xvi Describes how to use the Foundation Manager to create such objects as adapters transformers digital rights management polices and API scan policies Chapter 8 Configuring the Out of the Box Applications Describes how to configure the input parameters for Wireless and Voice applications u
209. e fax driver and driver instance as specified in the common tasks 9 4 3 4 Configuring Voice Delivery The voice driver implements the outbound telephony calls through a VoiceGenie VoiceXML Gateway To configure the voice driver provide the URL to the VoiceGenie Outbound Call servlet The remaining configuration of the voice driver and driver instance can be performed as described in the common tasks Wireless Gateway Configuration 9 23 Configuring Wireless for Notifications 9 24 Administrator s Guide 10 Wireless Security 10 1 Overview Oracle Application Server Wireless Wireless combines advanced content transformation device adaptation and network adaptation services with end user customization providing provides enterprises mobile operators content providers or wireless ISPs with a platform to create and deploy mobile applications Wireless incorporates various security mechanisms that enable the deployment of end to end secure unbreakable applications To provide a clear understanding of security and its application in the wireless world this section provides brief descriptions of the principles of security and describes common application deployment models for both the wired and wireless world explaining their similarities and differences in regards to security Subsequent sections describe these security principles in more detail provide available deployment scenarios and identify any issues that are wireles
210. e help On any of the Device Capabilities screens you can click Finish to complete the device and skip the remaining steps 7 8 Administrator s Guide Managing Devices Figure 7 5 Entering Device Capabilities Entering the General Device Features Basic Transformer General Device Features Browser Messaging Voic General Device Features Media Type a Device Class voice z Choose the form factor of the user agent Media Type handheld gt Select media type CSS2 of the device Available i Selected O Move 6 Move All Device Tag Remove Remove or Enter a tag to group related devices Move item s to the selected list Display Width Step 4 Setting the Device Code Segment Using the Device Code Segment screen Figure 7 6 you enter the device result prolog the login page and the error page For the device result prolog you enter the code segment which is added to all the rendering results for this device Entering a login page replaces the device s default login page Likewise entering an error page replaces the default error page for the device Click Finish to complete the device Managing Foundation Services 7 9 Managing Devices Figure 7 6 Entering the Device Result Prolog Login and Error Pages Devices Transform lt gt C Previous Messaging Voice Grammar Java Profile Device Code Segment Device Code Segment Device Result Prolog
211. e parameters as follows Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 89 m Commerce Applications http myserver com 9080 modules commerce payment jsp IPaymentProcess js p MERCHANTID bookstore amp MERCHANTPW welcome amp TRXID 1234 amp CURRENC Y USD amp AMOUNT 100 Secure Capture In order to use the secure mode for the capture URL you must first ensure that there is HTTPS access to the server The HTTPS URL for the secure capture of a previously authorized transaction is as follows https myserver com 443 modules commerce payment jsp IPaymentProcess js p MERCHANT ID lt merchant ID gt amp MERCHANTPW lt merchant PWD gt amp TRXID lt transactionID gt amp CURRENCY lt currency gt amp AMOUNT lt amount gt Note Merchants must have an Oracle Application Server Wireless account to use the capture URL 8 5 3 Wallet Application The Wallet application enables users to manage their profile from mobile devices as well as participate in commerce transactions and track their activity The Wallet application securely stores user s payment instrument information such as credit cards bank accounts and shipping addresses Upon user approval other m Commerce applications can retrieve this information to process payments The Oracle Application Server Wireless administrator can configure the Credit Cards Bank Accounts and Extended Information compartments at any time even if they contain values
212. e site You access these views and the functions they provide through the three subtabs of the System Manager Home Site Performance and Site Administration Table 3 1 Managing the Wireless Server 3 1 Overview describes these tab and their functions Figure 3 1 depicts a partial view of the System Manager s Home page which appears by default when you access the tool Table 3 1 The Service Manager Tabs Tab Description Home Provides a view of the Wireless Server The status processes performance data and system logging are for the current middle tier of the Wireless server The only non server specific function is the Basic Site Configuration link which enables minimal configuration required for the Wireless Site after the Wireless Server is first installed Site Performance The performance data of the Site Site Administration From this page you can configure the entire Site such as the JDBC connection pool system logging mainly log level locale and URLs as well as configuration specific to site components In addition this page includes utilities for uploading and downloading repository objects and for refreshing the WebCache The Figure 3 1 The System Manager Partial View E Farm gt Application Server m15mid dsunran22 us oracle com gt Wireless Wireless Page Refreshed Aug 29 2003 2 07 45 PM Home Site Performance Site Administration General Response and
213. e the target application Wireless Async supports includes email addresses and SMS phone numbers Service short name A site wide unique name that identifies a Wireless service Device users send messages to the site address with service short names in the Wireless Gateway Configuration 9 19 Configuring Wireless for Async Enabled Applications message body to invoke the corresponding service For example a message is sent to site address ask oraclemobile com with the short name stk This invokes the stock service built on top of Wireless assuming a Wireless service was given the short name stk and ask oraclemobile com was designated as a site address for messaging devices to access Wireless services Messaging Server Built on top of the Wireless Messaging System Async can support multiple transport protocols To enable Async you must configure the messaging capability of a particular network and a messaging driver supporting such a protocol with two way capability for the underlying Messaging Server See the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide for more information on Async features 9 3 1 Configuring Email based Two Way Pager Access To configure email based access 1 2 Select one or more site addresses as the Async email entry points to the site Add the site addresses onto the Wireless system For more information see Section 3 3 1 The designated site addresses should be configured on the u
214. e this account They cannot however personalize applications From that point the user can access public unsecure applications or can explicitely log in to the secure applications which are assigned to that user The unauthenticated user can execute HTTP Adapter based public applications which point to an SSO based partner application such as Oracle Portal The partner application may complete the SSO based user authentication Figure 11 3 illustrates the authentication sequence Figure 11 3 Authenticating by Requesting a Partner Application Wireless and Voice Oracle Partner Browser Portal Application 9854 Single Sign On Server 11 6 Administrator s Guide Wireless Single Sign On The authentication sequence as depicted in Figure 11 3 is as follows 1 An unauthenticated user requests a partner application 2 The Wireless and Voice Portal sends the request to the partner application using an HTTP adapter situated on its back end 3 If the URL requested is protected then the partner application issues an HTTP redirect to the SSO server 4 The Wireless and Voice Portal follows the redirected URL 5 The SSO server looks for the encrypted SSO cookie which is set in the Wireless and Voice Portal browser If the cookie is present then the server uses it to identify the user The server then sends the SSO redirect form Step 9 If the cookie is not present then the server sends the mobile XML login fo
215. e white spaces special characters are encoded The state or federal region of the WORK address of this contact Restriction the white spaces special characters are encoded The ZIP or postal code of the work address for this contact The country of the work address of this contact The first or only street line of the home address of this contact Restriction the white spaces special characters are encoded The city of the home address of the person in the contact The state or federal region of the home address of the person in this contact The ZIP or postal code of this contact The country of the home address of this contact Text notes describing the person this contact Restriction the white spaces and special characters are encoded A city for example WADDRCITY Boston A state or federal region for example WADDRSTATE CA WADDRSTATE Massachusetts A ZIP or postal code For example WADDRZIP 02142 WADDRZIP D 80333 The name of a country for example WADDRCOUNTRY U S A The first line of a street address for example HADDRLINE1 2901 Armstrong Dr The name of a city for example HADDRCITY San Francisco The full name or abbreviation of the state For example HADDRSTATE California HADDRSTATE CA The ZIP or postal code For example HADDRZIP 90210 HADDRZIP D 80333 A name of a country for example HADDRCOUNTRY USS A A short description of the pers
216. eate User Screen Parameter Value Remember my last location Allow other applications to access my identification Allow other applications to access my location Groups Roles This check box enables Wireless to ascertain the user s current location using the signal from the user s mobile device and to cache the user s current location Wireless sends the user content specific to the current location Caching the location can improve server performance This check box enables the user identity to be disclosed to a third party application This check box enables the user s location be reported to a third party application The groups to which you can assign the user Using the arrow keys you can select gt or gt gt or remove lt or lt lt a user from a group The Content Manager creates groups and assigns applications to them For more information see Section 5 4 in Chapter 5 Managing Content The roles to which you can assign a user Using the arrow keys you can select gt or gt gt or remove lt or lt lt a user from a role If you do not select a role then the user has end user privileges and cannot access any Wireless tool A User Manager user can only create other User Manager users or end users Note Users assigned the User Manager role only that is a user without the Super User privileges can only assign the User Manager role To create a new user you fi
217. ections for Single Sign On OID and other connections The default number of connections may not suffice for a high number of users You should therefore increase this number as users increase You can increase this number by modifying the relevant files in the database 13 8 Optimizing WebCache The WebCache capacity should be set to a high value depending upon the load For example if you are hitting 50 requests per second then you must set the capacity to 1000 Also depending upon the size of the documents to be cached the WebCache should be allotted space as appropriate 13 10 Administrator s Guide Optimizing J VM Performance 13 9 Optimizing JVM Performance Java applications run within the context of the JVM Hence it is important to change certain default properties of JVM to run a particular application faster and consume fewer resources Since Garbage Collection GC is not a parallel process until the release of Java 1 3 1 it can become the most important performance bottleneck as the number of CPU s increase Java 1 3 1 implements the concept of generational garbage collections It is based on the observation that young objects die fast Hence objects are put in different memory pools based on their age As a result there are two different GC cycles that run Minor Collection and Major Collection Minor Collection The Collection of young objects from the young generation pool and the copying of surviving obje
218. ectory Security tab Figure 17 14 click Edit under Anonymous access and authentication control 3 Inthe Authentication Methods window Figure 17 15 do not select Anonymous access 4 Select Basic authentication Integrating Wireless Notification with Microsoft Exchange 17 17 Exchange Notification Administration in Oracle Application Server Wireless Figure 17 15 Authentication Methods Authentication Methods J x Anonymous access No user name password required to access this resource Account used for anonymous access Edit m Authenticated access For the following authentication methods user name and password are required when anonymous access is disabled or access is restricted using NTFS access control lists IV Basic authentication password is sent in clear text Select a default domain J Digest authentication for Windows domain servers JV Integrated Windows authentication OK Cancel Help 5 Click OK The Exchange Server is configured for wireless notification 17 4 Exchange Notification Administration in Oracle Application Server Wireless Web based user interfaces are used to create delete and modify a user s notification settings Underlying the notification setting interface are generic notification setting APIs that use mail system accessing adapters to enable notification for specific users in the Microsoft Exchange mail system Another p
219. ed only when the Mail application is configured to connect to the OID to retrieve Inbox Filters a Valid Values thin oci a Default Value thin Deleted messages folder name The name of the folder where the deleted messages are saved a Valid Values Any valid folder on the mail server a Default Value empty Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 51 PIM and Mail a Examples DeletedItems Wastebasket a Save the contents of the audio reply Whether the contents of the audio reply should be saved in the Sent folder a Valid Values A boolean value true false a Default Value true a Email Notification Engine Backend The Email Notification Engine in use such as Oracle UM Exchange or None a Valid Values None OracleUM for Oracle Collaboration Suite Exchange for Microsoft Exchange Server a Default Value None a Application Setup OMP URL The OMP URL of the Application Setup application a Valid Values The OMP URL for the Application Setup a Default Value omp oracle applications appsetup a Examples omp oracle applications appsetup omp oracle applications myappsetup 8 3 7 2 Linking to the Mail Application You can link to an email application using the following virtual URL omp oracle services pim mail Input Call Parameters The input call parameters of the Mail application include the following action The action that the Mail application should perform This is a mandatory input paramete
220. egration 16 1 Overview This chapter describes integrating Wireless with the Oracle Application Server components Oracle Internet Directory OID WebCache and OracleAS Portal In this release user information is stored centrally in OID The SSO Single Sign On server uses an OID repository to authenticate users Table 16 1 describes the attribute mapping between PanamaUser stored in Oracle Application Server Wireless repository and orclUserV2 user attributes stored in OID Table 16 1 Attribute Mapping between PanamaUser and orclUserV2 user PanamaUser OID User Name orclcommonnicknameattribute by default cn specified in OID configuration DisplayName DisplayName Enabled orclIsEnabled PasswordHint orclPasswordHint PasswordHintAnswer orclPasswordHintAnswer Integrating Wireless with Other Components 16 1 Overview Table 16 1 Attribute Mapping between PanamaUser and orclUserV2 user PanamaUser OID User Language and Country preferredLanguage TimeZone DateofBirth Globaluid Password Password Confirm Gender TimeZone orclDateOfBirth orclguid the orclguid attribute uniquely identifies OID Users user password Confirms user password orcl header Administrators use tools such as Delegated Administrative Services DAS to create anew User in OID or to modify attributes of an existing user Alternatively Wireless customers can implement their own user administrator tool to create modify or de
221. el Server 3 22 monitoring the Notification Engine 3 24 SMS security through SMSC 10 16 SQL Adapter setting init parameters 7 16 setting input parameters 7 24 SQL adapter input parameters 7 24 SSL 3 30 SSO 16 19 global logout 11 8 integration with Oracle9iAS Portal 16 19 SSO Global Logout 11 8 standalone processes adding 3 15 system logging configuring and viewing 3 9 System Manager accessing and logging in 3 3 Index 5 accessing through OEM 3 4 administering the site 3 26 basic site configuration 3 7 configuring Mobile Studio 6 2 Home page 3 5 logging in to the standalone mode 3 3 managing Web Based OC4J applications from the Home page 3 6 monitoring site performance 3 21 process management from Home page 3 6 refreshing the performance data for the Web based OC4J applications 3 6 viewing log files 3 6 views 3 1 T Tasks application configuration parameters 8 57 linking to 8 59 overview 8 57 required software 8 57 time zone configuring 3 31 topics creating 5 33 editing 5 33 topics and alerts searching for 5 28 Transcoder application configuration parameters 8 102 overview 8 102 transformers deleting 7 14 editing 7 13 Translator application linking to 8 106 transport performance 13 4 tuning methods 13 13 U uploading repository objects 3 57 URLs configuring for the Wireless site 3 28 Index 6 defining for standalone mode 3
222. eless to prompt user input Comment For master alerts you can use this column to document the Trigger Parameter Condition Type Value parameter The comment is only used internally This field cannot be edited The output parameter for the alert trigger The condition in relation to the value set by you or the end user which triggers the alert This field cannot be edited The default value for the parameter set using the Service Designer You can override this value using the Content Manager If you specify a default value then the user does not have to enter any information for this trigger value when subscribing to an alert 5 7 3 Editing an Alert Use the editing screen to change or update the parameter values for a selected alert To access the editing screen select an alert in the browsing screen and then click the Edit button From the menu on the editing screen you can select the values that you want to edit such as those for the general parameters the input parameters and the trigger conditions 5 7 4 Deleting Topics and Alerts You can delete a topic or an alert by selecting a topic or an alert from the browsing screen and then by clicking Delete 5 7 5 Moving Alerts The Content Manager enables you to move alerts and topics allowing you to organize the wireless portal in a business context To move alerts select an alert from the browsing screen In the Move Alerts screen drill down to a destination
223. en click RemoveFromGroup Managing Content 5 33 Managing Alerts Deprecated 5 34 Administrator s Guide 6 Administering Mobile Studio This chapter describes the administration for Mobile Studio Sections include a Section 6 1 Overview a Section 6 3 Accessing Mobile Studio Administration a Section 6 4 Managing Locales Section 6 5 Managing Sample Services 6 1 Overview Mobile Studio is the online hosted environment for developing testing and deploying mobile applications for the Wireless platform Mobile Studio also serves as a Web portal supporting the wireless developer community in the enterprise and on the Internet Because Mobile Studio provides a Web based interface for the configuration testing and deployment of wireless applications developers do not need to download or install anything on their workstations they need only a Web browser and access to Mobile Studio Once an application is registered with Mobile Studio developers can test it using any mobile device or simulator including voice and instantly access real time logs to troubleshoot any issues Application providers can easily brand Mobile Studio by customizing its look and feel as well as its content and integrate it with their existing Web site Mobile Studio can serve as both an interactive development tool and as a one stop shop for up to date information and collateral on the Wireless server platform Mobile Studio extends
224. ename gt is the target file that receives the downloaded XML repository For a UNIX system enter updateStyleColor sh D lt filename gt Uploading the Style Color SDU Repository To upload the Style Color SDU Repository 1 Change directory to ORACLE_HOME wireless sample 2 Enter updateStyleColor bat U lt filename gt where lt filename gt is the file containing the Style Color SDU information in the specified XML format that should be uploaded into the database On a UNIX system enter updateStyleColor sh U lt filename gt Modifying the Style Color SDU XML Repository File To modify the Style Color SDU XML repository file 1 Download the file 2 Modify this file by opening it in any text editor The XML file contains three top level elements lt StyleSet gt lt ColorSet gt lt SDUSize gt After making modifications you then upload the file back into the repository Defining a StyleSet The lt StyleSet gt elements help the renderers for a given device render application styles into markup language as described above For example if you want to create a prompt style Prompt and bind the style to the text of the prompt you create a Prompt style in the style repository Managing Foundation Services 7 21 Managing Adapters Each lt StyleSet gt element contains a number of lt Style gt elements Each lt Style gt element contains a name a font face font size font style and font color Table 7 9 des
225. ending the Wallet Structure You can configure the structure of the Wallet so that its contents can be personalized according to usage The Wallet structure is defined in the wallet properties file located under the following directory ORACLE_HOME wireless j2ee applications modules modules web WEB INF classes oracle panama module commerce wallet wallet properties This file contains the definitions for credit cards bank accounts and extended information In addition this file contains the definition of the formats used for each field The format definitions are used for internationalization purposes of the dates 8 100 Administrator s Guide m Commerce Applications Defining a Compartment To define a compartment When defining a compartment 1 Add a reference to this compartment in the compartments key compartments CREDIT_CARD BANK_ACCOUNT ID 2 Add the total number of fields in this new compartment CREDIT_CARD fieldnumber 6 3 Add all the fields for this compartment and add attributes for each field You can add up to six attributes 0 5 The variable is built as follows lt comparment_name gt fieldNN itemNN lt value gt where compartment_name current compartment name i e CREDIT_CARD fieldNN represents the current field starting in 1 i e CREDIT_ CARD fieldl itemNN represents each attribute of this field starting in 0 i e CREDIT_CARD fieldl item0 The attributes are defined
226. ener Performance Section 13 4 Optimizing Data Feeder Performance Section 13 5 Optimizing the Oracle HTTP Server Section 13 6 Optimizing opmn Section 13 7 Optimizing Database Connections Section 13 8 Optimizing WebCache Section 13 9 Optimizing JVM Performance Section 13 10 Tuning Operating System Performance Optimizing Oracle Application Server Wireless 13 1 Transport Performance Monitoring 13 2 Transport Performance Monitoring To view performance statistics of the Transport system select the Site Performance tab and then click Messaging Server The Messaging Server performance screen appears Figure 13 1 Figure 13 1 The Messaging Server Performance Metrics Wireless Server System gt Wireless Server Performance gt Messaging Server Messaging Server Client Side Performance Previous Next No performance data found Server Side Performance Previous Next This screen displays the client side and server side Messaging Server performance metrics For each of the Messaging Server Performance metrics Wireless displays performance data by process name and delivery type for example SMS The client side performance metrics include Average Sending Response Time The average time of a sending method On the client side a sending method is called to send a message This time is the period from when the method is called to the time the method returns When the meth
227. ents that have signature capabilities such as SMIME enabled clients This is currently only possible for PC email clients Wireless Security 10 21 Installing and Configuring Oracle Application Server Wireless Security 10 22 Administrator s Guide 11 Mobile Single Sign On This chapter covers the following topics 11 1 Overview Section 11 1 Overview Section 11 2 Wireless Single Sign On Section 11 3 Wireless Single Sign Off Section 11 4 The Wireless Change Password Page Users access the Oracle Application Server Wireless server using mobile or wireless devices such as personal digital assistants PDAs and cellular phones As in PC based systems the authentication mechanism is Oracle Application Server Single Sign On SSO All 10g 9 0 4 components use SSO for user authentication The Oracle Internet Directory OID is the single point for storing all of the user related information The integration of Oracle products with SSO and OID provides Support for partner applications which take full advantage of the SSO framework as well external applications for support of legacy and third party products Seamless integration with Oracle s middle tier Web portal product Oracle Portal Management of user information in an external directory Integration with SSO technologies for other non Oracle applications Users authenticate only once and can access any SSO partner application Mobile Single Si
228. eparators entered by users when performing queries This parameter applies only to the Async mode a Valid Values Any character a Default Value a Examples Async Query OID If set to true then the search queries performed in the Async mode are also attempted in the OID repository This parameter applies only to the Async mode a Valid Values A boolean value true false Default Value true a Examples true false Async Max Contacts Results Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 11 PIM and Mail This parameter indicates the maximum number of contacts results This parameter applies only to the Async mode a Valid Values Any integer value a Default Value 5 a Examples 5 2 a Async Translate Commands Specifies whether to accept localized Async commands a Valid Values A boolean value true false a Default Value true a Examples true false a Application Setup OMP URL The OMP URL of the Application Setup Modulable Application a Valid Values the OMP URL to the Application Setup a Default Value omp oracle applications appsetup a Examples omp oracle applications appsetup omp oracle applications otherappsetup Note The values set for Async Contact Separator Async Query OID Async Max Contacts Results and Async Translate Commands parameters affect all of the Async enabled mobile applications These values do not affect the Address Book application alone but any Async enabled a
229. equired third party software for this application Table 8 20 Required Software for the Oracle Internet File System Application Name Instructions From Version Any WEBDAV compliant server such as Install the server 2 0 Oracle Files Configuration Parameters The Oracle Internet File System application includes the following configuration parameters a Allow Navigation Whether the user is allowed to navigate to any open service URLs a Valid Values A boolean value true false a Default Value true a Examples false a Service URLs The HTTP URLs to WebDav file systems where users can upload and download files This parameter applies only if Allow Navigation has been set to false a Valid Values The WEBDAV service URLs a Default Value http webdav mycompany com files a Examples http www mywebdavdomain com fileuser a Download Directory Specifies the directory used to hold files for download or attachment The path is local to the server holding the Oracle Internet File System application Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 39 PIM and Mail a Valid Values A path value a Default Value tmp a Examples c temp or tmp var a Proxy Host Enter the HTTP Proxy Host a Valid Values URLs a Default Value a Examples proxy mydomain com a Proxy Port Enter the HTTP Proxy Port a Valid Values A port number a Default Value Examples 80 a Authorization Realms The HTTP authorization
230. er which you configure enables the download You can add new drivers or implement the customized functions of the existing drivers Note Wireless supports only J2ME application for this release Hooks The actual upload and download processes can be monitored using hooks which customers implement The hooks are initialized using a singleton pattern The hook method is given the user information the application information and the content information The hook implementation must provide a method such as public static lt hookclass gt getInstance In the Provisioning Server page you define the class names for the pre download hook the post download hook and the deliverable content event listener Pre Download Hook Class Name This hook is invoked just before the user downloads the application The hooks are initialized using a singleton pattern The return code of the hook determines if the download can proceed The interface to be implemented is oracle panama rt hook ProvisioningPreDownloadHook Managing the Wireless Server 3 53 Site Administration 3 6 3 Utilities Post Download Hook Class Name This hook is invoked once just after the user downloads the application and once after the user s device notifies the server of the application download The provider can embed the billing action in either of these two invocations as appropriate The interface to be implemented is oracle panama rt hook Provis
231. er and the business Unfortunately there are currently no SIM card vendors that offer PKI encryption capabilities only signature capabilities as there is no standardized way for key generation and certificate provisioning for SMS 10 4 2 4 Email Just as in SMS end to end private email communication depends on the deployment scenario Figure 10 7 Email end users POP MAP sener end users SMTP a Oracle Application Server content provider content seer Transport client POP provider MAP SMTP i server 10 18 Administrator s Guide Installing and Configuring Oracle Application Server Wireless Security Depending on such factors as the capabilities of the email device and the location of the end user email server in respect to the application server several alternative solutions exist No Transport Security Needed In this deployment scenario an end user s email server and the application server both reside within the carrier s secure domain Since email communication never leaves the secure domain that is the only direction of communication is from within the carrier to the device there is no need to additionally secure the communication beyond the security provided by the wireless network protocol in the air The disadvantage of this solution is that it applies only to carriers that offer at the same time both email and application services to their subscribers Point t
232. eral orders of magnitude longer than the session expiration time The default lifetime for a persistent session is two days Setting this flag enables a persistent session The default is false For mor e information on the runtime see the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide Defining the parameters in the Object Cache Synchronization section of the page enables you to configure the thread pool which handles the cache synchronization for messages To configure the object cache synchronization you define the following parameters a Minimum number of threads in the thread pool a Maximum number of threads in the thread pool m Tim 3 38 Administrator s Guide eout in minutes for the threads in the thread pool Site Administration Device The Device Configuration page enables you to add edit or delete HTTP header names that contain information for the device ID You can also configure the Multi Channel Server setup menu with the following attributes Enable Login Enable Logout Enable User Info Enable Service Customization Enable Global Preset Enable User Profile Enable Self Registration Enable Home Enable Help You must enter the URL of the help files if you select Enable Help Folder On Folder page you configure the folder sorting order and display by 1 Selecting the sorting order for applications and folders on the output devices by using the arrows to select gt or
233. ere are subscriptions to the notification event handler notification application The notification event collector and notification event handler are two separate processes Both of them must be running at the same time for the system to process application event notifications 16 4 1 Integrating Wireless with Oracle Workflow Oracle Workflow integration includes two components a notification service which receives notifications from the Oracle Workflow Notification queues and sends them to the user s mobile device and an Oracle Workflow Notification Worklist service which can be accessed through the Wireless portal Since Oracle Workflow and Wireless are both components of Oracle Application Server Wireless has the ability to connect to Oracle Workflow through OID And since Wireless connects to Oracle Workflow through OID they share the same user repository 16 4 1 1 Notification Service Oracle Workflow provides a queue which contains all of the outgoing notifications for that particular instance Each message in the queue contains all of the necessary information for the notification and for the user to which it is sent Wireless dequeues these messages and uses XMS to construct a message to be sent to the end user The user can then respond to this notification The response is directed to a 16 22 Administrator s Guide Notification Engine Integration Wireless service which will then update Oracle Workflow according to
234. erefore this solution is best applied to corporate wireless applications End to end data privacy over email can also be enabled with PKI which would allow for secure email communication between parties that do not have a pre existing relationship Email privacy is carried out in the wired world with the use of S MIME and PGP a hybrid of symmetric and PKI based encryption algorithms Although S MIME is supported in PC email browsers such as Outlook or Netscape it is not supported by current Palm email applications and RIM Blackberries Wireless Security 10 19 Installing and Configuring Oracle Application Server Wireless Security 10 4 2 5 Voice Voice communication over regular wired or wireless phone lines is not end to end secure in general In fact governments such as that of the United States have taken steps through laws such as the Digital Telephony Bill or the Digital Wiretap Law to facilitate the wiretap of phone communication systems Figure 10 8 Voice voice line Wireless voice line Despite these non technical issues voice line security can be implemented in the data network thus discouraging eavesdroppers on a digital network The following secure solutions are available in the voice channel 1 No Transport Security Needed As in SMS and Email this deployment scenario depicts both the voice gateway and the application server residing within the same trusted domain Since no data passes thro
235. erifying the Wireless Installation 2 1 Starting the Oracle Application Server Wireless Server Note The default ports are 1810 and 1811 The port number range is 1812 to 1820 To ensure that you are using the correct port number check the port number for Oracle Application Server Wireless stored in Oracle home install portlist ini For more information on port usage see the Oracle Application Server Installation Guide and the Oracle Application Server Administrator s Guide 2 Enter the administrator user name and password The Oracle Enterprise Manager Home Page appears Figure 2 1 Figure 2 1 The OracleAS Enterprise Manager Home Page Partial View rr _ _ S _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ Application Server bi_r101116 dsunrdf08 us oracle com Application Server bi_r101116 dsunrdf08 us oracle com Home J2EE Applications Ports Infrastructure Page Refreshed May 7 2003 2 52 27 PM B CPU Usage Memory Usage Status Partially Up Host dsunrd8 us oracle com Oracle Home private mhlim vohtest frank second bi_r101 Farm Infrastructure database is unavailable General System Components Enable Disable Components Configure Component Create OC4J Instance Stop Delete OC4J Instance Select All Select None home HTTP Server OC4J Demos OCAJ Wireless Portal portal Single Sign On orasso 3 From the System Comp
236. erver Wireless 10 2 Resources Protected by Oracle Application Server Wireless The Oracle Application Server Wireless meta data repository does not store any sensitive information Instead information such as the user passwords voice accessed PINs and the password to the Oracle Application Server Wireless meta data schema are stored in Oracle OID Sensitive resources such as the Wireless Tools are protected through access controls and various authentication mechanisms such as user names and passwords Service access is also protected the user names and passwords 10 2 1 Authorization and Access Enforcement Access to the Wireless tools is controlled through user roles which not only provide access to the tools but define the capabilities of the Wireless user as well Table 10 1 describes the user roles their capabilities and the resources that these roles enable 10 6 Administrator s Guide Resources Protected by Oracle Application Server Wireless Table 10 1 Wireless User Roles User Role Description Available Tools Application Users assigned the Application Developer role perform Service Manager Developer the following functions Create modify delete and test applications a Publish applications to the Application Developer s folder Create modify and delete notifications Create modify and delete data feeders a Register and delete J2ME Web services Develop preset definitions Foundation
237. es clients to be locked out a high number of servers consumes more resources 13 5 2 MaxRequestsPerChild The number of requests that a child process handles before it expires and gets re spawned The default value 0 means that it will never expire As as result you should limit this value Ideally 10000 is sufficient 13 5 3 MaxSpareServers This is the maximum number of pre spawned processes that are available in the pool of the Apache process that handles connections The suggested value may vary as 10 will suffice for most requirements Optimizing Oracle Application Server Wireless 13 9 Optimizing opmn 13 5 4 MinSpareServers This is the minimum number of child processes that need to be pre spawned all the time The value 5 will suffice for most requirements 13 5 5 Start Servers The number of servers to start initially If a sudden load is expected on startup then this value should be increased 13 5 6 Timeout The number of seconds before incoming receives and outgoing sends the time out The recommended value is 300 seconds 13 6 Optimizing opmn Because the default file descriptor number per JVM is low you should increase this number to a higher value The number must be increased inside the following script SORACLE_HOME opmn bin opmnct1 This can be done by adding or modifying the following line gt ulimit n 2048 13 7 Optimizing Database Connections Oracle Application Server uses database conn
238. es the maximum number of locations kept in the user s Location History a Valid Values non negative integer a Default Value 72 a Examples 72 a Records per page Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 69 Location This parameter applies to WML devices only it specifies the number of business categories and result items shown per WML card a Valid Values A non negative integer a Default Value 9 a Examples 9 a Cat Speech Library Code The concatenated speech library code for professional audio recordings a Valid Values string value a Default Value Location Picker 8 4 3 3 Linking to the Location Picker Application You link to the Location Picker application using the following virtual URL omp oracle services location picker Invocation Interface Input Parameters The Location Picker application includes the following input call parameters a LOCATIONTITLE n Description The name of the location to be specified This page displays throughout the Location Picker application as the title a Valid Value A String For example LOCATIONTITLE Map LOCATIONTITLE Destination Location a LOCATIONQUALITY Mandatory No n Description The quality of the location to be specified This will be used to check if the specified location meets the required quality a Valid Values 1 Address quality 2 Street quality 3 Intersection quality 8 70 Administrator s Guide Location
239. es the value of the HTTP header OssoUser_Guid to identify the mod_osso authenticated user Note When executing HTTP Adapter based applications pointing to external partner applications the mod_ sso authenticated user must be authenticated again because the SSO cookies are stored in the PC browser for these users 11 2 4 Authenticating through Voice Voice authentication is accomplished by Oracle Application Server Wireless locally using the account number and the PIN of the user Note An authenticated user accessing external SSO partner applications from a voice device must re authenticate using username and password 11 3 Wireless Single Sign Off Oracle Application Server Wireless server participates in SSO global logout for sign off The following steps detail the interactions between Wireless the SSO Server and Partner Applications 11 3 1 Logging Out from Oracle Application Server Wireless The user clicks Wireless Logout to sign off 1 The user sends a an Wireless Logout request identified by URL parameter PAlogoff true 2 The Sign Off implementation of Wireless sends an HTTP request to the SSO Sign Off URL 3 The SSO server returns the Wireless XML global logout page and a special HTTP header X Oracle SSO logout with value true The global logout page contains one image for each partner application that has the user session 11 8 Administrator s Guide The Wireless Change Password
240. esanes 4 5 Using the User Maria ger srs cs ccc tosses ai e a e E a 4 6 User Overvie Wenna aeiae ob cody na a ae deies oes oaia hennen abao ek eA 4 6 Searching for Usetsnocriereris o oea e E E R R E E E 4 7 Finding Users with Quick SearchsisesssrsrSinisiiiaa knh a 4 8 Creatine USerSi imoir ptr tak e a a e aa aaee E IE ERE Ea E 4 9 Editing User Profiles niesiesssnsssnmin narinaa a i 4 13 Resetting the Password iinei esii a a a S E eie 4 14 Deleting a User sssini e e E S a R E E E E 4 15 Viewing Application Links ssssssssesssessssressessessessessesnetinressesnentensisnienennneniesrenenssenteseenet 4 15 Viewing Deyice Se teiiaiseiie ni souti aiaee iae E E ia E aa Ea a E S E Ea LE EE ite 4 16 Viewing Log sSiosenanisi eanu ish dea a n a N neath deans eee 4 17 Selecting a Time Frame ipea Sst satin bates tees aE a aa a Pe E EA 4 20 Managing Content 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 3 1 5 3 2 5 3 3 5 3 4 5 3 5 5 3 6 5 3 7 5 3 8 5 3 9 5 3 10 5 4 5 4 1 5 4 2 5 5 5 5 1 5 5 2 5 6 5 6 1 5 6 2 5 6 3 5 7 5 7 1 5 7 2 5 7 3 5 7 4 5 7 5 5 7 6 5 7 7 5 7 8 5 7 9 Overview of the Content Manage cccccc cece ee cceeseececessnesesssssenesesssssesesesesesenees 5 1 Accessing the Content Managet cccccccccsecsccseseeesssescssessssssnssesssssssseesesssesseesesessessiees 5 3 Managing Application Links c ccc ce ceeseececscssseseecscesessnssessseneseseseseeseseseeseeees 5 4 Searching for Repository Objects cee ceseeees ee sess
241. escribes the parameters of the messaging server client Table 3 14 Parameters of the Messaging Server Client Parameter Value Thread Pool Size Number of Queues Recipient Chunk Size 3 46 Administrator s Guide The total number of threads created by the transport for this client The transport uses these threads to retrieve received messages and status reports for this client The transport ignores this setting if the client neither receives status reports nor has any registered end points at which to receive messages The number of queues The transport creates this value only if this client receives status reports or messages The transport supports only one queue per client the transport creates only one queue per client even if you specify more than one queue per client The number set at the site level configuration is the default value if you do nor specify any value here The transport ignores this setting if the client neither receives status reports nor has any registered end points at which to receive messages The number of recipients that receive messages in one send call by the client If the number of recipients is too big then the transport may send recipients messages on a chunk by chunk basis In such cases some may receive messages while the transport processes other recipients As a result some recipients get messages earlier than others Sending messages chunk by chunk can improve performance The chunk s
242. eseseeeseseseeeeeneeeteseees 9 21 9 4 1 Configuring Wireless for Messaging cccccccsceee ee ceeeseeessesseeeseecesesseesesenssesees 9 21 9 4 2 Oracle hosted Messaging Delivery cece cece sssssseenesenessssenesseesesees 9 21 9 4 3 Non Oracle hosted Messaging Delivery cccccececceeesssessesesenssssseenesenensseeeees 9 22 Wireless Security 10 1 ODVIOL VIC W oirirc erion naa avl doen A a e et E aeee a i ai 10 1 10 1 1 Wireless Security and Wired Security A Comparison s s sssssssssississsessesisrieseessesses 10 3 10 1 2 Classes of Users and Their Privileges se sssssesssesrsstessisstssessersisresnesnenriesesnesneess 10 5 10 2 Resources Protected by Oracle Application Server Wireless eee cesses 10 6 10 2 1 Authorization and Access Enforcement cccccsessesseesessccscescecsecssessecssesaseesesseeeees 10 6 10 2 2 Authentication Through User Names and Passwords cccccsseeeeseeeeeeeees 10 9 10 2 3 Device Based Authentication Mechanisms ccccccccesssssseeseescessecsessececsseesesseenees 10 9 10 2 4 How Oracle Application Server Wireless Leverages AS Security Services 10 10 10 2 5 Component Extensibility and Security cccc cc cece sees ceceeeeseee cesses sensseeeeees 10 11 10 3 Configuring the Security Infrastructure to Support Wireless 10 11 10 4 Installing and Configuring Oracle Application Server Wireless Security 10 13 10 4 1 Communication Data Privacy cccccccessseeseses
243. ess by a user that has access to all of the users mailboxes You must create a user and give this user full access to the entire exchange store To create this user 1 2 3 Logon as Administrator to the Exchange domain Click the Windows Start button From the Programs menu select Microsoft Exchange and then select Active Directory Users and Computers Create a user in the correct domain Make sure to add the user to the Exchange Domain Servers group The name of the system account can be any valid user name for example notificationreg Integrating Wireless Notification with Microsoft Exchange 17 3 Configuring the Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server To give the user full access to the Exchange Mailbox Store 1 Click the Windows Start button 2 From the Programs menu select Microsoft Exchange and then System Manager 3 Inthe System Manager dialog box Figure 17 1 expand the Servers category and then select First Storage Group 4 Select Mailbox Store under the correct Exchange Server name Figure 17 1 Exchange System Manager fa Exchange System Manager iol x Console window Help 16 J Action view e gt ilm X FH e Tree First Storage Group oracle wireless Exchange 7 Global Settings Mailbox Store HYAN PC Recipients g Public Folder Store HYAN PC a Servers HYAN PC Protocols gi First Storage Group B Connectors g Tools A Folder
244. essages Oracle Application Server customers can leverage the Personal Information Management Service applications also known as Collaboration Applications into their own or third party applications to add communication features to these applications to retrieve corporate directory information or to add and manage appointments for users such as travel or dining reservations 8 3 1 Address Book The Address Book enables users to manage their own address books and contacts as well as enabling call functions from wireless phones The mobile address book integrates with the Mail application to allow users to compose a message s recipient list from their address book Once you find a contact you can also edit the contact information or delete a contact While deleting nothing is returned to the caller 8 3 1 1 Configuring the Address Book The Address Book application integrates with various Address Book server such as the Oracle Collaboration Suite the Microsoft Exchange server and the Oracle Calendar server This application also has a preset mode where the address book contacts are stored in the Wireless schema The preset mode requires no third party software Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 7 PIM and Mail Required Software Table 8 1 describes the third party software required for the Address Book Table 8 1 Required Third Party Software for the Address Book Name From Version s Oracle Collaboration Sui
245. esting and deploying wireless applications It enables any developer systems integrator or independent software vendor to quickly develop a mobile application that is immediately accessible from all devices The Online Studio site includes technical papers and a FAQ Visit http studio oraclemobile com Support Visit http www oracle com support xvii xviii Part Overview This section includes the following chapters a Chapter 1 Introducing Oracle Application Server Wireless a Chapter 2 Verifying the Wireless Installation 1 Introducing Oracle Application Server Wireless 1 1 Overview Oracle Application Server Wireless Wireless is the wireless and voice platform of Oracle Application Server OracleAS which enables enterprises to realize their mobile strategy through the development and deployment of wireless browsing applications voice applications asynchronous applications J2ME applications and notifications Wireless is also the voice and wireless platform for the mobile extensions of the Oracle E Business Suite the wireless and voice components of the Oracle Collaboration Suite and the foundation for custom and partner wireless and voice solutions Through the Oracle Application Server Wireless platform devices can use any protocol to receive and deliver requests as well as and deliver content to any device The request types handled by Wireless include HTTP a Async Messaging
246. et and Intranet a Devices with built in wireless Internet access Palm Net ready Palm i705 a Devices that require an Internet Service Provider ISP account and data enabled phone or modem to access the Internet Palm m515 Palm m505 Palm m500 Palm m130 Palm m125 9 2 Administrator s Guide Configuring Wireless for Browser Based Applications If you have a device with built in wireless Internet access then you need only to activate your wireless service to connect your device to the Internet Refer to http www palm com products palmi705 wireless html for more information about Wireless Connectivity with Palm Net Service If your device does not have built in Internet access then you need an ISP account and either a data enabled phone or a Palm modem You can use a data enabled phone or a Palm modem with Palm i705 as well 9 1 2 1 Configuring the Connection Method To configure the connection method 1 Open Preferences by clicking the Press icon 2 Select Connection 3 Select the connection method from the list of Available Connections 9 1 2 2 Configuring an ISP Account To configure the ISP account 1 Open Preferences by clicking the Press icon Select Network Select the Service value from the drop down list Enter your user name Enter your password Select the connection type from the drop down list Enter the phone number SO NO OE Be gt LN Click the Connect button to test the settings
247. etely observed by unintended parties or eavesdroppers Along with authentication communication data privacy is one of the most important aspects of wireless application security This section focuses on end to end data privacy where no intermediate nodes or actors are able to understand the data that passes through them For example the wireless carrier s WAP gateway should not be able to understand the sensitive information even when all the data passes through it End to end data privacy stands in contrast to point to point or leg based data privacy where data is secured between servers and devices but intermediate nodes can see the data in the clear 10 4 2 Data Privacy Deployment Solutions Given the variety of wireless networks and protocols communication data privacy differs among the various communication channels The following sections describe communication data privacy deployment solutions based on the communication channels Wireless Security 10 13 Installing and Configuring Oracle Application Server Wireless Security a Section 10 4 2 1 PC Browsers a Section 10 4 2 2 Pocket PCs a Section 10 4 2 3 Short Messaging Service a Section 10 4 2 4 Email a Section 10 4 2 5 Voice 10 4 2 1 PC Browsers Internet Protocol Web communication is currently used today in the wired world with standardized security through SSL encryption PCs connect to the application server directly with point to point priva
248. eveloper created applications a Create notifications based on alerts deprecated in this release Create application categories and associate access points with them Create a user home folder rendering scheme such as setting the sorting order for applications Managing Users 4 3 Overview Table 4 1 Wireless User Roles User Role Description Available Tools System Users assigned the System role centrally manage and The System Manager Administrator configure Wireless accessed through the Oracle User Manager End User Users assigned the User Manager role perform the following functions Manage users by providing such Help Desk functions as editing a user profile resetting passwords and PINs and creating or deleting users Manage user access privileges a View application links assigned to users Manage user devices a Search for users a View overview information of users Users assigned the end user role are the consumers of Wireless applications End users create their own accounts when they register with Wireless using the Wireless Customization End users can also customize their own services either from a desktop or from a device Customization for end users includes Customize applications download J2ME applications subscribe to notifications Manage devices Manage location marks and location settings n Manage contact rules Mobile studio users also have t
249. exMc Move gt gt A Move All Ww User Agent Remove Remove y All WVIG Borwser Add User agent s for locating device Unique across all devices Move item s to the selected list Available Selected PTG mxm ASYNC_JAVA mxml Motorola mxml Verascape mxml YoiceGenie mxml YoiceXML mxml avantga eo fa Step 3 Setting Device Capabilities Device capabilities are categorized into several groups including general device attributes media type display text input browser attributes messaging attributes voice grammar attributes and J2ME attributes Figure 7 5 Wireless examines the values for the device capabilities during the runtime when the wireless server renders the device oriented markup languages provisions J2ME applications or sends device oriented messages For the detailed explanation of the syntax and semantics of device capabilities refer to the discussion of device network adaptation included in the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide Although the device creation wizard provides separate screens for the device capabilities none of these related parameters are required you can successfully complete a device if you do not define any of these parameters To help you enter the values for the device capabilities parameters the Device Capabilities screens include in line help as hints under each of the inputting fields You can also refer to the onlin
250. f the master alert service which generates this alert message The name of the subscriber to receive this alert message The device address this alert message is delivered to Activity Logging Overview Table 12 3 Notification Engine Activity Log Column Name Description device_oid device_type message_id message_length message_status dispatch_time error_description The device address object identifier The type of the device The message id generated by the message gateway for this alert message The length of this alert message The dispatch status of this alert message The time stamp of this alert message being dispatched to the message gateway The error message if there was an error while dispatching this alert message ASYNC_STATISTICS_LOG Table 12 4 Async Listener Activity Log Column Name Description host instance_id source_addr dest_addr delivery_type encoding Name of the host where the Async server is running The unique id to identify an instance of the Async server The source address of the received message The destination address of the received message The network delivery type of the message The possible values are a WAP Push a SMS a Voice a Email a Fax a Two Way Pager One way Pager The character encoding for the message Activity Logging 12 5 Activity Logging Overview Table 12 4 Async Listener Activity Log Column
251. f the users matching the selected link For example clicking 2 next to Application Developers in Figure 4 1 invokes the Users Search Results page illustrated in Figure 4 2 which displays the two Wireless users who are assigned the Application Developer role Figure 4 2 The User Search Results Page Search User By User Name x Matches z Advanced Search You may use asterisks as wildcards in your search You are logged in as orcladmin User Search Results View Application Links View Devices Edit Reset Password Guests Users Superuser Application Developer Content Manager User Manager System Administrator Foundation Developer i 1 C Test User Manager Application Developer 4 4 Searching for Users Both the Overview and Users subtabs contain a Quick Search area in which you construct the criteria for finding current Wireless users by specifying the user s name display name phone number or email address You can further enhance your search by using the options accessed through the Advanced Search link which enable you to find a user by user group user role and user type Elements Search User Result Screen Managing Users 4 7 Searching for Users Table 4 2 Elements of the Search User Result Screen Label Definition User Name The name of the user Display Name The display name of the user Groups Assigned The group to which the user has been assigned Role
252. for a Device Basic Transformer General Device Features Browser Mes Basic Name TestDevice Name of the device Description A sample device Description of the device Manufacturer Manufacturer of the device Select an item from the list or add a new one Model 12345x Model of the device Step 2 Setting the Transformers Clicking Next in the Basic Info screen invokes the Transformer screen Figure 7 4 Using this screen you add the transformers and all of the appropriate user agents to the device To add user agents enter the user agents supported by the device and then click Add Continue until you have added all possible user agents for the device You then select the user agents supported by the device by using the Move or Move All functions gt and gt gt to transfer the user agents from the Available pane to the Selected pane To select transformers for the device use the Move or Move All functions gt and gt gt to shuttle the transformers from the Available List pane to the Selected List pane Click Next after you have selected the user agents and transformers to continue to the next step of the wizard where you device capabilities Click Finish to complete the device Managing Foundation Services 7 7 Managing Devices Figure 7 4 Selecting User Agents and Transformers Basic Transformer General Device Features Browser Messaging Transformer Available Selected IBMvoic
253. for the Messaging component Drivers The Drivers page invoked by clicking the Drivers link under Messaging Server in the Site Administration page enables you to define a driver and its parameters Table 3 15 lists the current drivers Table 3 15 Driver Parameters Parameter Description Name The name of the driver Class Name The class name with the full package name that implements the driver Delivery Categories The delivery category or categories of this driver such as SMS Voice or Email Enabled Indicates that the driver has been enabled From this page you can delete edit or create a messaging server drivers for the site To create a new messaging server driver you first click Add Driver and then define parameters listed in Table 3 16 in the Add Driver page 3 48 Administrator s Guide Site Administration Table 3 16 Messaging Driver Parameters Attribute Description Driver Name Delivery Categories Enabled Protocols Carriers Speed Level Cost Level Capability Supported Encoding Supported Locales Driver Class Name Driver Parameters The unique name of this driver This is a required field The delivery categories of this driver required field It can be one or a combination of the following values SMS EMS MMS USSD Voice Email Fax WAP Push Two Way Pager One Way Pager or IM Selecting this flag enables this driver A comma separated list of protocols Enter an a
254. ft Exchange 17 9 Configuring the Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server Figure 17 7 Set Application Identity Welcome to the COM Application Install Wizard x x Set Application Identity Please specify the application identity m Account The application identity will be set to the following account Components in the application will run under this account If you are creating more than one application this setting will be applied to each application Interactive user the current logged on user This user User HYANDOM1 notificationreg Browse Password eO lt Back Cancel 10 From the Set Application Identity page perform the following a Select This user a Click the Browse button to find and select the system user notificationreg that you created in Section 17 3 1 2 Creating A System User for Registering COM Objects a Enter the correct password 11 Click Next The Thank you window appears 12 Click Finish 17 3 1 5 Adding the DLL Components to the COM Component Next you add the DLL components to the COM application To add the components 1 Expand the application folder and right click the Components folder 2 Select New and the select Component The Welcome window appears 3 Click Next 17 10 Administrator s Guide Configuring the Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server 4 On the Import or Install a Component window Figure 17 8 click the Install new component s butt
255. g directory may be specified using Wireless Management The default log directory is the default temp directory for that operating system typically c temp for windows and var tmp on UNIX In the Maximum Log File Size field enter the maximum number of log file size in bytes Select a log level The log can contain any of the following Warning Error or Notify The default is Warning Error and Notify Click Apply Note The System Log file configuration can be unique to each instance of the server It defaults to the site level configuration if nothing is specified at the instance level 12 8 Administrator s Guide 13 Optimizing Oracle Application Server 13 1 Overview Wireless Oracle Application Server Wireless when installed initializes a default setup that is appropriate for the performance of most applications However you may need to use additional tuning knobs to adjust performance since applications vary in features hardware setup and performance requirements This chapter discusses the tuning options and methods available within Oracle Application Server Wireless and the performance logger utility It also discusses JVM tuning JDBC connection performance and TCP IP stack tuning This chapter discusses factors that enable application developers to optimize the Transport system Sections include Section 13 2 Transport Performance Monitoring Section 13 3 Optimizing the Async List
256. ge such as a country A region can be represented by a point as is often done for addresses and locations of interest such as airports and museums or by a polygon as is usually done for states and countries For detailed information about using the region modeling tool refer to the chapter on Location Services in the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide 7 7 Managing Digital Rights Policies A digital rights policy restricts the execution of J2ME applications on mobile devices Out of the box Wireless provides two types of digital rights management DRM policies that can be used to package J2ME applications Count DRM policy and Interval DRM policy The Count DRM policy restricts the number of times that a downloaded J2ME application can be run on a device The Interval DRM policy sets the period in which Managing Foundation Services 7 25 Managing Digital Rights Policies a downloaded J2ME application can be run on a device from the time the user downloads the application In addition Wireless provides a platform to create a customized digital rights policy All digital rights policies created using the Foundation Manager can be selected from the Content Manager when creating an application link based on a J2ME application For more information see Section 5 3 4 You use the Digital Rights Policy subtab to manage the digital rights policies When you click the Digital Rights Policy subtab the browsing screen f
257. ghts Policies a API Scan Policies The Foundation Manager provides a tab for each of these repository objects Each has a browsing screen which enables you to search for an object as well as access to functions for creating editing deleting and testing Managing Foundation Services 7 3 Managing Devices 7 3 Managing Devices A device is an object in the Wireless repository that represents either a physical device such as a Nokia mobile phone or an abstract device such as email which link Wireless transformers and the runtime device by recognizing the user agent the MIME type and other HTTP headers HTTP headers enable a repository device to map to an actual device Through the repository device the Wireless server determines the appropriate transformer for rendering the device result for a variety of browsers voice gateways or message clients For example if the Wireless server recognizes a device with multi media display capability the XMS center XMSC renders the multi media messages bound for the device in images rather than in plain text Likewise when delivering a J2ME MIDlet application to a user device the J2ME provisioning server delivers a version the MIDlet application which is appropriate to the device For more information on the XMSC see Section 3 6 2 5 The Devices tab enables you to create a device in the repository Clicking this tab invokes the device browsing page Figure 7 1 which displays a list of
258. ging errors This is a server side generated log file For example enter temp error log This is a required field 5 Enter the number of objects uploaded that triggers a commit Entering 0 causes a commit after the utility has completed the upload Note in integrated mode you must be logged into SSO as a valid user with the Superuser s role before you can upload objects successfully 3 58 Administrator s Guide Site Administration Figure 3 18 The Repository Objects Upload Screen In Standalone Mode System gt Wireless Server Administration gt Repository Objects Upload Repository Objects Upload Cancel Upload Password Upload File sample jsp Browse Upload Log File ftemp activity log This is the file path on the upload server Error Log File ternp error log This is the file path on the upload server Number of Objects per Commit 0 Use 0 to commit at the end 3 6 3 3 WebCache Refresh for Master Applications This utility enables you to explicitly purge the pages of a selected master application cached in WebCache For example you use this utility if you wish to clear stale content from a master application at a time other than the one set programmatically using the Service Manager To purge and refresh the pages for a selected master application select the master application and click the Refresh Content button 3 6 3 4 WebCache Refresh for Devices Using this utility you c
259. gn On 11 1 Wireless Single Sign On Selecting the Wireless option when installing Oracle Application Server results in the automatic registration of the Wireless and Voice Portal gateway for mobile devices with the SSO server 11 1 1 Oracle Application Server Wireless Concepts and Architecture Wireless products communicate with Oracle Application Server using either wireless markup language WML or HTML Cellular phones use WML PDAs use HTML Because these devices request URLs using Wireless Access Protocol WAP and other non HTTP protocols hardware gateways must be used to convert messages to HTTP and back again The heart of Wireless is the Wireless and Voice Portal It serves as a browser for interactions between the wireless device and the SSO server and for interactions between the wireless device and Oracle applications The Wireless and Voice Portal server performs the following functions a It authenticates the user directly to the SSO server Itserves private pages of its own a Itserves as a proxy browser for external SSO protected applications by passing requests to these applications which then perform SSO authentication a It converts Oracle Application Server Wireless XML to the appropriate device markup language either WML or HTML In the Wireless and Voice Portal framework external applications are partner applications that are integrated with the Oracle Application Server SSO Software Development Kit SDK
260. group specifies such information about the downloaded file as the size of the downloaded file its location and its original name Table 8 23 describes the parameters of the downloadIFsInfo group 8 42 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail Table 8 23 Parameters of the IFsinfo Group Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value IFSPATH Yes The absolute path of the A string for example downloaded file a IFSPATH private joe download file doc a IFSPATH C TEMP RESUME PDF IFSORIGPATH Yes The original IFS path of A string for example the downloaded fle IFSORIGPATH ifshome joe file doc IFSNAME Yes The original name of the A string for example nome is provided for IESNAMEsfile doc display in the user a IFSNAME RESUME PDF interface IFSSIZE Yes The size in kilobytes of Double For example the downloaded file IFSSIZE 12 4 Examples To upload files doc from the directory private joe docs and save it as nevwfile doc you must configure the parameters as follows IFSACTION UP LOAD LOCALPATH private joe docs file doc OBJNAME newfile doc To download files doc from the Oracle Internet Files System server configure the parameters as follows IFSACTION DOWNLOAD IFSPATH private joe download file doc IFSNAME file doc Output Parameter IFSORIGPATH ifshome joe file doc Output Parameter IFSSIZE 15 0 Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 43 PIM and Mail 8 3 6 Instant
261. gt or lt variable_key gt it automatically points to the corresponding compartment and field in Wallet For example ORACLE_SERVICES_COMMERCE_FORMFILLER_ SUGGESTIONS_ccnum CREDIT_CARD CC_NUMBER a ORACLE SERVICES_COMMERCE_FORMFILLER_SUGGESTIONS_ fn PROFILE FIRSTNAME a Default Value Null a Customizability Users must customize these values if they want to add suggestions Application Setup OMP URL a Description The OMP reference to the used URLS a Valid Values a Default Value omp oracle applications appsetup a Examples 8 5 1 6 Linking to the Form Filler Application You link to the Form Filler application using the following virtual URL omp oracle services commerce formfiller Table 8 41 describes the input call parameters of the Form Filler application Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 81 m Commerce Applications Table 8 41 Input Call Parameters of the Form Filler Application Triggers Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value Output FORMFILLURL Yes The URL of the form to be A string For ReturnGroup filled Restriction URL example encoded FORMFILLURL htt p www formfiller demo com FORMFILLPARAMS Yes The parameters inside the A string For ReturnGroup form Restriction It should bea example comma separated ordered list FORMFILLPARAMS of Ylabel variable name First Name fname pairs Where label is the Last Name lname C label used in the form that is redit Card C
262. guration page which enables you set the default configuration for the messaging server Table 3 17 describes the messaging server configuration parameters Table 3 17 Messaging Server Configuration Parameters Parameter Description GSM Smart Message The class name that encodes the GSM smart message such as ringtone graphics Encoder Class Name WAP setting and email setting for SMS Default Number of The default number of sending threads for a driver instance If the number of Sending Threads sending threads is not specified for a driver instance which has SEND capability this value will be used Default Number of The default number of receiving threads for a driver instance If the number of Receiving Threads receiving threads is not specified for a driver instance which has RECEIVE capability this value will be used Send Retry Times How many times of retry if the sending of a message failed Send Retry Delay second This number represents the waiting time between a failed sending of a message and the sending the message again XMS Configuration The XMS Configuration page enables you to configure the settings for XMS Runtime and enable the XMS Center XMSC which adapts the content of a message to fit a given device In addition this page enables you to prioritize the device types for XMS message delivery XMS Runtime Table 3 18 lists parameters that you define to set the XMS runtime 3 50 Administrator s Guide
263. he Async applications requested notifications sent applications accessed and media contents downloaded To view the detailed activity based on a specified time frame click the Full List button of the specific log type Managing Users 4 17 Viewing Logs Figure 4 7 The Viewing User Logs Screen Partial View Ovmiew Users Users gt Users gt orcladmin gt View User Logs You are logged in as Orcladmit View User Logs Application Logs Async Logs The last five applications invoked The last five async applications requested master LocAlertApp3 MAST 4 25 03 Successful oe AM Media Download History PIM FOLD 4 25 03 Successful The last five media contents downloaded 10 54 24 AM nr POT PIM Oracle Internet File LMOD 4 25 03 Successful System 10 54 11 AM PDT Viewing Async Logs Table 4 5 describes the Async application statistics for a selected user Table 4 5 Async Log Statistics Element Description Short Name The name of the Async application for example ST for a stock quote application ID The OID of the Async agent application in the database Device Address The address of the user s device receiving the notification Server Address The address of the Async application Delivery Type The delivery type for the Async application for example SMS Receiving Time The time that the Async server received the request Async Status A message describ
264. he disadvantage of this solution is that the company hosting the application server must deploy and maintain its own WAP gateway User Agent devices such as Nokia Mobile Browser 3 0 already support this deployment model In the next generation of WAP WAP 2 0 WAP designers will eliminate WAP gap by introducing Internet Protocols That is WAP devices which can securely communicate using SSL In addition no translation will be necessary at the WAP gateway thus providing end to end privacy This is a step to ensure that WAP devices are interoperable with the wired Internet 10 4 2 3 Short Messaging Service The Short Message Service SMS deployment architecture dictates that messages be routed through a Short Message Service Center SMSC from the application server to the wireless device as depicted in Figure 10 6 10 16 Administrator s Guide Installing and Configuring Oracle Application Server Wireless Security Figure 10 6 Short Message Service SMS Oracle Database SMS Oracle Application Server Wireless SMS transport client transport server Under SMS required security for a given deployment scenario depends largely on the business model for example carriers versus corporations of the enterprise deploying the solution Given these different business models secure deployment alternatives are as follows 1 No Transport Security Needed This scenario relies on the existing security of the wireless
265. he dynamic content However with Oracle Application Server Wireless the wireless runtime determines the content that must be inserted into WebCache and when to expire the content in the cache WebCache in this case acts as a device adaptation cache rather than a reverse proxy cache Efficiencies Resulting from WebCache Since markup content is cached using WebCache the performance and scalability benefits derive from two factors reduced device adaptation costs and significantly reduced adapter invocation costs Content which can be shared across users and Integrating Wireless with Other Components 16 5 Integrating Wireless with WebC ache sessions is essentially transformed only once per device from its Mobile XML format resulting in a reduction of adaptation costs Secondly since the content is not generated every time by an adapter the total adapter invocation cost is significantly reduced for a site that has a large subset of cacheable pages A Cache Miss Scenario A cache miss scenario as depicted in Figure 16 3 is as follows 1 An incoming request is received by the wireless runtime which requests the cache for a page corresponding to the request and the device that made the request 2 In this case the page does not exist in the cache causing WebCache to send a request back to the wireless runtime requesting for the page 3 The runtime recognizes this request to be from WebCache rather than from a client 4
266. he end user role a user belonging to the StudioUser group can access the Mobile Studio Every Wireless user is granted the Mobile Customer Role by default This role is implicit to all users Enterprise Manager Application Server Control User Manager Wireless Customization Portal Mobile Studio for users assigned to the StudioUser group Wireless also allows anonymous users the users who do not register with Wireless but want to use the applications as a guest You can create an anonymous user account for each group All unregistered users share the guest account to invoke applications owned by the group A guest user cannot personalize applications 4 4 Administrator s Guide Logging into the User Manager 4 1 2 Enabling Users to Access the Wireless Tools You must assign roles to users from the User Manager rather than with other general purpose user management tools such as DAS Oracle Delegated Administration Services Users created using DAS or other OID Oracle Internet Directory tools are provisioned in Wireless only when they accesses the Wireless and Voice portal the mobile portal or any of the PC based tools for the first time These provisioned users do not have the assigned roles needed to access the Wireless tools For example a user must have the Application Developer role to access the Service Manager If a user with no assigned roles tries to log into a Wireless tool in the integrated mode then Wi
267. hen you must connect your device to your corporate Local Area Network LAN If the Wireless server is on the Internet then you must connect to your Internet Service Provider ISP There are different ways to connect your Pocket PC device to your corporate LAN or to your ISP and they are all documented in the Pocket PC Connection Manager tutorial at http www microsoft com mobile pocketpc tutorials connectionmanager defa ult asp 9 1 1 2 Accessing the Wireless Server Using Internet Explorer To access the Wireless server using Internet Explorer 1 Open Internet Explorer by clicking Start in the desktop then by selecting Internet Explorer If you are already in Internet Explorer go to Step 2 2 Select View and then Address Bar to display the Internet Explorer Address Bar If the Internet Explorer Address Bar is already shown go to Step 3 3 Enter the URL to the Wireless server in the Address Bar and click the GO button represented as a green arrow 9 1 1 3 Setting Up the Internet Explorer Home Page Once connected to the main page on the Wireless server you can make that page the Home Page for your Internet Explorer Doing so saves from entering the URL every time 1 While still displaying the Wireless server main page select Tools then Options 2 Select Use Current button in the Home page section 3 Select OK 9 1 2 Configuring Wireless for PALM There are two types of Palm devices for connecting to the Intern
268. his is a required field A description of the bookmark The order as specified by an integer value in which the bookmarks appear on output devices By default these appear in order by sequence number and then by name The cost to the user for accessing the bookmark The area such as a continent country or city that is associated with the bookmark If you assign a region to a bookmark then users can only view that bookmark and its contents when they are in the assigned region Selecting this check box makes the bookmark visible to the end user Leaving this check box clear prevents end users from seeing or accessing the bookmark Selecting this option enables end users to customize their user views in the Wireless Customization Portal or on the mobile device by reordering or hiding and showing bookmarks In addition to these parameters whose values define the basic settings for the bookmark the New Bookmark screen also includes a table listing URLs and MIME types to which you can associate with this bookmark This table also notes the default MIME type which you can set by selecting a MIME type and then by clicking Set Default 5 18 Administrator s Guide Managing Application Links Note Only the URL for the text vnd wap wml MIME type can be set as the default You can add other URLs or MIME types to the table by clicking Add button and then by defining the values for URL and MIME type in the following pag
269. hts Notice Programs delivered subject to the DOD FAR Supplement are commercial computer software and use duplication and disclosure of the Programs including documentation shall be subject to the licensing restrictions set forth in the applicable Oracle license agreement Otherwise Programs delivered subject to the Federal Acquisition Regulations are restricted computer software and use duplication and disclosure of the Programs shall be subject to the restrictions in FAR 52 227 19 Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights June 1987 Oracle Corporation 500 Oracle Parkway Redwood City CA 94065 The Programs are not intended for use in any nuclear aviation mass transit medical or other inherently dangerous applications It shall be the licensee s responsibility to take all appropriate fail safe backup redundancy and other measures to ensure the safe use of such applications if the Programs are used for such purposes and Oracle Corporation disclaims liability for any damages caused by such use of the Programs Oracle is a registered trademark and Oracle9i PL SQL OracleMobile and SQL Plus are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners Contents Send Us Your Comments isis ese scssiies sess sesh esos eetes ska ecasecene ones colahendelintossspes evades cvoksStoneteen xiii POF Cie essa teh ahha cas thet A acess pect asa ea letestui cadeot ceased
270. i aise eu Sei atin a a E AA TREN 8 84 8 5 3 Wallet Application ossei I e ea aE a a EA A a 8 90 8 5 4 TPanscOdeh es e ier aAa E aa eile Re See i eS 8 102 vii 10 viii Wireless Gateway Configuration 9 1 Configuring Wireless for Browser Based Applications cccccseseeecseseseseseeseneeeees 9 1 9 1 1 Configuring Wireless for PocketPC ccc cecccsssessesesesssssseeseseesesesesesesesessseseseseeses 9 1 9 1 2 Configuring Wireless for PALM ccceeeccccsesesesescscsesesescsescsssesescscsssnseseesssesesessnenenes 9 2 9 1 3 Configuring Wireless for WAP c ccccesseccccsesesescscseseseseecscssseseecesenssesesesssenesesenesenees 9 4 9 2 Configuring Wireless for Voice Applications ss sssssesssssssseesiesieseessississssnensiesesnesneenees 9 6 9 2 1 PRETEQUISITES Stes sas hs onean Saeco teers WAS TAD ee ent asa D Dee Ne Ages Seog ota das 9 6 9 2 2 Configuring and Testing Voice Enabled Applications cccccceeee cece 9 6 9 2 3 Provisioning Voice ACCESS paie a e E E E E RE E E EN E 9 8 9 2 4 Testing the Voice Portal n i eE croft EEE EEE 9 13 9 3 Configuring Wireless for Async Enabled Applications cccccee escent ee eeseees 9 19 9 3 1 Configuring Email based Two Way Pager ACCESS te eeeeeseeeeeseseees 9 20 9 3 2 Enabling SMS Phone Access vi ictsescessvsctessestessseatetundtsescessesuscasvessveteadeededevenihbeseveeeses 9 20 9 4 Configuring Wireless for Notifications ccccccececc cesses cscs ceeess
271. icationSinkReg COM interface to register event sink for the user For this to work the Internet Information Server with the HTTP server must run on the same machine as Exchange server The URL that Oracle Application Server Wireless instance uses the form of http exchangehost company com virtualpath regevent asp Integrating Wireless Notification with Microsoft Exchange 17 13 Configuring the Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server The virtual path needs to be configured so that the regevent asp can be found Also this URL must be password protected Copy the file regevent asp from the Wireless installation 60RACLE_ HOME wireless sample exchange directory and put it into the oracle directory that you previously created To configure a virtual directory that points to the c oracle directory 1 Click the Windows Start button 2 Select Programs w From the Programs menu select Administrative Tools and then Internet Service Manager Expand the right server name Right click Default Web Site Select New and then Virtual Directory The Welcome window appears Click Next o N o ooe In the Virtual Directory Alias window Figure 17 11 enter the virtual path name such as oracle 9 Click Next This virtual path name must match the URL path of the Oracle Application Server Wireless configuration Adapter URL path 17 14 Administrator s Guide Configuring the Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server Figure 17 11 Virtual
272. ides a set of wizards that enable you to create these objects quickly and with a minimum of information Each of these wizards break down the creation process into series of steps 7 2 Administrator s Guide Logging into the Foundation Manager 7 2 Logging into the Foundation Manager To use the Foundation Manager you must first access the login page to the Webtool using the following URL http lt host gt lt port gt webtool login uix For example you access the login page by entering the following URL into a browser http hostname 7777 webtool login uix Note 7777 is the default port number for Oracle Application Server Wireless The port number range is 7777 to 7877 To ensure that you are using the correct port number check the port number for Oracle Application Server Wireless stored in Oracle home install portlist ini For more information on port usage see the Oracle Application Server Installation Guide and the Oracle Application Server Administrator s Guide Enter your user name and password If you are an administrator enter orcladmin as your user name The password is set during installation but can be changed from the User Manager After you successfully login select the Foundation tab the Foundation Manager s browsing screen appears From the Foundation Manager you can administer the following repository objects a Devices a Transformers a Adapters a Regions a Digital Ri
273. ign User SecurityAdminsPrivilege bat depending on your operating system on the machine on which Wireless is installed The script is available in the ORACLE_ HOME wireless bin directory The syntax for invoking the utility is as follows assignUserSecurityAdminsPrivilege sh oid_super_user_dn user_password where 10 12 Administrator s Guide Installing and Configuring Oracle Application Server Wireless Security oid_super_user_dn is the Distinguished Name DN of the OID super user The user should have privileges to grant UserSecurityAdmins privilege to application entities user_passord is the password of the OID super user For example assignUserSecurityAdminsPrivilege sh cn orcladmin welcomel 10 4 Installing and Configuring Oracle Application Server Wireless Security This section describes Communication Data Privacy and Non Repudiation principles of wireless security In discussing these principles this section provides alternatives available to application developers when incorporating security in Wireless In some cases Wireless does not provide direct support for security on a given channel leaving the responsibility to the application developer to recognize the security needed for the application and to deploy the appropriate security mechanisms 10 4 1 Communication Data Privacy Communication Data Privacy is the principle of security that prevents data in transit on the network from being partially or compl
274. igure the email and paging services 1 Set up an SMTP mail server for outgoing messages 2 Optionally set up an IMAP or POP3 mail server if message receiving is required 3 Configure the email driver and driver instance as described in the common tasks section 9 4 3 2 Configuring the SMS Phone Message Delivery To deliver SMS messages to phones you must set up a communication channel to the SMS carrier To do this you must contract with a carrier having a network used for sending and receiving of SMS messages through the UCP or SMPP protocols Alternatively you can use a network aggregator such as Mobileway who acts as an intermediary between the SMS carriers and the enterprise This may be beneficial 9 22 Administrator s Guide Configuring Wireless for Notifications when supporting messaging on which multiple carriers are required See the following URL for vendors whose protocols are certified to work with Wireless http otn oracle com products iaswe integration content html Configure the corresponding SMS drivers for example UCP SMPP and driver instances 9 4 3 3 Configuring FAX Delivery For this release RightFax a product of Captaris Inc is the supported product Customers must acquire the RightFax product and follow its instructions to set up a fax server The location of client API jar files from RightFax must be added to the classpath in ORACLE _HOME wireless sample runpanamaserver sh Configure th
275. iguring the Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server a Section 17 4 Exchange Notification Administration in Oracle Application Server Wireless 17 2 Wireless Notification Architecture Oracle Application Server Wireless supports a wireless notification architecture that sends notification messages to a user s preferred device at the moment an event of interest to that user occurs This architecture supports notification from several different applications such as Oracle Unified Messaging Oracle Calendar and Microsoft Exchange Server The wireless notification architecture for Microsoft Exchange uses standard Microsoft Exchange Store events A COM object also referred to as Event Sink is registered to subscribe users email event It forwards notification events to a special Exchange notification account These events are then retrieved and processed by Oracle Application Server Wireless and notification messages are sent out accordingly Oracle Application Server Wireless users who are using Microsoft Exchange email set up their notification preferences in Oracle Application Server Wireless which uses the Exchange Notification Setting Adapter to set up the notification criteria in the external Exchange server The Exchange Notification Integrating Wireless Notification with Microsoft Exchange 17 1 Configuring the Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server Setting adapter communicates with Microsoft Exchange Server through ASP calls over standard H
276. ime page contains the configuration for runtime attributes such as runtime runtime session and the object cache synchronization Table 3 10 describes the parameters which you configure using this page Table 3 10 The Runtime Parameters Parameter Description Runtime Session Life Time seconds Runtime Session Check Interval seconds Cache Object Life Time seconds Cache Object Check Interval seconds Maximum execution time per Request seconds Persistent Session Life Time days Enable Runtime Session Persistency The life span of a session The default is 600 The time required for the session monitor to check an open session The default is 60 The life span of a persistent object After this time Wireless reconstructs the object The default is 600 The time required for the cache monitor to check the cache If the time is set to 1 Wireless does not invoke the cache monitor and the cache is not cleared The default is 60 The default is 120 Wireless interrupts the threads for the request that take longer than this allotted time and returns an error The life span of a persistent session Runtime session states include the state of user authentication credentials cookies URL caches the short names for the Async applications and the module call back stacks Setting the Runtime Session Persistency flag makes these session states persistent The lifetime of persistent sessions can be sev
277. ing how Wireless failed to respond to the Async application Viewing Notification Logs Table 4 6 describes the notification statistics for a selected user 4 18 Administrator s Guide Viewing Logs Table 4 6 Notification Log Statistics Element Description Name The name of the notification Notification ID The OID of the notification in the database Device Address The address of the user device receiving the notification Device Type The type of logical device receiving the notification for example WAP Push SMS or Email Dispatch Time The time Wireless sent the message Message Status The status of the sent message Viewing Application Statistics Logs Table 4 7 describes the application statistics for a selected user Table 4 7 Application Log Statistics Element Description Name The name of the application Application ID The OID of the application in the database Application Type The type of object folder bookmark application or local module accessed by the user Invocation Time The time the user accessed the application Invocation Status Whether Wireless successfully executed the application Viewing Media Download History Logs Table 4 8 describes the media download statistics for a selected user Managing Users 4 19 Viewing Logs Table 4 8 Media Download History Statistics Element Description Application Name The name of the J2ME application Content Version The
278. ink you can configure or view the detail status and performance information of a standalone process You can also start or stop the process at the process from this page By default the timeout to start or stop a standalone process is 420 seconds You can adjust this value by updating opmn xml directly by using the Process Management page You invoke this page Figure 3 12 from the Process Management link on the application server page in the Enterprise Manager in integrated mode All of the Wireless standalone processes are listed under the Wireless component in opmn xmil 3 16 Administrator s Guide The Home Page Figure 3 12 Accessing ompn xml Through the Process Management Page Farm gt Application Server m11mid dsunran22 us oracle com gt Process Management Process Management This configuration file is located at private1 iasinst m1 1 mid opmn conffoprmn xml lt variable id CLASSPATH value private1 iasinst m1imid j2ee home jazn jar lt variable id CLASSPATH value privatel iasinst m1limid j2ee home jaas jar lt variable id CLASSPATH value privatel iasinst m1limid soap lib soap jar lt variable id CLASSPATH value privatel iasinst mlimid soap lib wsdl jar lt fenvironment gt lt process type id performance_ server module id performance gt lt stop timeout 420 gt lt process set id perfmonitor 1001 numprocs 1 gt lt stop timeout 420 gt lt start timeout 420 gt lt resta
279. ink in the Utilities section enables you to upload repository objects You can upload repository objects from a local file Managing the Wireless Server 3 57 Site Administration The upload function performs the following a Checks for the objects in the repository by logical unique name a Loads all dependencies a If the objects exist in the repository then the uploading facility updates the objects a If the objects do not exist then the uploading creates them After each object type is successfully loaded the uploading facility performs a commit unless you specify a different commit frequency The commit includes all referenced objects dependencies Wireless does not validate the XML file that you import into the repository using the upload facility To avoid errors work in an XML file that you have exported from the repository This gives you a known good Repository XML framework for adding removing and modifying individual elements To upload repository objects 1 Enter the password of the currently logged in user This is the same as the user logon password This field appears only in standalone mode where it is required 2 Enter the name and location of the file you want to upload or select it using the Browse function 3 Enter the location of the logging activity This is a server side generated log file For example enter temp activity log This is a required field 4 Enter the location for log
280. ion 8 Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 1 Configuring the Voice and Wireless Applications Using the Content Managerv 8 1 8 2 Wireless Application Configuration Parameters ss ssssssesistessissestesteesinsessesnseneeseeses 8 2 8 2 1 Applications Set pssisssnrasa Dirk eeen Aan A SEAS EP EES RANEA SENHE 8 3 8 3 PM and Mail 2 220205 e00e 6 2 airaa a ra aa RE EEan iea a a a a a 8 7 8 3 1 Address Book timet aa r e aa a a a ea 8 7 8 3 2 Calendar E EAE oad E ENT A E E TEAT 8 19 8 3 3 Director Yiis teen cite vesae cen iii EE E E E E E E 8 25 8 3 4 Fax ERE E E A E AEE EET E S S ee 8 32 8 3 5 Oracl Internet File Systeri memi e api e e ae ae aE i ET 8 39 8 3 6 Instant M ssagti is snih n s a aasa iaa 8 44 8 3 7 N ET PEE EEE A E E Bh Wee eae 8 47 8 3 8 Short Messaging cs nena i aes oee atten a han ee E e E E 8 53 8 3 9 ASKS A A EEE NEEE AE AATE 8 57 8 3 10 Connecting PIM Applications to Non Oracle Servers ssessessesissiesressesseseese 8 59 8 4 Locations enne ae eas o e a clot ARAT ila Sa ee A 8 62 8 4 1 Biz Directory zitin reaa r A a E E Aa EE A aa ADA IEEE SEEE 8 62 8 4 2 Driving Ditech nss Senton ene E EE E EL E OR ER aes oa 8 65 8 4 3 Teocation Picker miae tea aeaa ee er e E e a a eai 8 68 8 4 4 Mia oe EE E T Rt eeescaciees tes 8 73 8 5 m Comimerce AppliaAH Ssasnisinnennnnn eaa ai ahy aiaei 8 75 8 5 1 Form Fillerin enai a aaa a aa aaa EAA KEE E Eae Eaa E E Eaa 8 75 8 5 2 Payment Application iw
281. ion transaction ID Example TRXID 1234 failed this return 1 for a successful transaction or TRXID 1 for a failed transaction FAILCODE Yes if TRXID 1 The fail code for this transaction 1 If an ERROR occurred FAILREASON _ Yes if TRXID 1 A transaction can be cancelled by the end user or because of an error occurring during processing The backend payment system for example Oracle CRM payment which generates error messages which are useful for the end user when an error occurs For example these messages can alert users to invalid or declined credit cards 2 If the end user cancelled the transaction A string with the describing the reason for the failure Example FAILREASON Invalid Credit Card 8 5 2 5 Capturing Transactions Merchants can use a URL whenever they want to capture previously authorized transactions This URL can be used in both secure and non secure modes The difference between the two modes is the HTTP and HTTPS protocols Non Secure Capture The http URL for the non secure capture of a previously authorized transaction is as follows http myserver com 9080 modules commerce payment jsp IPaymentProcess js p MERCHANTID lt merchantID gt amp MERCHANTPW lt merchantPWD gt TRXID lt transactionID gt amp CURRENCY lt currency gt amp AMOUNT lt amount gt For a merchant called BookStore to capture transaction 1234 in the amount of US 100 00 you call the URL and then enter th
282. ioningPostDownloadHook Deliverable Content Event Listener Class Name This hook is invoked during content upload update or delete The interface to be implemented is oracle panama rt event DeliverableCtntEventListener Drivers The driver implements the following interface oracle wireless me provisioning ProvisioningDriver You can add delete or edit a driver To add a driver provide the driver class name driver description and driver parameters if any Out of the box Wireless provides two driver implementations the default provisioning driver oracle wireless me provisioning DefaultProvisioningDriver and the default JAR provisioning driver oracle wireless me provisioning DefaultJarProvisioningDriver These drivers are mapped to download J2ME MIDlets and JAR files respectively Driver Mapping You map the driver used for the appropriate application type and protocol configuration Out of the box the two drivers support SUN OTA and SUN OTA_ JAR protocols for J2ME applications You can select the driver classes which are used for the two protocols The utilities section contains the common utilities for the administrator to use 3 54 Administrator s Guide Site Administration Note For the utilities to function a You must configure the Wireless Tools URL correctly If you use instance URLs then you configure this URL using the Instance URLs page accessed from the Home p
283. ions Mail SMS IM or Two Way Pager Address The address of this access point For SMS it is a phone number such as 18001234567 For IM it has the format of lt network gt lt User ID gt such as jabber foo jabber org yahoo foo msn foo msn com aim foo and icq 12345 Wireless currently supports the Yahoo MSN AOL ICQ and Jabber networks For two way pagers use the format 180012343567 or 180001234567 foo com or 1800123 4567 3 44 Administrator s Guide Site Administration Table 3 13 Access Point Attributes Attribute Description Allowed to Access All Applications Select this option to determine if this is a site access point or an application category access point If you do not select this option then you can associate one or more application categories with an access point used to support PremiumSMS If there are application categories associated with this access point and you want to select this option and create a site access point then Wireless removes all of the application categories associated with this access point Wireless asks you to confirm this change Dedicated for Actionable Message Reply Selecting this option creates an address that is dedicated for Actionable Message Reply Once it is set all of the actionable push messages have the From address set to the access point The instructions for replying to an actionable message have the short name omitted To answer these messages u
284. ious Appointment Next Day Goto Day Delete Appointment New Appointment Takes the user to the next appointment in the current day Takes the user to the previous appointment in the current day Takes the user to the next day immediately after the current day that the user is accessing Presents users with a dialog that enables them to say the date that is the specific day that they would like to hear This dialog accepts natural language such as August 9th 2003 or tomorrow or yesterday for relative dates Deletes the current appointment Presents users with a dialog in which they enter a new appointment for a particular date To enter an appointment users must provide the following information The date of the appointment a The start time of the appointment a The end time of the appointment Spell Title a Spell Location Appointment type Sharing a All day event Some of these entries may differ or may not exist depending on the backend 9 2 4 4 Testing the Oracle Files The voice version of the Oracle Files application enables users to browse directories listen to the descriptions of the file names and then either fax or delete the file Table 9 5 describes the voice commands used when browsing folders Wireless Gateway Configuration 9 17 Configuring Wireless for Voice Applications Table 9 5 Voice Commands for Browsing Folders Command or Name Description Foldername
285. iptions of the parameters for creating a device 7 10 Administrator s Guide Managing Devices Figure 7 7 Editing a Device Devices Basic Basic Name BLAZER Name of the device Description Description of the device Manufacturer Add Manufacturer of the device Select an item from the list or add a new one Model Model of the device C 7 3 2 2 Deleting a Device You delete devices from the repository by selecting a device from the browsing screen and then clicking Delete 7 3 3 Cloning a Device The Clone function enables you to create a new device from an existing device in the repository This function enables you to create a new device with properties similar to an existing device as the new device inherits all of the capabilities from the existing device from which it was copied Unlike creating a new device as described in Section 7 3 2 you need only enter a name for the device You can later edit the parameters for the cloned device To clone a device you select a device from the browsing screen and then click Clone Enter a name for the new device and then click Finish Managing Foundation Services 7 11 Managing Transformers 7 4 Managing Transformers Clicking the Transformers tab displays the browsing screen for transformers which includes a table that lists the current transformers in the repository by name object ID in the repository the MIME type supported
286. is a link to the user s Location Marks Restriction This landmark must be defined in the location application The number of the bank account Restriction this can only be numbers all other characters are ignored The type of account such as checking or savings The routing number of the bank Restriction this must only be numbers all other characters are ignored The name of the bank A string For example BA Checking 2438 A string For example BA_ HOLDER_NAME John Doe A string For example BA_ HOLDER_ADDRESS_ LANDMARK Palo Alto branch of Western Union A string For example BA_ ACCT_NUMBER 23894592 Checking Savings Market Rate For example BA_ACCT_ TYPE Checking A string For example BA_FI_ ROUTING _ NUMBER 23985002394 A string For example BA_FI_ NAMEz Bank of America m Commerce Applications Table 8 50 Parameters of the bankAccountData Group Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value BA_LANDMARK NAME BA_ADDRESS_LINE1 BA_ADDRESS_LINE2 BA_CITY BA_STATE BA_COUNTRY BA_ZIPCODE Yes The parameters for A string For example BA_ the bank s street LANDMARK _NAME Palo Alto address such as BA_ branch of Western Union ADDRESS_LINE1 are built on the fly as the Wallet application knows that Billing Address is a reference toa Location Mark Restriction This landmark must be defined in the location application
287. is capable of generating only Wireless XML text vnd oracle mobilexml then unless otherwise indicated the Portlet will transform the Wireless XML to HTML for PC Desktop clients 2 lt mobileFlags gt Usage lt mobileFlags gt MOBILE_ONLY lt mobileFlags gt Portlets can set this value to MOBILE_ONLY and hence indicate that this Portlet must be rendered in wireless devices only This will prevent the default behavior of a Portal to transform Wireless XML generated by the Portlet and rendered to PC Desktop clients 3 lt showLink gt Usage lt showLink gt t rue lt showLink gt Portal renders all the Portlets on Wireless devices as links Portlets must set this value to True to be rendered on a wireless device A value of True allows the Portal to generate a Link pointing to the Portlet content on the wireless device 4 lt linkPage gt Usage lt linkPage class oracle portal provider v2 render http ResourceRenderer gt lt resourcePath gt mypath mypage jsp lt resourcePath gt lt contentType gt text vnd oracle mobilexml lt contentType gt lt linkPage gt 16 18 Administrator s Guide Integrating Wireless with Oracle Application Server Portal This tags holds the pointer to the resource which generates the required link that is rendered on a wireless device This resource must generate Wireless XML Below is a sample link page implemented in JSP lt page session false contentType text vnd oracle mobilexml gt
288. is distinct from the java locale format en_US The user s preferred locale is the language preference of a Wireless user which is set with the User Manager For more information see Section 4 5 in Chapter 4 Managing Users The Accept Language header is an HTTP protocol parameter that user agents Web browsers send with HTTP requests Globalization 15 1 Determining a User s Locale Note For information on the HTTP accept language header format see the HTTP specification of the World Wide Web Consortium W3C The Site Locale is an instance wide default locale of the Wireless Server For more information see Section 15 2 4 15 2 1 After Login After login the Wireless Server respects the user s preferred locale 15 2 2 Before Login Before login the Wireless Web Server ptg rm Async Listener the Wireless Tools and the Customization Portal each determine the appropriate locale of a user s device Table 15 1 illustrates how the Async Listener the WirelessWeb Server the Wireless Tools and the Customization Portal determine the locale of a user The numeric value indicates the preference for the detection methods in descending order Table 15 1 Locale Determination Wireless Tools and Method Async Listner Wireless Web Sever ptg rm Customization Portal Locale of the registered user 1 1 1 or virtual user HTTP parameter PAlocale N A 2 N A Accept language http header N A 3 N A Site defa
289. is string specifies the wallet s internal structure The wallet structure is based on fixed and user defined compartments The fixed compartments include the User Profile Internet Accounts and Shipping Addresses The user defined compartments include Credit Card Bank Account and Extended Info Restriction The return string is formatted as COMPARTMENT_NAME FIELD_ NAME 9OFIELD_ DESCRIPTION Valid values are True False A string For exampl and e WALLET _STRUCTUR the wallet has E If compartments CC and BA for credit card and bank account respectively the return string can then be CC CCNUM CreditCard Number CC CCEXP Credit Card Expiration Date BA BNUM Account Number Bank Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 95 m Commerce Applications Table 8 48 Output Parameters for the Wallet Application Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value FIRSTNAME No LASTNAME No EMAIL No This variable holds its value of the user s first name when the calling application requests the user s name This variable cannot be changed as it is part of the fixed Profile compartment This variable holds the value of the user s last name when the calling application requests the user s last name It cannot be changed as it is part of the fixed Profile compartment This variable holds the value of the user s
290. istrator may choose to purge the data off these tables periodically PTG_SERVICE_LOG Table 12 1 describes the PTG_SERVICE Log 12 2 Administrator s Guide Activity Logging Overview Table 12 1 Service Activity Log Column Name Description Service_id Service_name ptg_instance_id final_service_id final_service_name session_id bookmark service_type invocation_hour invocation_time response_time request_status error_description user_id user_name remote_address host_id logical_device external_user_id external_user_name adapter_type adaptor_time transformation_time The Object Identifier for the invoked service application The name of the invoked service The unique identifier identifying the instance The Object Identifier of the final service that is master service folder The name of the final service The Session Identifier of the Session in whose context the service is invoked The application bookmark The type of service The hour when the service was invoked The date when the service was invoked The response time for the service The status of the request Non zero values indicate the error number The error message if there was an error while invoking the service The Object Identifier for the user The name of the user Gateway IP address and host name Host IP address and name The device where the application was invoked The external user id
291. itions Optionally you can edit the pre seeded MESSAGE_ROUTE_ preset definition so that each portal can customize the message headers which are sent to the SMS driver as the billing information for the result message For example you can change the description of ROUTE_COST_LEVEL from cost level to tariff class or add or delete meta fields By default the values of the two fields ROUTE_CHANNEL and ROUTE_REV_ CHANNEL are set to the From and ReplyTo fields respectively of the result message Because of this a custom built driver is not needed to pass information to the Premium SMS operator To change these mappings a System Administrator modifies the following attributes in the system properties file a wireless async routeinfo to a wireless async routeinfo replyto 5 6 3 Adding SMS Routing Information You can add SMS routing information when creating or editing Premium SMS enabled application links For example you can assign the value of the Large Account to which the reply message should be charged to the Channel field For more information see Section 5 3 4 Managing Content 5 27 Managing Alerts Deprecated 5 7 Managing Alerts Deprecated Using the Alerts browsing screen you can search for create edit move delete and share alerts notifications applications that notify users of important information or events In addition you can add topics which group alerts Note The features for alert and to
292. itude The name The name of the Location Mark The status of the application call A string For example CN Oracle Corp A string For example FL 500 Oracle Parkway A string For example SL Redwood City CA A string For example LL US A string For example BL Block 400 A string For example CI Redwood City A string For example CT San Mateo A string For example ST CA Postal Code A string For example PC 94065 A string For example PCE 5423 A string For example CO US Double For example LT 37 2433 Double For example LN 122 3452 A string For example N Golden Gate Park A string For e xample LMN Office OK CANCEL Cancelled 8 74 Administrator s Guide m Commerce Applications Output Parameter for the Maps Application Table 8 40 describes the output parameter for the Maps application Table 8 40 Output Parameter of the Map Module Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value STATUS No The status of a mobile OK call CANCEL Cancelled 8 5 m Commerce Applications Oracle m Commerce applications are a set of Wireless and Voice Applications that securely store user profiles supply information authorized by users of third party applications and interface with on line payment mechanisms to complete transactions The m Commerce applications also translate existing WML applications into Mobile XML and uses Form Filler to map forms which spares users from entering information from
293. iver sends a message If the driver is fast then the system does not wait long Average Receiving Response Time Once a transport driver receives a message the message is passed to the transport system by an onMessage method The response time is the time taken by the onMessage method Once the onMessage returns the received message is saved in a database for dispatching Total Number of Received Messages The total number of times the transport drivers call the onMessage call back method Optimizing Oracle Application Server Wireless 13 3 Transport Performance Monitoring Total Number of Received Messages Dispatched The total number of received messages which are dispatched to and are accepted by the listeners Among received messages some may be in processing Others may not have been dispatched to listeners or listeners may have failed to process dispatched messages Total Number of Received Messages Dispatch Failed The total number of received messages which failed to dispatch to a listener For more information on the Site Performance see Section 3 5 13 2 1 Factors Affecting Transport Performance This section describes the factors that affect transport performance Topics include a Section 13 2 1 1 Determining the Sending and Receiving Threads of a Driver a Section 13 2 1 2 AQ Tuning a Section 13 2 1 3 Moving Transport Operations to Database Machine 13 2 1 1 Determining the Sending and Receiving Thread
294. ize cannot be more than 500 the transport uses a 500 chunk size even if the chunk size is set at greater than 500 Site Administration Table 3 14 Parameters of the Messaging Server Client Parameter Value Carrier Finder Hook Class Name Wireless uses this hook to find the carrier name from a phone number The carrier name is then used by the driver finder to find a proper driver to send a message to this phone number Use this hook for situations where there are several carrier specific drivers as using a carrier s driver with a phone number of that carrier improves performance If you do not specify the carrier finder hook class name at the node level then Wireless uses the one set at the site level If you do not specify the carrier finder hook class name at the site level then the driver finder cannot find an appropriate driver because it does not have the carrier information If you do not specify the carrier finder driver hook class at either the site or node level then Wireless uses the transport s default driver finder Driver Finder Hook Class Name The name of the hook that the transport uses to find an appropriate driver to send a message to a given destination The driver finder hook uses such criteria as delivery type cost or speed to assign a driver If you do not specify the driver finder hook class name at the node level then Wireless uses the driver finder hook specified at the server level configuration a P
295. k For Oracle Calendar Server oracle panama module pim addressbook oracle OracleAddressBook For the Preset Address Book where the data is stored in the database tables in the Wireless schema oracle panama module pim addressbook oracle UMAddressBook Default Value oracle panama module pim addressbook oracle UMAddressBook Examples a Address Book Server The server name or IP address of the Address Book server Valid Values The name or IP of the Address Book server When connecting to the Oracle Collaboration Suite enter the name or IP of the Oracle Internet Directory OID When connecting to the Oracle Calendar Server enter the connect string to the Oracle Calendar Server database in the following format lt username gt lt password gt lt hostname or IP gt lt port where the database is listening gt lt database SID gt When connecting to the Microsoft Exchange server enter the name or IP of the Exchange server Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 9 PIM and Mail a Default Value localhost a Examples oidserver mycomp com a Address Book Server Port The port number for the Address Book server a Valid Values Any integer value a Default Value empty a Examples 4032 389 a Oracle Internet Directory OID Username The user name for the administrator account in the OID server This parameters is required only for the Oracle UM Unified Messaging address book in a standalone configuration
296. l bar select Edit 1 Select Preferences from the drop down menu The Preferences dialog appears 2 From the Category tree select Fonts to display the Fonts dialog 3 In the Fonts dialog select Unicode from the For the Encoding drop down list 4 From the Variable Width Font and Fixed Width Font drop down lists select the font that supports the preferred language For example if you select Chinese as your preferred language you can select MS Song to view the page in Chinese 4 5 2 Resetting the Password The User Manager enables you to reset the user password and PIN From the Browse User screen select a user and then click the Reset Password button The Reset Password screen then appears where you to enter the new password the password confirmation the new PIN and the PIN confirmation To reset the PIN only do not enter a value Password field leave it blank Likewise you can leave the PIN field blank if you need only to reset the password In the default installation of Oracle Application Server a Wireless application entity does not have the User Administrator privilege to change a user password so 4 14 Administrator s Guide Viewing Application Links saving the changed password fails with a general error message You can identify the error by checking the Wireless log file You can assign the User Administrator UserSecurityAdmins privilege by running the assignUserSecurityAdminsPrivilege sh script located at S
297. l host pointing to the apps dbc file a Default Value apps dbc a Examples private oracle apps ipayment apps dbc C orant ipayment apps dbc a EC APP ID This value represents the Electronic Commerce Application ID ECAPPID within iPayment An ECAPPId is the Id by which iPayment identifies the calling application All applications in 11i are identified using a unique Application ID The payment application users must register a new ECAPPID for Wireless a Valid Values Any integer value representing the ECAPPID a Default Value 10000 a Examples 673 100 123 a Application Setup OMP URL OMP reference to the group of urls to use a Valid Values an OMP URL pointing to the Application Setup a Default Value omp oracle applications appsetup a Examples 8 5 2 3 Linking to the Payment Application You link to the Payment application using the following virtual URL omp oracle services commerce payment Table 8 44 describes the input call parameters of the Payment application 8 86 Administrator s Guide m Commerce Applications Parameter Name Mandatory Description Table 8 44 Input Call Parameters for the Payment Application Valid Value Triggers Output MERCHANTID Amount value for this transaction A valid ID within Cybercash Verisign or other valid Payment Partner and a valid registered user of Wireless The transaction mode which can be ONLINE OFFLINE for Credit Card transaction and OFFL
298. l user account for that user Note The default value of the user role user group and user type search options is Any Click the Search button The list of users corresponding to the search criteria appears in the Users subtab 4 5 Creating Users The Create User screen contains a set of parameters that administrators set to create and configure new users Table 4 3 describes the parameters in the Create User screen Table 4 3 Parameters of the Create User Screen Parameter Value User Name The name of the user This is a required field Note the name is case sensitive Display Name The display name of the user New Password Password Confirmation Primary Phone Number PIN The user s password Note the password is case sensitive This field is required when creating new user The user s password entered again This field is required when creating new user The primary phone number of the user This is a required field When you enter the value for this parameter Wireless creates a device for this user with this phone number This number also serves as the user s account number which the user enters for login rather than entering a user name on a device When you edit a user profile the Account Number field in the editing screen corresponds to the Primary Phone Number field in the Create User screen Changing the value for the Account Number however only changes the account number not the value f
299. label_prefix Back showAs Link gt lt Item target http www oraclemobile com label OracleMobile showAs Button preferredLocation Footer gt lt NavigationItems gt lt Navigation gt Each navigation item has the following six attributes which are described in Table 8 52 Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 103 m Commerce Applications Table 8 52 Navigation Item Attributes Default Attribute Name Meaning Mandatory Accepted Values Values target The location of the Yes Either a fully qualified N A resource URL or a placeholder for mobile context such as portal home service home label The label No This is an A string value N A displayed for the optional attribute end user label_prefix The prefix to the No This is an This attribute is label optional attribute meaningful only for a mobile context such as portal home label_suffix The suffix of the No This is an This attribute is label optional attribute meaningful only for a mobile context such as portal home showAs How to display the No This is an A menu item link or A button label optional attribute button preferredLocation Where to display No This is an A header or footer A header the label optional attribute The schema for the navigation XML is as follows lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt xs schema xmlns xs http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema elementFormDefault qualified attributeFormDefa
300. lass The Java driver class implementing the calendar backend Valid values include For the Oracle Collaboration Server oracle panama module pim calendar star StarCalendarService For the Lotus Domino Server oracle panama module pim calendar domino DominoCalendarService For the Microsoft Exchange Server oracle panama module pim calendar exchange ExchangeCalendarService For the Oracle Calendar Server oracle panama module pim calendar oracle OracleCalendarService Default Value oracle panama module pim calendar star StarCalendarService a Calendar server Enter the calendar server and port For example enter calendar mydomain com 5730 8 20 Administrator s Guide Valid Values In the Oracle Collaboration Suite mode enter the name and port of the Oracle Collaboration Suite Calendar server separating each of these values with a colon The port is where unieng TCP IP service is running on the OracleAS Calendar middle tier This is located in the etc services file In Oracle Calendar mode this value designates the connect string to Oracle Calendar Server database in the following format lt username gt lt password gt lt hostname or IP gt lt port where the database is listening gt lt database SID gt In the Exchange mode enter the name or IP address of the Exchange server In the Lotus Domino mode enter the name and port of the Lotus Domino server separating each of these values with a colon
301. lation of the first Wireless middle tier Clicking the link invokes a two page wizard that guides you through the configuration of the Wireless site The pages are as follows a The Proxy Server page Figure 3 5 On this page you define such proxy server related information as proxy server host name and port number Note The Proxy Server page enables you to configure the proxy properties used by Wireless when HTTP is required If your installation of Wireless does not use an HTTP proxy server then you do not have to define the parameters for this page Figure 3 5 Configuring the Proxy Ports for Basic Site Configuration System gt Wireless Serwer gt Basic Site Configuration Proxy Server Basic Site Configuration Proxy Server HTTP Proxy M Use Proxy Proxy Host www proxy us oracle com Proxy Port J80 Exception Addresses localhost 127 0 0 1 Do not use proxy for these host addresses Use to separate entries Example localhost us oracle com Authentication I Proxy Server Requires Authentication Username Password Managing the Wireless Server 3 7 The Home Page The Entry Points page Figure 3 6 This page contains fields in which you define the entry points which include the access point addresses used by different delivery channels to access the Async Listener as well as the voice access phone number that displays in the Customization Portal You configure the site s locale and
302. le if you expect the user to enter numbers for the parameter you use the format code N This works only with WML 1 1 compliant devices The default format is M Other formats include A for entry of uppercase letters or punctuation a a for entry of lowercase letters or punctuation a N for entry of numbers a X for entry of uppercase letters a x for entry of lowercase letters For a complete list of formats see the Wireless Application Protocol Wireless Markup Language Specification Version 1 1 This value cannot be edited If this check box has been selected then the parameter must have a value If the check box is clear then parameters are optional This cannot be edited Specifies whether the end user using the application link can enter values from a mobile device You can make most output parameters customizable by the user The default value for the parameter set using the Service Manager You can override these default values using the Content Manager If you specify a default value then Wireless does not prompt the user for a value Step 4 Assigning the Async Application to the Application Link You use this screen to assign the Async Agent capabilities to application To use this screen you must base your application link on an Async enabled master application Table 5 5 describes the parameters for Async Agents 5 12 Administrator s Guide Managing Application Links Table 5 5 Parameters
303. le Studio 6 7 Managing Sample Services To add the file to the application follow these steps a From the Wireless root directory navigate to iaswv20 wireless j2ee applications studio studio web javascript b Insert ommsg_hi js in that directory 4 Restart the instance after making these changes 6 5 Managing Sample Services The Samples Services page Figure 6 4 of Mobile Studio enables you to manage the sample services that is the applications that are available in Mobile studio These services include Caltrain HelloWorld OracleCafe and Time From this page you can add edit and delete services Figure 6 4 The Sample Services Page 6 5 1 Adding a Sample Application You use the Add function to add a service that has already been created and hosted to a location accessible to Mobile Studio To add a service Click Add The Edit Sample Service screen appears Figure 6 5 Using this screen you specify the name description the name of the service JSP and service URL of the new service Table 6 3 lists the parameters in this screen 6 8 Administrator s Guide Managing Sample Services Table 6 3 Parameters of the Edit Sample Service Screen Parameter Value Name The Name of the service application that appears on the end user s device Description A description of the service Sample Source URL The HTML document containing the source code for the sample service The developer of the
304. leges View application links assigned to users Manage user devices Search for users View overview information of users End User Users assigned the end user role are the consumers of Wireless services End users create their own accounts when they register with Wireless using the Wireless Customization End users can also customize their own services either from a desktop or from a device Customization for end users includes Customize applications download J2ME applications subscribe to notifications Manage devices Manage location marks and location settings Manage contact rules Mobile studio users also have the end user role a user belonging to the StudioUser group can access the Mobile Studio Every Wireless user is granted the Mobile Customer Role by default This role is implicit to all users Wireless Customization Portal Mobile Studio for users assigned to the StudioUser group In Wireless a user group is the means by which users can access any voice and wireless application any application that has been published to a user group is available to all of that group s members The Content Manager can both create a user group and assign applications to a user group which is a collection of users The user manager assigns users to user groups See Section 5 4 for information on 10 8 Administrator s Guide Resources Protected by Oracle Application Server Wireless publishing an application
305. les First Name Last Name Summary Results Attributes The attributes shown during the summary of returned results Enter true or false for the attributes in Query Result List Attribute Display Names parameter in the same order For example enter true true false true a Valid Values A boolean value true false a Default Value true true true true true false false a Example true true true true true false false Query Attributes Types Specifies the applications to which the listed attributes are linked For example the values can be display email phone fax sms and hidden For example enter display display email phone a Valid Values display Display the attribute name phone Display the attribute as a link to short messaging application or as a shortcut to a phone call on specific devices email Display the attribute as a link to email application link Display the attribute as a link to another search query hidden Do not display the attribute fax Display the attribute as a link to fax a Default Value display display phone email display link hidden a Example display display fax email display link hidden Link Attributes on Result List Specifies attributes that are linked in result query to perform further queries for example no no no yes yes Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 29 PIM and Mail a Valid Values yes no a Default Value no no no no no yes n
306. less load balancing and failover and includes the following sections a Section 14 1 Overview a Section 14 2 Clustering Architecture a Section 14 3 Clustering Configuration a Section 14 4 Configuring Wireless for High Availability Deployment 14 1 Overview Oracle Application Server Wireless offers a scalable reliable server infrastructure through clustering and high availability The clustering structure includes the following two features a Load Balance mod_oc4j on top of Oracle Http Server OHS distributes the request workload among multiple Wireless server processes a Fault Tolerance Failover mod_oc4j on top of OHS redirects a client to another working Wireless server process if a Wireless server process failure occurs 14 2 Clustering Architecture Each Wireless server process which runs on a single Java Virtual Machine JVM is referred to as anode One or more nodes comprise an island Nodes within an island are capable of serving the same applications because the session for each client is replicated among all the nodes within an island in preparation of failover One or more islands together form an OC4J Oracle Containers for Java instance for the purpose of load balancing The entire OC4J instance is linked by mod_oc4j to a Load Balancing and Failover 14 1 Clustering Configuration simple front end Oracle Http Server OHS Typically an island has two to four nodes By default the requests fr
307. less network to the wired network The problem arises when the wireless protocol is not directly interoperable with the wired protocol as it is in many cases causing network level communications to no longer be end to end secure and thus becoming only point to point secure Such leg based communication may be justifiable where there is need for little or no security 10 4 Administrator s Guide Overview for example a public news server but may not be acceptable for the most security conscious applications such as mobile banking or corporate applications Limited computational power and bandwidth in the wireless network and device The restricted power of the wireless device along with the low bandwidth of wireless networks requires the deployment of more efficient and economical encryption mechanisms such as Elliptic Curve Cryptography ECC in WPKI This requires special support by the application server in terms of integration a Lack of well defined authentication standards While password authentication is both common and standard in the wired world it is not perceived as being highly secure especially in the context of mobile applications This causes the introduction of various authentication mechanisms with tight coupling to the physical wireless device causing authentication and other types of security such as non repudiation mechanisms to be dependent on the device 10 1 2 Classes of Users and Their Privileges The
308. less processes which can be started and stopped individually A napua standalone process can also be added or deleted Enable Disable Start Stop performancemonitor1 Performance Monitor a v C messagingservert Messaging Server v 3 3 The Home Page After you access the System Manager the tool defaults to the Home page The page s General section displays current status of the Wireless server Up Down or Unavailable the name of the current host the version number of Oracle Application Server Wireless and the configuration status of the site The timestamp on the Home page reflects the current status of the data displayed on the page You can refresh reload the Home page by clicking the Refresh icon The Home page is divided into the following sections Managing the Wireless Server 3 5 The Home Page General The General section lists the current status of the Wireless server the name of the current host and if the server has been configured Response and Load The Response and Load section displays the following Wireless runtime instance statistics for the last ten minutes Web Based Applications This section lists the OC4J Oracle Containers for Java applications in the Wireless OC4J instance These application types vary according to the installation The System Manager displays each of the applications as a hyperlink by clicking one you access pages for viewing performance statistics You can
309. lete users with the Wireless model APIs The user information is synchronized between Wireless and OID repositories using the following mechanisms a Oracle Application Server Wireless repository synchronization after user authentication a PL SQL based asynchronous synchronization a Oracle Application Server Wireless model API interface For information on authenticating users through SSO see Chapter 11 Mobile Single Sign On 16 1 1 Repository Synchronization after User Authentication Wireless synchronizes user information which is stored in the Wireless repository with OID after SSO authentication 16 2 Administrator s Guide Overview Figure 16 1 Interactions Between Oracle Application Server Wireless SSO and OID 1 explict login private service eae request _ Oracle Application Server Wireless 2 S50 Authentication SSO Server 3 Create Update User Infomation in Oracle Application Server Wireless Repository Orade Intemet Directory The authentication sequence as depicted in Figure 16 1 is as follows 1 User sends an explicit login request or tries to access a private Service or an external SSO partner application 2 The SSO server challenges user credentials and the user is authenticated 3 If the authenticated user does not exist in the Wireless repository then Wireless retrieves the user information from OID and creates a new user in the Wireless repository Otherwis
310. lication link categories see Section 5 6 1 To edit the routing information select the routing method from the Async Agent Information screen and then click Edit Enter the values for the routing options as needed Table 5 6 describes the routing options Table 5 6 The Routing Options Routing Option Description CHANNEL A name of the logical channel through which the message should be sent This field can be used to store the value of the Large Account field for PremiumSMS REVERSE_CHANNEL The logical channel for the reverse traffic Both PremiumSMS and ReverseCharge COST_LEVEL can use this field to store the value of the reply to the Large Account The cost level for message delivery Do not enter a value into this field for PremiumSMS for ReverseCharge enter a value that describes the tariff class Managing Content 5 13 Managing Application Links Step 5 Entering the Additional Information for an Application Link In the final screen of the wizard you define optional parameters for menu list configuration and user form submission type Table 5 7 describes the parameters for this screen Table 5 7 The Additional Information Parameters for an Application Link Parameter Value Description Sequence Cost Language Title Icon URI Menu Icon URI Title Audio URI Menu Audio URI A description of the application link The order in which application links appear on output devices
311. lick Apply to commit your changes Clicking Cancel sets the parameters back to their original values and returns you to the browse screen See Section 5 3 2 1 for information on the basic folder parameters See Section 5 3 2 2 for information on the folder rendering options 5 3 4 Creating an Application Link You create an application link to publish a master application to users By clicking Add Application you create an application link using a wizard which guides you through each step of the creation process from the first step of basing the application link on an existing master application to the steps that follow for setting the general information for the application and editing or adding input parameters If you base the application link on an Async enabled application then you assign Async Agent properties to the application link thus enabling customers to access the application using asynchronous messaging technologies such as SMS Email or two way pagers 5 10 Administrator s Guide Managing Application Links Step 1 Selecting a Master Application You use the Master Application screen to select an existing master application or modulable application on which to create the application link Step 2 Entering the General Information The General screen enables you to set such basic information for the application link such as the name for the application and the short names for the application if it is based upon an As
312. ly access and move to back to any parent folder in the hierarchy 5 6 Administrator s Guide Managing Application Links Figure 5 3 The Navigation Path Content gt Root Folders and Applications gt Commerce Creating a folder is a two step process you first define the basic parameters for a folder such as its name and then you assign the rendering options that dictate the display style for the folder and its contents 5 3 2 1 Step 1 Defining the Basic Parameters for a Folder From the browsing screen click Add Folder The General screen appears displaying the basic parameters of the folder These parameters include Table 5 3 Parameters of the Content Manager Create Folder Screen Parameter Value Folder Name Description Sequence Language Renderer Type Title Icon URI The name of the folder This is a required field A description of the folder The order in which applications and folders appear on output devices By default these appear in order by sequence number then name You can enter values in the sequence fields to rearrange the order in which the applications and folders appear By default Wireless sorts applications and folders in ascending order by sequence number then by name A drop down list of display languages for the folder Any applications or subfolders contained in this folder must have the same display language Users cannot access these objects if their display language differ
313. ly street line of the home address of this contact Restriction white spaces special characters are encoded The city of the home address of the person in the contact An email address for example EMAIL1 scott tiger oralce com An email address for example EMAIL2 scott tiger homemail co m The first line of a street address For example WADDRLINE1 123 Main Street A city for example WADDRCITY Boston A state or federal region for example WADDRSTATE CA WADDRSTATE Massa chusetts A ZIP or postal code For example WADDRZIP 02142 WADDRZIP D 80333 The name of a country for example WADDRCOUNTRY USS A The first line of a street address for example HADDRLINE1 2901 Armstrong Dr The name of a city for example HADDRCITY Boston PIM and Mail Table 8 3 Parameters of the Serialized Contact Group for Addressbook Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value HADDRSTATE No The state or federal region of the The full name or abbreviation of home address of the person in this the state For example contact HADDRSTATE Massachusetts HADDRSTATE CA HADDRZIP No The ZIP or postal code of this contact The ZIP or postal code For example HADDRZIP 90210 HADDRZIP D 80333 HADDRCOUNTRY No The country of the home address of A name of a country for example this contact NOTES Yes Text notes describing this contact Restriction white spaces special characters are enco
314. ly create portlets from existing Java based applications Java Java Servlets and JSPs It provides an abstraction to handle communication with Oracle Application Server Portal default classes to simplify portlet creation and exposes APIs for end user customization session storage security and logging Integrating Wireless with Other Components 16 17 Integrating Wireless with Oracle Application Server Portal For Wireless devices OraclePortal supports Portlets that generate Wireless XML To enable wireless access Portlets must generate Wireless XML and indicate this capability using the Java PDK framework The Java PDK framework uses a Provider xml file to discover the capabilities of the Portlets supported by a Provider Refer to OraclePortal s PDK Java User s Guide for more information Following is a overview of tags in the Provider xml file that indicates the wireless capabilities of a Portlet 1 lt acceptContentType gt Usage lt acceptContentType gt text vnd oracle mobilexml lt acceptContentType gt This value text vnd oracle mobilexml indicates that the portlet is capable of generating Wireless XML required for Wireless access A portlet can be enabled for both HTML PC Desktop and Wireless Access by indicating it can accept both the content types such as lt acceptContentType gt text vnd oracle mobilexml lt acceptContentType gt lt acceptContentType gt text html lt acceptContentType gt If the Portlet
315. mber of the SMSC Short Message Service Center The phone number or IP address of the WAP provider The USSD code for example 555 that precedes the destination number The time in seconds after which the session expires 3 34 Administrator s Guide Site Administration 3 6 1 9 Performance Monitor The Performance Monitor page enables you to configure the Wireless performance monitor including the parameters described in Table 3 8 Table 3 8 Parameters of the Performance Monitor Screen Parameter Description Enable Performance Logging Selecting this check box enables performance logging Delimiter for logged name value pair The delimiter for the logged name value pairs The default delimiter is This is a required parameter Delimiter for logger records The delimiter for the logged records The default is This is a required parameter Wakeup Frequency minute The number of minutes after which the logger thread wakes up to check for any new files in the process directory The default is one minute This is a required parameter Close Frequency second The number of seconds to close a file The default is 300 Batch Size for Performance logging The batch size for the performance logging The default is 15 This is a required parameter 3 6 1 10 Billing Framework The Billing Framework page enables you to configure the Oracle Application Server Wireless Billing Integration Framework which provi
316. mmerce Applications 5 From the left menu click Configure Parameters The Form Filler Administration appears and defaults to the Config tab Figure 8 3 The Config tab enables you to set the submission mode for the Form Filler mappings by selecting between the following options a Open Enables all users to submit mappings a Closed Restricts all users from submitting mappings a Restricted Only selected users can submit mappings The Config tab also includes the Auto Approve Mode Selecting this option approves all submitted mappings immediately These mappings do not need approval as they become effective immediately Figure 8 3 The Config Tab of the Form Filler Administration ORACLE _ FermFiller Administration p Submission Mode Configure the submission mode for mappings here Changes may take up to five minutes before they become effective iol Open Allow all users to submit mappings B Closed No users can submit mappings s Restricted Only a restricted list of users can submit mappings M Auto Approve AutoApprove makes submitted maps to be automatically approved The Existing Mappings tab Figure 8 4 enables you to search for edit and delete existing Form Filler mappings To retrieve a stored mapping either search for the mapping by URL or select Get All The mapping appears in the pane in the Stored Maps section of the screen To edit a mapping click on the mapping
317. mples INBOX Sent folder name The name of the folder where the sent messages are saved a Valid Values Any valid folder name on the Mail server a Default Value Sent a Examples SentItems Sent Can user use different server settings Whether the server domain or settings can be edited by the user true or false a Valid Values A boolean value true false a Default Value false a Examples true false Max Messages Fetched Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 49 PIM and Mail The maximum number of the messages fetched from the server per request a Valid Values Any integer value a Default Value 200 a Examples 9 200 Timeout Timeout connection limit to the Mail Server It is specified in milliseconds a Valid Values Any integer value a Default Value 2000 a Examples 2000 5000 a Email Configuration Java Driver Class This parameter is obsolete and is provided only for backward compatibility a Temporary directory This parameter is obsolete and exists only for backward compatibility The temporary directory for the current release is ORACLE_HOME wireless tmp mail a Audio Temporary Directory This parameter is now obsolete and exists only for backward compatibility The temporary audio directory for the current release is ORACLE_HOME j2ee OC4 _ Wireless applications modules modules web pim mail audiotemp a Audio Temporary Directory URL This parameter is now obsolete and exists only for ba
318. n Enter the deployment URL For example enter http mycontent server oracle com dateserv jsp Click Next The Caching Info page appears Note If you selected Multi Channel Application Non HTTP select HTTPAdapter as the Adapter and select that the Valid option Also you enter the URL in the Input Parameters screen in the URL Column Select this as a mandatory field Integrating Wireless with Other Components 16 13 Integrating Wireless with WebC ache Proceed to the Caching Information screen Step 6 for HTTP based applications Step 2 for non HTTP applications In this screen check the Cacheable checkbox and choose the Invalidation Frequency by specifying the Cardinal as 40 and Unit as Seconds causing all pages corresponding to the application in this case just one page to be cached for 40 seconds Click Finish to complete the master application Note This application does not have init initialization parameters so you can skip this step 3 Next you publish the master application as an application link using the Content Manager Click the Publish Content tab of the Content Manger to view all of the folders and applications at the root level From the browsing screen of the Content Manager click the Add Application Link button Select Date Serv as the master application and then click Next The General Information page appears Enter DateService in the Name field Skip to the
319. n Chapter 16 Integrating Wireless with Other Components 3 6 1 6 User Provisioning The User Provisioning page enables you to set the properties used by the Provisioning adapter Table 3 5 describes the properties for normal user provisioning Table 3 5 User Provisioning Properties Property Description Parent folder The folder for the user s home folder A new subfolder is created for every new user The default is Users Home Default groups The default group to which the user belongs The default is Users You can select or clear the group selection using Control click Disclose User Location Selecting this option enables the users location to be disclosed to a third party application Disclose User Identity Selecting this option enables the users identities to be disclosed to a third party application 3 6 1 7 Virtual Users A virtual user is a user who accesses a Wireless site but does not register When such a user accesses a Wireless site Wireless detects the user and creates a virtual user account for that user 3 32 Administrator s Guide Site Administration Table 3 6 describes the properties for the virtual user provisioning Table 3 6 Virtual User Properties Property Description Parent folder The parent folder for the virtual user s home folder A new subfolder is created for every new user The default is Users Home Default groups The default groups to which the user belo
320. n Link Information Element Description Application The master application on which the invoked the user s applications that is the application links published to the user s group are based Test Clicking the phone icon enables you to view the application on a phone simulator Visible If the column displays true then the object is visible and therefore accessible to an end user If false then the object is not visible Sequence The customized order in which applications and folders appear on output devices By default the display order of the applications is by name Group The group to which the application is assigned Last Modified The last time an object was modified For detailed information on the Edit Delete Move and Debug buttons refer to Section 5 3 These functions are identical to those in the Content Manager except that the User Manager only enables you to modify the attributes of applications which belong to the selected user s home folder you cannot modify the applications assigned to the selected user s group 4 7 Viewing Devices The User Manager enables you to manage a user s devices by clicking the View Devices button from the Browse User screen Clicking View Devices enables you to see all the devices belonging to a selected user as illustrated in Figure 4 6 The User Manager provides the same functionality as the Wireless Customization Portal by enabling you to add edit delete or validate a
321. n be accessed from a wireless device you must also provide a mobile Portlet On a wireless device the mobile Portlets are rendered as links and can be made to point to an application deployed on the Wireless server You can use Portal s JPDK framework to provide a linkPage that generates the appropriate link for your wireless service To point to a wireless service from a mobile portlet you can use following URL syntax in the Wireless XML target ___ REQUEST_NAME__ SESSION__ amp amp PAoid lt PAoid of Wireless Service gt Integrating Wireless with Other Components 16 19 Notification Engine Integration The Wireless server will replace all ___ lt Name gt __ to the correct values at runtime and will invoke an application defined in the Wireless repository The following is a sample link page lt page session false contentType text vnd oracle mobilexml gt lt SimpleHref target __ REQUEST_NAME__ PAoid PAoid amp amp ___ SESSION__ label Go gt My Wireless Service lt SimpleHref gt Mobile devices make the first request to OraclePortal server Portal redirects the device request to Wireless Server over HTTP and appends two parameters to the redirected URL The two query parameters are PAoid and PAhome Both PAoid and PAhome contain the Portal s object and service ID The typical syntax of the redirected URL are http Oracle Application Server WirelessSerrver port ptg rm PAoid lt OraclePo
322. n existing location mark CREDIT_CARD fieldl item5 lt LINK_LOC gt Transcoder application also called WML translator reformats WML documents and resources on the Web making them available on any devices by translating the remote WML resource into Oracle Application Server Wireless XML The Wireless XML is then transformed into the appropriate device specific markup language 8 5 4 1 Required Software The Transcoder application does not require any third party software 8 5 4 2 Configuration Parameters The Transcoder application includes the following configuration parameters Application Setup OMP URL The OMP reference to the group of URLs a Valid Values An OMP URL pointing to the Application Setup a Default Value omp oracle applications appsetup a Examples Navigation XML file Points to an XML file that can be accessed either through a URL or a file on server s local file system The XML contains the navigation specification Valid Values a AURL 8 102 Administrator s Guide a A fully qualified file name Default Value m Commerce Applications a Example http localhost 7777 modules transcoder navitems xml The sample Navigation XML file is as follows lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt Navigation gt lt NavigationItems gt lt Item target value home url label Home showAs Link preferredLocation Header gt lt Item target value service parent url
323. naseoraudhgesoutene SEA SES ER NE 6 4 Finding a Locale ts riris nn irene a O niea aa Ep areae aia danas EEE SEEE 6 5 Adding a LOCA eG s scisicccee cdecgs fe scocetee Van stetiy bp a Seed a A aA et 6 5 Editinga Locale segini iia oere avis a a agen teed astra 6 5 Deleting a Localessiico ieii aR EE E E E EA 6 5 Enabling the Default Locales ssnsn sssssssssessesrestesstsstsnentinstsrtesenssententestnnneneentesresnesnes 6 5 Resolymg LOCales ecccsc sie tnea o S e e e a aa E E e 6 7 Managing Sample Servicess nespesieoiniaans a assi s sna 6 8 Adding a Sample Application ccc nning isoina 6 8 Editing a Sample Service si s028 nni de ities A 6 10 Deleting arsam ple Service mestisa aerea aae edsn dedsesoute iea iA 6 10 Managing Foundation Services 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 3 1 7 3 2 7 3 3 7 4 7 4 1 7 4 2 7 4 3 7 5 7 5 1 7 5 2 7 5 3 7 5 4 7 6 7 7 7 7 1 BAE BVA AARE ATE E TT NEE OAE EEEE E A OE EAA 7 1 Logging into the Foundation Manager cccsccsccsssesesecsesssesescssseseececesssssseecsseseseseseneees 7 3 Managing DeVices u opterei siia eare aa a E aa a aaa Ea EEE aE Saa 7 4 Searching fopa DEVICE sc sinisiin i i ae aaa a teste teat das a S EELEE 7 5 Creating a Device ksiakss id i m n a n a iiaa a 7 5 Cloning a DEVICE rd settee entities EPE aE EE aA nana E E 7 11 Managing Transformers ccccc cece cece seeseseesesesssssseesesesssseesesesesesseeseseseseseesesenenssesees 7 12 Creating a New Transformer aieea ea a Eaa aee
324. ncel after Download stops the download operation Note In integrated mode if you have not yet performed the Single Sign On SSO login then Wireless redirects you to the SSO page the first time you click the Download button On the SSO page you enter a valid Superuser s user name and password Wireless then prompts you with the download dialog to specify the file location After that you remain at the SSO login page To return to the Wireless download page click on browser s Back button The next time you click the Download button you will not be redirected to the SSO page because you are already logged into SSO Figure 3 17 The Repository Download Screen In Standalone Mode Wireless Server System gt Wireless Server Administration gt Repository Objects Download Repository Objects Download Cancel Download Password Download Log File c temp activity log This is the file path on the download server Error Log File e temp errar lag This is the file path on the download server Download Type _ Object Filter Expression This expression applies to downloading all specific type of objects e g download all groups but not for downloading all objects Download All Objects Download All Adapters Download All Devices A Manmland All Aranna 3 6 3 2 Repository Objects Upload The Repository Objects Upload page Figure 3 18 invoked by selecting the Repository Objects Upload hyperl
325. ncludes the following call parameters and parameter groups which are described in Table 8 21 Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 41 PIM and Mail Table 8 21 The IFSAction Input Parameter Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value IFSAction Yes The type of action to UPLOAD for uploading a file to the Oracle Internet File be performed System server DOWNLOAD for downloading a file to the Oracle Internet File System server If the value is UPLOAD then IFSAction requires uploadIfsRequest If the value is DOWNLOAD then the downloadIfsRequest output is triggered uploadifsRequest Table 8 22 describes the parameters of the uploadifsRequest group This is an optional group Table 8 22 Parameters of the uploadifsRequest Group Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value LOCALPATH Yes The absolute local path of the file to be A string For example uploaded to the Oracle Internet File LOCALPATH private jde System Server ocs file doc a LOCALPATH c TEMP RES UME PDF OBJNAME No Enables the user to rename the uploaded A string For example file rather than keeping the file name given OBJNAME Renamed File doc in LOCALPATH Note This name must conform to the UNIX file system convention For example it cannot contain the back slash Output Parameters The Oracle Internet File System application includes the following output parameters downloadlfsinfo This optional
326. nd identifies the transformer used to convert content for the target device MIME Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions A mail type that defines the message structure for different 8 bit character sets and multi part messages Mobile Portal The interface where mobile device users access their Wireless applications OracleAS Wireless XML A set of DTDs and XML document conventions used by the Wireless to define content and internal objects PremiumSMS Billing Model The Async Listener enables users of SMS enabled phones to access content from the Internet To request such an application a mobile user sends a message containing SMS keywords describing the application to an Async account using a short address a number known as the Large Account The SMS keywords identify the application for example ST for stock quote applications The message goes Glossary 3 Glossary 4 through the network of a PremiumSMS operator to retrieve the content supplied by the Content Provider whose system listens for the SMS message sent to the Large Account The Content Provider processes the message and returns the requested information as a message to the user who is charged a premium on top of the standard SMS transport rate for mobile device issued requests The content provider and PremiumSMS operator or carrier both share this premium provisioning adapter The adapter used to create modify and delete user objects in the Wireless reposit
327. nd of the system log appear 5 3 8 Creating User Bookmarks The Content Manager enables you to create a bookmark a link enabling the user to quickly access an external resource such as Web page In addition to providing the user a this shortcut however Wireless enables you to create bookmarks that render their content on a variety of devices With Wireless a bookmark displays equally well on all of the different devices registered to a Wireless user because you can associate multiple URLs with a single Managing Content 5 17 Managing Application Links bookmark Each of these URLs supplies the markup suitable to the content type supported by the requesting device For example you create a bookmark myoracleBK which has the following two URLs a wwzw oracle com with the text html MIME type wap oracle com with the text hdml MIME type Logging in through a desktop browser a user sees myoracleBK Clicking this bookmark reveals the page www oracle com A user logging in from a device supporting the text hdml MIME type also sees myoracleBK but clicking this bookmark reveals the page wap oracle com Clicking Add Bookmark in the browsing screen invokes the New Bookmark screen which includes the parameters described in Table 5 8 Table 5 8 Parameters of the New Bookmark Screen Parameter Value Bookmark Name Description Sequence Cost Region Name Visible Personalizable The name of the bookmark T
328. nder Notification Event Sink in Component Services Figure 17 10 17 12 Administrator s Guide Configuring the Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server Figure 17 10 Component Services tii Component Services 3 10 xi Console Window Help Tree My Computer COM Applications COM QC Dead Letter Queue Listener COM Utilities IIS In Process Applications IIS Out Of Process Pooled Applications a IIS Utilities ic Notification Event Sink BRS Iasw NotificationSink 2 Interfaces H A _NotificationSink H IExStoreAsyncEvents Subscriptions asw NotificationSinkReg E Interfaces H _NotificationSinkReg Subscriptions Roles H a Svetem Annlication B Notification Notification A m 17 3 2 Creating an Exchange Notification Account You create an Exchange notification account to hold the notification event emails sent from the event sink The email address is configured in Oracle Application Server Wireless as Notification Account For the examples in this section create an exchange notification account called emailnotif This account must receive emails and support IMAP or POP3 17 3 3 Configuring the Notification Setting ASP When users set their notification settings Wireless invokes an ASP residing on the Exchange Server machine using HTTP The ASP then calls the Notif
329. ndering type you selected when setting the basic parameters for the folder Selecting the System Rendering Options If you select System as the rendering option then you can select from among the following sorting options that include ascending and descending sorting style for folders by ID a Name a Last Modified Date a Sequence Number a Access Count By default folders appear by sequence number then by name Managing Content 5 9 Managing Application Links Setting the Customized Rendering Options If you select the Custom rendering options then you select a folder or application with the appropriate rendering style Setting the Inherited Rendering Options If the folder is not a child of another folder or if none of its ancestor folders have a customized renderer then Wireless notes the inherited renderer as N A until the folder is moved under a parent folder with a customized renderer Use the Move function to place the folder within a folder configured with the appropriate rendering style See Section 5 3 10 for information on moving objects Figure 5 5 The Folder Rendering Screen 25s Control Content Publish Content Render Content Content gt Root Folders and Applications gt Commerce gt New Folder New Folder Rendering Sort by RETIN Msi Sc 0 le 5 3 3 Editing A Folder You use the Edit button to edit the values for a selected folder After you have modified the appropriate values c
330. nderlying Messaging Server For example to receive messages for a site address such as foo bar com you must know the mail server which hosts the account the protocol used IMAP or POP3 and the user name and password You must then create and configure an email driver instance so that messages sent to foo bar com can be retrieved 9 3 2 Enabling SMS Phone Access 1 Acquire one or more SMS phone numbers from the SMS carrier or aggregator They are used as the SMS entry points to the site Add the site addresses to the Wireless system as detailed in Section 3 3 1 The designated site addresses must be configured on the underlying Messaging Server to ensure the retrieval of messages addressed to the SMS phone number can be retrieved as is done in email Different drivers must be configured depending on the actual protocol of the SMS connectivity 9 3 2 1 Service Short Name Change Each pre configured Async enabled application is assigned a short name so the service is addressable to device users In other words a shortname is the keyword 9 20 Administrator s Guide Configuring Wireless for Notifications that device users use to identify which service they intend to invoke You use the Content Manager to create and edit short names For more information see Section 5 3 4 in Chapter 5 Managing Content 9 4 Configuring Wireless for Notifications This section discuses configuring email SMS pagers fax and voice for notifica
331. nding and receiving threads for the messaging driver to speed up dequeuing and enqueuing For more information see Section 13 2 13 4 Optimizing Data Feeder Performance Parsing input is a costly operation The performance of such operations depends largely on the amount of memory available to the Java Virtual machine JVM To handle a high feed size you can increase the heap size of the Data Feeder process Normally parsing XML feeds consume larger resources than CSV comma separated variable feeds In the test environment the following observations have been verified 13 8 Administrator s Guide Optimizing the Oracle HTTP Server a With a large XML feed of 25 MB a throughput of 43 data rows second was achieved by using a heap size of 512 MB a Incase of CSV feed of the same volume a throughput of 48 data rows second was achieved 13 5 Optimizing the Oracle HTTP Server This section discusses how to optimize performance of the Oracle HTTP Server OHS Each of the following section describes the directives that you can tune in the httpd conf file in OHS to enhance performance a Section 13 5 1 Max Clients a Section 13 5 2 MaxRequestsPerChild a Section 13 5 3 MaxSpareServers a Section 13 5 4 MinSpareServers a Section 13 5 5 Start Servers a Section 13 5 6 Timeout 13 5 1 Max Clients This is the maximum number of servers that can run An optimum number should be used based on load A low number caus
332. ng is available and enabled or the user s default Location Marks The Driving Directions Maps and Biz Directory applications use the Location Picker to acquire a location or locations from the user if the user does not have a 8 68 Administrator s Guide Location preferred location or if the user wants to change the location used for those applications This application integrates with positioning servers when available and is built upon the Oracle Application Server Wireless Location Application Component API 8 4 3 1 Configuring the Location Picker Application This application requires aWireless geocoding provider only when the geocoding of addresses is needed and requires the Wireless mobile positioning provider only when the positioning feature is needed The geocoding and mobile positioning are optional features Table 8 36 describes the software requirements for the Location Picker application Table 8 36 Software Requirements for the Location Picker Application Name External Providers From Instructions Geocoding Provider otn oracle com 2 0 See application providers Mobile Positioning otn oracle com 2 0 See application providers Provider 8 4 3 2 Configuring the Input Parameters of the Location Picker Application The Location Picker application includes the following input parameters a Web URL Reserved for Future Use a Valid Values a Default Value localhost a Examples a History stack size Specifi
333. ngs The default is Users You can select or clear the group selection using Control click Enable Virtual User Selecting this option enables a virtual user to create an account 3 6 1 8 WAP Provisioning You can create edit and delete WAP profiles using the Profile page which you access by selecting the WAP Provisioning hyperlink The Profile page displays a list of current WAP profiles You can also add a WAP profile by defining the following parameters Note The parameters differ depending on the bearer that you select Table 3 7 describes the WAP provisioning profile parameters Table 3 7 WAP Provisioning Profiles Parameter Value WAP Profile Name The name of the WAP profile You can name the profile for the WAP provider WAP Bearers A list of the transport technologies GSM CSD Circuit Switched Data CSD over a GSM Global System for Mobile communication network This is the basic transfer protocol in GSM phones GSM SMS Short Messaging Service over a GSM Global System for Mobile communication network Select this store and forward technology to enable alphanumeric messaging between mobile phones and such other platforms as email or voice mail GSM USSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data USSD over a GSM Global System for Mobile communication network USSD is both session and transaction oriented Managing the Wireless Server 3 33 Site Administration Table 3 7 WAP Provisioning Pr
334. nk pointing to portal home menu Displays a button or a menu item pointing to portal home both Displays both a hyperlink and a button or menu item pointing to portal home parent_menu Displays a button or menu item pointing to parent folder parent_link Displays a link pointing to parent folder a Default Value menu a Examples parent_menu The following three configuration parameters are deprecated Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 105 m Commerce Applications a WML MXML XSL File The location to the WML MobileXML stylesheet A default location is used if this parameter is not defined a Valid Values a Default Value a Examples a Translator Helper Class The class implementing the WML MXML translation a Valid Values a Default Value oracle panama module commerce translator W MLTransformImpl a Examples a WML Connection Class The class implementing the HTTP connection to the WML site a Valid Values a Default Value oracle panama module commerce translator WMLConnectionImp1 a Examples 8 5 4 3 Linking to the Transcoder Application You can link to the Translator application using the following virtual URL omp oracle services commerce translator The application can be invoked by passing the WML source URL in the request parameter XLTORSITE For example to invoke www oraclemobile com you can use the following URL in your Wireless XML omp oracle services commerce
335. nly the language part of L For example if en_US cannot be found then Mobile Studio searches only for en instead If the second search succeeds then Mobile Studio returns en and stops the search If Mobile Studio finished the search without finding the locale then Mobile Studio returns the default locale of the default site if that default is enabled If after Step 2 Mobile Studio still cannot find the preferred locale then it returns the locale en Adding Additional Locales If you require a locale that is not among the default locales then you must do the following to ensure that Mobile Studio These instructions illustrate how to add Hindi hi as a locale 1 Provide a DefaultSite_hi properties file or use Mobile Studio s resource administration pages to provide a value of locale hi for each of the resources that must be changed To add the file to the application a From the Wireless root directory navigate to iaswv20 wireless lib and find the studio jar file b Unjar the file and add DefaultSite_hi properties to the extracted files c Jar all the files back into studio jar Provide the messages_hi properties file for messages To add the file to the application a From the Wireless root directory navigate to iaswv20 wireless server classes messages oracle panama studio b Insert messages_hi properties into that directory Provide the ommsg_hi js file for javascript messages Administering Mobi
336. nnels Oracle Application Server Single Sign On also integrates with the Oracle Internet Directory OID an LDAP server that stores among other things valid end user authentication information such as passwords and digital certificates The user information stored in OID is replicated to the Wireless meta data schema when a user logs in or through asynchronous synchronization from OID to the Wireless schema Table 10 2 lists the user attributes stored in OID that are replicated in Wireless schema 10 10 Administrator s Guide Configuring the Security Infrastructure to Support Wireless Table 10 2 User Attributes Stored in the Wireless Schema Attribute Name Description orclCommonNickNameAttribute userPassword orclPasswordHint orclPasswordHintAnswer orclWirelessAccountNumber orclPassword Verifier orclCommonPIN displayName orclIlsEnabled preferredLanguage orclTimeZone orclDateOfBirth orclGender The user name used for authentication for all channels except voice By default this is cn as specified in OID configuration The user password used for authentication for all channels except voice The password hint The answer to the password hint The account number used for authentication from voice channel This must be comprised of digits only The PIN used for voice authentication This must be comprised of digits only The display name of the user A flag whether the user is enabled The
337. not need to specify the format type in this URI as Wireless selects the audio file format appropriate to the user s device The URI of the audio file for example a wav file read aloud by voice reader software along with the service in a menu listing You do not need to specify the format type in this URI as Wireless selects the audio file format appropriate to the user s device 5 14 Administrator s Guide Managing Application Links Table 5 7 The Additional Information Parameters for an Application Link Parameter Value Region Name Visible Personalizable The area such as a continent country or city that is associated with the application If you assign a region to an application link then users can only view that application link when they are in the assigned region Select this option to make the application link visible and therefore accessible to the end user If you do not select this option then end users cannot see or access this application link You can opt not to select this option for application links which are under construction Selecting this option enables end users to customize their user views in the Wireless Customization Portal or on the mobile device for reordering hiding or showing this application link 5 3 5 Editing an Application Link The editing screen enables you to change or update the parameter values for a selected application link To access the editing screen
338. nput parameter For each master alert the system generates a table in the database The system generates a column within this table for each input or output parameter The data type of an input or output parameter is used as the column data type when the system generates this table This field cannot be edited For most parameters this value represents the default value for the parameter set using the Service Manager If you specify a default value using the Content Manager then this new default value replaces the default value set in the master alert by the service designer If a default value exists then a user does not have to enter any information in this field when subscribing to an alert Step 4 Setting the Trigger Conditions for the Alert You use the Trigger Condition screen to enable the end user to set the conditions that invoke an alert on the Wireless Customization For example if you create an alert notifying users of a stock price you can set the alert conditions that allow an end user to request an alert when the stock has risen above or fallen below a certain price Table 5 15 describes the parameters of the Trigger Condition screen Managing Content 5 31 Managing Alerts Deprecated Table 5 15 Parameters of the Trigger Condition Screen Field Description Name The name of the alert trigger for the master alert This field cannot be edited Caption The label describing the trigger parameter used by Wir
339. ns between an originating address and a destination address This application requires aWireless routing provider as described in Table 8 33 Table 8 33 Required Software for the Driving Direcation Application Name External Provider s Instructions From Routing Provider otn oracle com See application providers 2 0 8 4 2 1 Configuration Parameters The Driving Directions application includes the following input parameters a Web URL Reserved for future use a Valid Values Any valid URL a Default Value Localhost a Examples localhost a Records per Page Description Indicates how many steps are displayed per page a Valid Values A non negative integer a Default Value 9 a Examples 9 Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 65 Location a Application Setup OMP URL The OMP reference to the URL group a Valid Values OMP URLs a Default Values OMP URLs a Examples omp oracle applications appsetup a CatSpeech Library Code The concatenated speech library code for professional audio recordings a Valid Values A string value a Default Value Location Router a Examples Location 8 4 2 2 Linking to the Driving Directions Application You link to the Driving Directions application through the following virtual URL omp oracle services location directions Input Call Parameters The Driving Directions application includes the following input call parameters which are described in Table 8 34 Table
340. nsole See the WebCache Configuration Guide for details on how to perform this task a Provide an invalidation port the default value is 4001 This should be the same as the invalidation port specified from the WebCache administration console See the WebCache Configuration Guide for details on how to perform this task a Enter a timeout value for requests made to WebCache the default value is 20 seconds The timeout must be at least five seconds less than the request timeout value from the WebCache administration console See the WebCache Configuration Guide for details on how to perform this task a Click OK after the changes have been made Figure 16 5 The System Manager s WebCache Configuration Screen Wireless Server System gt Wireless Server Administration gt WebCache WebCache Cancel OK Enable WebCache M WebCache Server URL http localhost 1100 ptgm S Invalidation Password D E Invalidation Port PO WebCache Timeout seconds Doo Cancel oK 16 2 1 2 Creating a Cache Enabled Master Application The steps detailed in Section 16 2 1 1 described how to enable caching for the Wireless site For the cache to be of use you must create master applications that can be cacheable To do this you use the Caching Information page of the Service Manager s Application Creation Wizard You access this wizard by clicking Create Application in the application browsing screen If you opted to create
341. ntent Manager 5 2 Accessing the Content Manager After you log in to the Wireless Tools you select the Content Manager by clicking the Content tab Note You must be granted either the Superuser or Content Manager roles to access the Content Manager The Content Manager defaults to the Publish Content tab Figure 5 1 The Content Manager organizes the creation distribution and publishing of applications into the following tabs described in Table 5 1 Table 5 1 Tabs of the Content Manager Tab Functions Publish Content This tab includes functions to create edit and delete bookmarks folders and application links Access Control Content This tab includes functions to create user groups and assign applications to groups Render Content This tab enables you to group users home folders by community or by provider Categorize Content This tab enables you to group applications by category You can also select the access points for these categories Each of these tabs includes a browsing screen which enables you to create edit or delete an object Managing Content 5 3 Managing Application Links Figure 5 1 The Content Manager Logout viewLog Help Wireless Acce ntrol Conten Publish Content nde ani jorize Co Search Type Any x Category Any z You may use asterisks as wildcards in your search Content gt Root Folders and Applications Welcome orcladmin
342. nter the URL in this field then deployment is disabled The name of the branding that is the look and feel which is used as the default This is pre seeded with the value Default Application providers can both brand Mobile Studio by customizing its appearance and content and integrate it with an existing Web site To substitute a branding other than Default enter the name of another branding in this field For more information on branding refer to the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide Select this option to enable the Web services feature of Mobile Studio By default this option is not selected that is the flag is set to false By selecting this option Mobile Studio s interface displays an additional tab that includes functions that enable developers to register the Web services called from J2ME MIDIlets After you define Mobile Studio configuration parameters click OK Note You must restart the Wireless server for Mobile Studio configuration settings to take effect 6 3 Accessing Mobile Studio Administration Access Mobile Studio main page at the following URL http lt studio_server gt lt studio_port gt studio admin where lt studio_server gt and lt studio_port gt are the name of the host and port number running Mobile Studio instance These are configured in the Oracle Installer Note Mobile Studio has been optimized for the latest versions of the Netscape and Internet Ex
343. nvoked in the last 10 minutes Number of J2ME Applications Downloaded The number of J2ME applications downloaded in the last 10 minutes Number of Notifications Sent The number of notifications sent in the last 10 minutes Number of Messages Sent The number of messages sent in the last 10 minutes Number of Messages Received The number of messages received in the last 10 minutes 3 5 Site Performance On the Site Performance page Figure 3 14 the Response and Load section displays the same type of performance data as the mid tier but the data is for the entire Wireless Site You can also select the View Data options for the time interval of the performance data The choices are Last 5 minutes Last 10 minutes default selection Last 30 minutes Last 60 minutes Last 1 day Last 7 days Last 31 days Managing the Wireless Server 3 21 Site Performance Note You can select these time frame viewing options on any Wireless performance page Figure 3 14 The Site Performance Screen Partial View Wireless Server System gt Wireless Server View Data Last 10 minutes gt Wireless Server Page Refreshed Apr 8 2003 1 41 01 PM Home Site Performance Site Administration O O O OOOO The metrics on this page apply to all wireless servers of the Wireless Site A Wireless Site consists of one or more wireless servers which share the same database Response and Load
344. o a Examples no no no no no yes no Query Link Names The caption for the links on the result list Values can include LINK1 or nope For example nope nope nope LINK1 LINK1 a Valid Values nope Do not link the attribute to any other query search Any other query link name a Default Value nope nope nope nope nope LINK1 nope a Example nope nope nope nope nope LINK1 nope a Link Names A system assigned name to internal links Defaults to LINK1 a Valid Values LINK1 a Default Value LINK1 a Query Link Name The query associated with current link Defaults to Q1 a Valid Values Q1 a Default Value Q1 a Link Refer Attributes Specifies the comma separated list of result sub attributes used in the linked query For example cn sn a Valid Values Any valid attribute in the LDAP server a Default Value cn a Example cn sn a Link Bind Attributes Specifies a comma separated list of filter attributes to which the Link Refer Attributes are bound For example givenname sn a Valid Values Any valid attribute in the Result List Attributes 8 30 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail a Default Value cn a Examples givenname sn Link Attributes Display Name A comma separated list of the Query Result List Attributes displayed in the link For example givenname sn a Valid Values Any valid attribute in the query result list a Default Value givenname sn a Example givenname sn Max Records Per
345. o The country of the destination A string For example location DCOUNTRY US DLAT No The latitude of the destination Double For example location DLAT 37 2433 DLNG No The longitude of the destination Double For example location DLNG 122 3452 DNAME No The name of the destination A string For example location DNAME Golden Gate Park Output Parameters The Driving Directions application includes the following output parameters described in Table 8 35 Table 8 35 Output Parameter of the Driving Directions Application Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value STATUS No The status of a mobile call OK CANCEL Cancelled 8 4 3 Location Picker The Location Picker application enables users to pick and manage their frequently accessed locations Using this application a user can specify a location that can be used by another application such as the Driving Directions application This location can be the user s default location the current location if mobile positioning is enabled a Location Mark selected by the user a recent location used by the user or a new location to be entered by the user The Location Picker application is used by other applications to acquire a location from the user When used directly by the user Location Picker provides management of the user s Location Marks and allows the user to set a preferred location which is either the user s current location when mobile positioni
346. o point security In this deployment scenario the email server and the application server both reside within the same secure domain at an enterprise other than the carrier This solution secures communication from the carrier to the enterprise email server by establishing a TLS or SSL secured connection such as Secure SMTP In this scenario the wireless device uses the carrier s system to retrieve the email message and in turn the carrier system communicates with the email server using a TLS or SSL secured connection Unfortunately this solution is not end to end secure given the fact that the wireless carrier can see the email message before it is sent to the end user Symmetric Key encryption security Certain devices such as RIM s Blackberries are built in with symmetric encryption capabilities to access corporate email In this case the deployment assumptions are the same as those for the Point to point security scenario However email communication is secured by encrypting the email at the enterprise side with a shared encryption key which is also present at the wireless device Under this solution the link between the carrier and the email server does not have to be secured as the payload is encrypted at the application layer This benefit of this solution is that it is end to end private The limitation of this solution is that it assumes a pre existing relationship between the enterprise sending the email and the end user th
347. od returns the message is saved in a database persistently but is not delivered 13 2 Administrator s Guide Transport Performance Monitoring Total Number of Sending Requests The total time that the sending method is called by the client process A sending method called once to send a message to a set of destinations counts as a single sending request Total Number of Sending Requests Sent The total number of successful calls where a message is delivered to a proper gateway and its receipt is acknowledged The client process can call the sending method many times to send many messages Some of these requests fail as in the case where a destination cannot be reached Other requests could be undergoing processing Total Number of Sending Requests Failed The total number of all calls that are known to have failed Average Receiving Process Time The performance of the listener in terms of the time taken by the onMessage call back The server side performance metrics include Average Sending Process Time The performance of a driver in terms of the time taken by the sending method of the driver The driver performance is measured by delivery type for example SMS process time the time taken by a driver to send a message to the proper gateway dequeue time and driver process time When you measure the performance of the transport system you can deduct the process time because the transport system is waiting while the dr
348. ofiles Parameter Value GPRS General Packet Radio Service GPRS Select this bearer technology to use WAP on a per transaction basis GPRS enables services to be always on a GPRS customer does not have to invoke a service to receive content WAP Gateway Proxy The address of the WAP proxy server For GSM CSD it is an IP address For GSM SMS this is service or phone number For GSM USSD this is either an IP address or an MSISDN number This is a required field Port The port number The default port numbers are Secure WAP Session Phone Model Home Page GSM CSD Parameters Call Type Call Speed Authentication Type ISP Name ISP Login Name ISP Login Password GSM SMS Parameters SMSC Address USSD Parameters Proxy Type USSD Service Code Timeout a 9200 connection less a 9201 connection oriented 9202 secure and connection less a 9203 secure and connection oriented Selecting this option enables WTLS Wireless Transport Layer Security The brand and model of the wireless phone The home page of the ISP provider accessed by the WAP user A drop down list of the call types analog or ISDN used for the connection The call speed of the connection Select one of the following protocols used for user authentication a PAP Password Authentication Protocol a CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol The name of the Internet service provider ISP The user name The user s password The nu
349. olders Visible If the column displays true then the object is visible and therefore accessible to an end user If false then the object is not visible and the user cannot access it Test Clicking the phone icon enables you to view the application on a simulator Sequence The order in which applications and folders appear on output devices By default these appear in order by sequence number and then by name You can enter values in the sequence fields to rearrange the order in which the applications and folder appear By default Wireless sorts applications and folders in ascending order by sequence number then by name Group The user group to which the object is assigned Last Modified The last time the object was modified Note In the Search field you can find an object by entering a SQL LIKE clause pattern matching text or For example entering Per in the Search field returns all objects beginning with per 5 3 2 Creating a Folder You can organize your repository objects into a hierarchy by creating subfolders These subfolders which can represent topic areas can be nested into other subfolders When you create a subfolder the Content Manager displays it as a hyperlink in the screen allowing you to drill down or traverse deeper into the hierarchy with each successive click Wireless displays the structure of the hierarchy as a navigation path Figure 5 3 enabling you to see the level that you current
350. ole access the User Manager tool For more information see Table 4 1 4 1 1 Assigning User Roles Wireless users are assigned according to a user s responsibilities These roles which are described in Table 4 1 encompass all of the Wireless resources from server management and configuration application development and publishing help desk functions to subscription management 4 2 Administrator s Guide Overview Table 4 1 Wireless User Roles User Role Description Available Tools Application Users assigned the Application Developer role perform Service Manager Developer the following functions Create modify delete and test applications a Publish applications to the Application Developer s folder Create modify and delete notifications Create modify and delete data feeders a Register and delete J2ME Web services Develop preset definitions Foundation Users assigned the Foundation Developer role perform Foundation Manager Developer the following functions Content Manager a Create modify and delete devices Create modify and delete transformers a Create modify and delete regions a Create modify and delete digital rights policies Create modify and delete API scan policies Users assigned the Content Manager role perform the Content Manager following functions Manage application folders and bookmarks a Create application links based on Application D
351. om the detail page select Administration The administration page appears Figure 17 17 Select the Microsoft Exchange checkbox and then click OK After you have completed this configuration start or restart the Notification Event Collector process Figure 17 17 The Administration Page for a Notification Event Collector Process Wireless Server System gt Wireless Server gt notificationeventcollector1 Notification Event Collector notificationeventcollector1 Home Administration Notification Event Collector Process Configuration Process Notification Events from the Following Components I Oracle Workflow M Microsoft Exchange Home Administration No further configuration is required for the Notification Event Handler process Note Be sure that the Notification Event Collector Process has been started For more details of managing standalone processes see Section 3 3 4 2 17 22 Administrator s Guide Glossary adapter A dynamically loaded Java class that acquires content from an external source such as a Web site or a database and converts the content into Mobile XML Pre built adapters include the Web Integration adapter SOL adapter and Strip adapter Adapter Result format A general user interface independent content format Content in Adapter Result format requires conversion to Simple Result format before it can be converted to the final target format Ap
352. om the same client are always redirected to the same Wireless server process If one process goes down then the fault tolerance feature is supported for both stateful and stateless requests as follows a Stateless Requests Fault tolerance is achieved by redirecting the client to another working process a Stateful Requests The session state is propagated to the processes within the same island which enables another process in that same island to pick up the request from a given client if a failover occurs 14 3 Clustering Configuration This section describes how to configure the Oracle Http Server OHS Oracle Process Management and Notification OPMN and Oracle Containers for Java OC4J 14 3 1 Configuring Oracle Http Server OHS The configuration file for OHS is httpd conf which includes mod_oc4j conf located in ORACLE_HOME Apache Apache conf directory The mounting point from HTTP request to the Wireless server clustering instance is specified in the mod_ oc4j conf as follows LoadModule oc4j_module libexec mod_oc4j so lt IfModule mod_oc4 j c gt Oc4jMount ptg OC4J_Wireless Oc4jMount ptg OC4J_Wireless Oc4jMount modules OC4J_Wireless Oc4jMount modules OC4J_Wireless lt IfModule gt When installing the Wireless server from Oracle Universal Installer OUI these lines should be automatically populated in the mod_oc4j conf file 14 3 2 Configuring Oracle Process Management and Notification OPMN
353. oming Mail Server Name The incoming email server name If the protocol is Esmail then this parameter points to the Oracle Internet Directory OID server a Valid Values A string value a Default Value localhost a Examples globalimap mycomp com mailserver foo com Incoming Mail Server Port The incoming email server port If the protocol is Esmail then this parameter points to the Oracle Internet Directory OID server a Valid Values Any integer value a Default Value 143 a Examples 143 110 4032 Usually it is 143 for IMAP 110 for POP3 and 4032 for Oracle Collaboration Suite Mail protocol The mail protocol supported by the mail server a Valid Values imap pop3 email a Default Value imap a Examples imap pop3 esmail Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 47 PIM and Mail Note For the inbox filters for the Mail application enter the Oracle Internet Directory OID server and the port as Mail Server and Mail Server Port instead of the IMAP server and port Also select esmail as the Mail protocol For more information about Inbox Filters see the documentation for Oracle Unified Messaging which ships with the Oracle Collaboration Suite Copy the following JARS from the Oracle Collaboration Suite middle tier to the ORACLE_HOME wireless lib on the Oracle Application Server Wireless middle tier a ORACLE_ HOME jlib esmail_sdkjar a ORACLE_ HOME jlib escommon jar a ORACLE HOME jlib esldap ja
354. on Picker application Table 8 37 Output Parameters of the Location Picker Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value CN No The company name A string For example CN Oracle Corp FL No The first line of the A string For example FL 500 Oracle Parkway address SL No The second line of the A string For example SL Redwood City CA address LL No The last line of the A string For example LL US address BL No The block A string For example BL Block 400 CI No The city A string For example CI Redwood City CT No The county A string For example CT San Mateo ST No The state A string For example ST CA PC No A postal code A string For example PC 94065 PCE No A postal code extension A string For example PCE 5423 CO No the country A string For example CO US LT No latitude Double For example LT 37 2433 LN No longitude Double For example LN 122 3452 8 72 Administrator s Guide Location Table 8 37 Output Parameters of the Location Picker Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value N No The name A string For example N Golden Gate Park LMN No The name of the A string For example LMN Office Location Mark STATUS No The status of the OK application call CANCEL Cancelled 8 4 4 Maps The Maps application provides broad and detailed maps for a given location supports map tiling and image map transformation for different devices This application integrates with the Dri
355. on described in Section 16 2 1 3 For the sample application the JSP is as follows to ensure that the page expires after 10 seconds rather than the default of 40 seconds lt 3 page language java gt lt 3 page import Jjava text SimpleDateFormat gt lt 0 page import Jjava util Date gt page session false gt page contentType text html charset iso 8859 1 gt lt SimpleResult gt lt SimpleMeta cache yes tt1 300 gt lt SimpleContainer gt lt SimpleText gt lt SimpleTextItem gt lt Date date new Date SimpleDateFormat formatter new SimpleDateFormat yyyy MM dd G at hh mm ss a zzz 5 gt lt formatter format date gt lt SimpleTextItem gt lt SimpleText gt lt SimpleContainer gt lt SimpleResult gt 16 2 1 8 ESI Headers Responses from the content source may contain ESI headers as part of HTTP headers that can dictate cache expiration behavior Using ESI headers entail no Integrating Wireless with Other Components 16 15 Integrating Wireless with Oracle Application Server Portal changes to the Mobile XML The following ESI header expires the page is 30 seconds Surrogate Control max age 30 60 content ESI 1 0 For more information on ESI headers please refer to the WebCache Developer s Guide 16 3 Integrating Wireless with Oracle Application Server Portal Oracle Application Server Portal OracleAS Portal is a Web based application model for buil
356. on file a ORACLE SERVICES COMMERCE FORMFILLER HEURISTIC a The default value for this parameter is oracle panama app services modules formfiller WalletGuessingHeuristic ORACLE_SERVICES_COMMERCE_FORMFILLER_ SUGGESTIONS _ The Form Filler application uses this prefix to define the fixed mappings for the guessing heuristics The key must be appended to this prefix and inserted as an input parameter for the Form Filler application to map a key to a value The key is first matched against the label and then the variable name of the input fields for the new mapping The administrator must enter the correct values for the keys matching them for example to the Wallet fields For example an administrator matches the values to the keys to the wallet fields as follows ORACLE_SERVICES_COMMERCE_FORMFILLER_SUGGESTIONS_Credit Card Default Value CREDIT CARD CC_NUMBER 8 5 1 4 Using the Form Filler Administration The Form Filler Administration enables you to manage settings manipulate stored mappings and approve pending mappings To access the Form Filler Administration 1 Select the Content Manager The Content Manger defaults to the Publish tab displaying the folders and applications at root level The Root Folders and Services screen appears 2 Select the Commerce folder 3 Select Form Filler 4 Click Edit The Edit Application screen appears Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 77 m Co
357. on in the contact for example NOTES This the chief of staff in CCC Co 8 18 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail 8 3 2 Calendar The Calendar application enables users to manage their schedule using mobile access to calendaring servers such as Oracle Collaboration Suite Oracle Calendar Server Microsoft Exchange and Lotus Domino Required Software Table 8 8 lists the required third party software for the calendar application Table 8 8 Software Requirements for the Calendar Application Name From Version Oracle Collaboration Suite 2 Oracle Calendar Server 5 2 MS Exchange 5 5 Lotus Domino Server R5 Note To connect applications to Microsoft Exchange and the Lotus Domino server see Section 8 3 10 1 Connecting to the Oracle Collaboration Suite To connect to the Oracle Collaboration Suite copy all of the native libraries from ORACLE_HOME ocal sdk lib on the middle tier of the Oracle Collaboration Suite to ORACLE_HOME wireless lib on the Oracle Application Server Wireless middle tier Configuration Parameters The Calendar application s configuration parameters include the following a Can user use different server settings Determines if the current application settings can be edited by a user a Valid Values A boolean value true false a Default Value false a Examples true false Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 19 PIM and Mail a Calendar Java Driver c
358. on link creation wizard s Master Application screen Step 1 in the wizard To access this configuration page select Master Application from the editing screen s menu From the Master Application editing screen click Configure The configuration screen appears 5 3 6 Testing an Application Link The Content Manager enables you to test a service and display it on a phone simulator To test an application link 1 From the browsing screen select the application link that you wish to test 2 Click the telephone icon in the Run Application column which is located in the same row as the selected application link The phone simulator appears displaying the application link Note To test or debug an OC4J adapter based application you must copy the jsp into the web application modules directory For example if the input parameter URL is apps myservice jsp then myservice jsp must be copied to wireless j2ee applications webtool webtool web modules apps 5 3 7 Debugging an Application Link The Content Manager enables you to simultaneously view an application link on a phone simulator in Wireless XML or device markup languages Transformers in the form of XSLT style sheets or Java classes convert the content returned by Wireless adapters into the format best suited to a particular platform To test a service 1 On the browsing screen select an application link 2 Click Debug The Debug Application Link sc
359. on the server for users to retrieve The default period is 7 days Delivery Channel Settings XMS supports implicit device or user addressing by specifying the Wireless user name XMS selects the best device for the user to receive messages based on such factors as messaging content application hints and user preferences If Wireless cannot send a message to one device then XMS fails over to the next device in selection order and transforms the content for that device You define the values the Delivery Channel Settings section by specifying the priority or failover of the XMS message delivery types and by adding the appropriate reply addresses for the delivery types Managing the Wireless Server 3 51 Site Administration 3 6 2 6 Location Related The location related configuration includes the following a Location Management For mobile positioning configuration mobile positioning provider information and configuration and mobile ID names For more information see the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide a Location Services For configuration options relating to geocoding routing mapping traffic and business directory services For more information see the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide a Location Event Server For options relating to the location event server For more information see the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide Location Mark Address Forma
360. on to create new COM components for DLL Figure 17 8 Import or Install a Component Welcome to the COM Component Install Wizard Import or Install a Component Please choose whether you want to install a new component or install components that are already registered oP I Install new component s AD Import component s that are already registered Install new event class es Application Notification Event Sink Computer My Computer 5 On the Install new components window Figure 17 9 click Add and then locate the NotificationSink dll file Integrating Wireless Notification with Microsoft Exchange 17 11 Configuring the Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server Figure 17 9 Install New Components Welcome to the COM Component Install Wizard Install new components Please specify the file s that contain the components you want to install Click Add to choose the file s that contain the components you want to install Eiles to install File Contents Add C Soracle NotificationSink dll components typeLib C oracle RegCom dll components typeLib Remove Components found Component Properties Interfaces lv Details NotificationSink COM found COM found NotificationSinkReg lt Back Cancel 6 Click Add and locate the RegCom dll file 7 Click Next On the Thank you page click Finish to close the window Iasw NotificationSink and Iasw NotificationSinkReg appear u
361. onents table select Wireless The Wireless home page appears Figure 2 2 2 2 Administrator s Guide Starting the Oracle Application Server Wireless Server Figure 2 2 The System Manager Home Page Partial View Application Server bi 101116 dsunrdf08 us oracle com gt Wireless Wireless Page Refreshed May 7 2003 2 59 18 PM Home Site Performance Site Administration General Response and Load al Active Sessions text Status Unavailable Average Response Time seconds 0 0 Version 9 0 4 0 0 Average Session Duration seconds 0 0 Applications Invoked J2ME Applications Downloaded Notifications Sent Messages Sent Messages Received TIP This data is based on the last 10 minutes Host dsunrdf06 us oracle com OC4J Instance OC4J Wireless Configuration Status Not Configured Related Link Basic Site Configuration Required configuration for the Wireless Site Web Based Applications i i Web based applications are the OC4J applications running in the Wireless OC4J instance They must be started and Etant OGA instance Stop OC4J instance mae TEN 3 and oN the OC4J instance Standalone Processes Standalone processes are the Wireless processes which can be started and stopped individually A standalone process Add Process can also be added or deleted Enable Disable J Start Stop Delete 2 1 1 Configuring the Wireless Server If the Configuration Status displays Not Configured as i
362. ons to create custom notification criteria for individual users the notification event collector uses these configurations to retrieve email notification messages These parameters are unique across the whole system despite the configurations of the individual middle tier instances There should be at most one Microsoft Exchange Server configured for access You modify these Site level configuration parameters using the System Manager which you access through the Oracle Enterprise Manager Application Server Control For more information on accessing Wireless through the Application Server Control see Section 2 3 17 4 2 Configuring the Microsoft Exchange Notification Event Settings From the Component Configuration section of the Administration page select Microsoft Exchange Notification Event Settings located under Notification Event Collector The Microsoft Exchange Notification Event Settings screen appears Figure 17 16 This screen is divided into two sections the Microsoft Exchange Server section and the Notification Event Settings section Use the Microsoft Exchange Server section to enter accessing information to the Microsoft Exchange Server use the Notification Event Settings section to configure the accessing information which is specific to wireless notification Integrating Wireless Notification with Microsoft Exchange 17 19 Exchange Notification Administration in Oracle Application Server Wireless Figure 17 16 The
363. ontrol 10 9 accountability 10 2 authentication 10 1 authorization 10 2 availability 10 2 communication data privacy 10 13 data integrity 10 2 non repudiation 10 2 10 21 storage data privacy 10 2 through email 10 18 through SMS 10 16 through voice 10 20 wired deployment 10 3 wireless deployment 10 3 Short Messaging application configuration 8 54 configuration parameters 8 54 linking to 8 55 overview 8 53 Single Sign Off wireless 11 8 site administration configuring URLs 3 28 management through the System Manager 3 1 site administration 3 26 3 43 3 45 configuring folder display 3 39 configuring HTTP HTTPS 3 26 3 27 configuring Mobile Studio 3 36 configuring Notification Engine 3 47 configuring the Billing Integration Framework 3 35 configuring the device properties 3 39 configuring the events and listeners 3 40 configuring the JDBC connection pool 3 31 configuring the Messaging Server 3 50 configuring the Messaging Server client 3 48 configuring the Multi Channel Server 3 37 configuring the Performance Monitor 3 35 configuring the Provisioning Server 3 53 configuring the site locale 3 31 configuring the SSL certificates 3 30 configuring the XMSC 3 50 configuring WAP profiles 3 33 site locale configuring 3 31 site performance 3 21 monitoring location related performance 3 26 monitoring the Async Listener 3 23 monitoring the Messaging Server 3 24 monitoring the Multi Chann
364. or digital rights policies appears Figure 7 12 displaying a list policies in the repository Figure 7 12 The Browsing Screen for Digital Rights Policies Digital Rights Policies You are logged in as Orcladmin Digital Rights Policies Create Enable Disable Delete Edit Testi F 7 Use 3 Times p Gea 7 7 1 Creating a Digital Rights Policy Wireless provides a two step wizard which enables you to create a digital rights policy To access this wizard click Create in the browsing screen Step 1 Selecting the Digital Rights Policy Package Type There are two types of digital rights policy packages one is a default package provided by Wireless The other is a customized package that you can plug into the Wireless platform If you select this customized package then you must specify the full class name of the packaging class which implements the oracle wireless me server tools drm DRMPackager interface To create a digital rights policy click Create The Digital Rights Policy detail attributes page appears Figure 7 13 7 26 Administrator s Guide Managing Digital Rights Policies Figure 7 13 Entering the Attributes for a Digital Rights Policy Digital Rights Policies Foundation gt Digital Rights Policies gt New Digital Rights Policy You are logged in as Orcladmin New Digital Rights Policy Name JAccessCount Description Downloads of Apps by Count Usage Policy
365. or the primary phone number The user s personal identification number PIN requested when the user logs in using the primary phone number that is the account number This field is required when creating new user Managing Users 4 9 Creating Users Table 4 3 Parameters of the Create User Screen Parameter Value PIN Confirmation Email Address Mobile Station ID External Repository ID Virtual User Device ID User Type Gender Date of Birth Enabled Language Time Zone User Home Root 4 10 Administrator s Guide The confirmation for the user s personal identification number This field is required when creating new user The user s email address This is a required field and it appears only in the Create User screen A user device with this email address is created for the user The user s mobile phone number or the MSISDN mobile subscriber ISDN for GSM Global System for Mobile communication services Wireless uses this ID to track the position of the user A mapping of a user from the Wireless schema to a unique ID of that user in another user database An ID generated for unregistered users who access a Wireless site When an unregistered user accesses a Wireless site Wireless detects the user and creates a virtual user account for that user Wireless traces this user by phone number or by another identification number sent from the user s device This number is the Virtual Device
366. orwarded RECIPIENT_FAX Yes The destination fax number A string For example Example RECIPIENT_FAX 1 650 555 4576 Output Parameters Table 8 19 describes the output parameters of the Fax application Table 8 19 Output Parameters of the Fax Module Parameter Mandatory Description Valid Value sendNewFaxResult Yes Whether the fax was A string For example successfully sent or not sendNewFaxResult Fax has been successfully submitted for sending checkFaxStatusResult Yes The fax status A string For example checkFaxStatusResult Sending 50 deleteFaxResult Yes Whether the fax was A string For example successfully deleted or not deleteFaxResult Fax successfully deleted forwardFaxResult Yes Whether the fax was A string For example successfully forwarded or not forwardFaxResult Fax has been successfully submitted for forwarding 8 38 Examples To send a fax you configure the FAXTODO parameters as follows FAXTODO NEWFAX RECIPIENT_FAX 1 650 555 5000 MESSAGE Hello world sendNewFaxResult Fax has been successfully submitted for sending To check the status of a fax you configure the FAXTODO parameters as follows Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail FAXTODO STATUS faxID 16543 checkFaxStatusResult OK 8 3 5 Oracle Internet File System The Oracle Internet File System application enables you to browse online files and select files for faxing or sent with email Table 8 20 lists the r
367. ory repository An Oracle database which stores all of the Wireless objects such as users groups adapters and applications request A query to initiate a desired Wireless service Requests are submitted on behalf of end users to the Wireless server request manager The Wireless component that processes requests for services The request manager authenticates the user submits the request to the Wireless core and retrieves the device type and any presentation settings The request manager also forwards converted content from the transformer to the user request object An XML document representing a request for service result transformer A transformer that converts content from Adapter Result format into Simple Result format ReverseCharge ReverseCharge is a billing model which charges the service premium to the mobile subscriber on the result SMS message rather than on the service request itself Mobile users requesting applications through multiple channels such as IVR interactive voice response or the Web receive the service result as an SMS message For example when a user wants to access an article on the Web the user must first complete and submit a web form requesting his SMS address before receiving an SMS message containing the authorization code needed to access the article In this case the user is charged a transport fee and a service premium for the SMS result message conveying the authorization code
368. ough the wizard by clicking Next after completing each step At any point in the wizard you can click the Back button to return to the preceding screens to change values You can skip any of the screens in this wizard which contain parameters which do not apply to the device After you have entered the required information click Finish to complete the device You can also edit the device to add remove or change the parameter values Managing Foundation Services 7 5 Managing Devices To access the wizard click Create in the device browsing screen The wizard appears defaulting to its first screen where you enter the basic information for the device Step 1 Entering the Basic Information for the Device The Basic Info screen Figure 7 3 enables you to define the general information of the device such as the device name Table 7 2 describes the parameters of the Basic Info screen Table 7 2 Parameters of Basic Information Screen Parameter Value Name The name of the device This name must be unique This is a required value Description A description of the device Manufacturer The manufacturer of the device If the manufacturer does not appear on the list then enter the name of manufacturer and then click Add The manufacturer then appears on the list enabling you to select it Model The model number of the device 7 6 Administrator s Guide Managing Devices Figure 7 3 Entering the Basic Information
369. pic management creation and editing are included for backward compatibility To access the Alerts tab set the DeprecatedAlertSupport option to true in the System properties file as follows DeprecatedAlertSupport true The default setting for this option is false Accepting the default setting prevents the Alerts tab from appearing in the Content Manager 5 7 1 Searching for Topics and Alerts Deprecated Using the topics and alerts browsing screen you can search for a topic or an alert using a search field in conjunction with drop down lists of search options which enable you to either narrow or broaden your searches The search results appear as a list on the Root Topics and Services screen Figure 5 11 Figure 5 11 The Topics and Alerts Browsing Screen Name Type Alert gt Sort By Name Content Manager gt Alert Welcome Administrator Root Topics and Alerts Coase X wow X et o StockTopic 322 2001 08 27 Add SubTopic Add Alert 5 28 Administrator s Guide Managing Alerts Deprecated Table 5 11 describes the elements in the topics and alerts browsing screen Table 5 11 Elements of the Browsing Screen for Topics and Alerts Element Description Type The object type The object can be an alert or a topic Name The name of an alert or topic Topics appears as hyperlinks clicking a topic displays alerts and subtopics Object ID The Object ID stored in the database Maste
370. plication While you can use the out of the box configuration for Form Filler application you can enhance the application s functionality by configuring the guessing heuristics and by approving or rejecting the mappings 8 5 1 2 Configuring the Guessing Heuristics If an existing mapping is not available then Form Filler enables authorized users to select given fields from the m Wallet to populate the values for a given input field in a wireless form When constructing a new mapping the Form Filler uses name guessing heuristics to automatically suggest default values to the user As a result the mapping creation process is minimized making it a user approved mapping process Name guessing can be accomplished in two ways you can enter rules for explicit mapping suggestions such as mapping Credit Card number to CreditCard Number or you can implement a dynamic heuristic that determines the similarities between the values in an input field and those in the fields in the m Wallet For example Deluxe user home address maps automatically to Profile Address 8 5 1 2 1 Configuring the Mappings as Input Parameters The fixed mapping suggestions are placed as input parameters for the Form Filler application The input parameter consists of the name ORACLE_SERVICES_COMMERCE_FORMFILLER_ SUGGESTIONS_ and the suggested key to use For example for ORACLE_ SERVICES_COMMERCE_FORMFILLER_SUGGESTIONS_Credit Card Credit Card is the suggested key The def
371. plication A core object used in a Wireless server to represent a unit of information requested by and delivered to a Wireless client An end user typically sees an application as a menu item on a device or as a link on a Web page Application Link A pointer to a master application When an application link is placed in a service tree the corresponding service becomes available to the owner or owners of the service tree bookmark A link from a service to an external device compatible data source that does not require Wireless processing Collaboration Applications A set of PIM related preconfigured applications including the Address Book Calendar Directory Fax Short Messaging Mail and Tasks Glossary 1 Glossary 2 Customization Portal A Web based interface also referred to as the Wireless Customization Portal that end users access to select services and configure their device portal Users access the Customization Portal from their desktop computers daemon A background process that performs a specified operation in response to certain events or at specified times device An object that describes either a physical device such as a cellular phone or an application such as email There is a default device transformer for each device device transformer A transformer that converts content from Simple Result format into the target format DOM Interface Document Object Model The interface that allows programs and
372. plication a Section 8 5 3 Wallet Application Section 8 5 4 Transcoder In addition to the application specific configuration parameters this section also includes the following sections a Section 8 2 1 Applications Setup a Section 8 3 10 Connecting PIM Applications to Non Oracle Servers a Section 8 3 10 1 Configuring the Microsoft Exchange Server for PIM Applications 8 2 1 Applications Setup Applications Setup defines how one application calls another All of the Wireless and Voice applications can be uniquely identified by an attribute called the OracleMobile protocol OMP URL Each application uses an OMP URL to call a different application Application Setup acts as a repository where each of the OMP URLs are registered In turn each application has a configuration parameter which tells the application where to find Applications Setup You enter the OMP URLs when you create an application link using the Content Manager Figure 8 2 For more information see Section 5 3 4 Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 3 Wireless Application Configuration Parameters Figure 8 2 Entering the OMP URL Publish Content You are logged in as orcladmin Application General Input Parameters Async Application Additional Create Application Link General Cancel Step 2 of 5 Application Name Addresses OMP URL l omp oracle services pim addressk Cancel Back Step 2 of 5 Finish Use
373. plorer browsers Mobile Studio is not certified for the older versions of Netscape 4 x or Internet Explorer 4 x Enter your Administrator login information as follows Administering Mobile Studio 6 3 Managing Locales 1 Enter your user name for example orcladmin 2 Enter a password for example manager 3 Click Login If you entered your login information correctly then the administration pages appear For any of the changes that an administrator makes through the administration pages to be visible to end users you must click the Reset button Figure 6 2 which is located on the top right hand side of the administration pages Figure 6 2 The Reset Button O Logout Help Reset 6 4 Managing Locales The Locales page of Mobile Studio Figure 6 3 displays the enabled locales used for branding Mobile Studio If you have made no changes to the locales then only the default enabled locale English displays on this page This page enables you to find a locale or locales using a pattern You can also add edit and delete locales Figure 6 3 The Locales Page Oracle Application Server _ oo Wielen 3 Sslectentomand O Select Name 6 4 Administrator s Guide Managing Locales 6 4 1 Finding a Locale To find a locale enter the name or a pattern for the locale in the Name field and then click the Find button A list of the locales matching the name or pattern appe
374. policy For details on implementing a customized digital rights policy refer to the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide 7 28 Administrator s Guide Managing Digital Rights Policies Figure 7 14 Defining a Customized Package Digital Rights Policies Foundation gt Digital Rights Policies gt New Digital Rights Policy You are logged in as Orcladmin New Digital Rights Policy Name Customize Description ODRL Document ODRL Document lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt o ex rights xmlns o ex http odrl net 1 0 ODRL Ex xmlns o dd http odrl net 1 0 ODRL DD gt lt o ex context gt lt o dd version gt 1 0 lt o dd version gt lt o ex context gt lt o ex agreement gt lt o ex asset gt lt o ex context gt lt o dd uid gt cid _ DRM_CID_VALUE_ lt o dd uid gt zi Init Properties Add Another Row Cancel Finish 7 7 2 Editing a Digital Rights Policy The Edit button in the digital rights policy browsing screen enables you to edit all the parameters of a selected digital rights policy To edit a digital rights policy select the digital rights policy from the browsing screen and the click the Edit button Clicking Finish saves the changes to the policy Clicking Cancel sets the parameters back to their previous values and returns you to the browsing screen Refer to Section 7 7 1 for descriptions of the parameters that you can edit Managing Found
375. pplication 8 3 1 3 Linking to the Address Book Application You can link to the address book using the following virtual URL omp oracle services pim addressbook 8 12 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail Table 8 2 describes the input call parameters of the Address Book Table 8 2 Input Call Parameters of the Address Book Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value screen No The function performed 0 Displays the list of contacts by the Addressbook 51 Makes the Addressbook service add the contact with the provided data to this database of contacts This parameter requires SERIALIZED_CONTACT if the value is 51 srchstr No Makes the Addressbook The string which is the object of the search perform a search for the Requires screen 0 empty specified string among all of the contacts SERIALIZED_CONTACT The SERIALIZED_CONTACT group contains the parameters for each element of a contact such as contact name contact work phone and contact work address The elements described in this optional group are returned when the user clicks the Done button in a screen displaying a contact detail The SERIALIZED_CONTACT group includes the following parameters described in Table 8 3 Table 8 3 Parameters of the Serialized Contact Group for Addressbook Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value NAME Yes The name of this contact For example NAME John Smith WORKPH No The work phone number of
376. pplication links 9 2 3 3 Configuring the Voicemail Application The configuration for the Voicemail application link is the same as the configuration for the email application except that the value for ORACLE_SERVICES_PIM_ MAIL_FILTERMODE parameter must be defined as voicemail For example ORACLE_SERVICES_PIM_MAIL_FILTERMODE voicemail 9 12 Administrator s Guide Configuring Wireless for Voice Applications The Voicemail application filters email messages based on the x orcl messagetype voice message header 9 2 4 Testing the Voice Portal To access the voice enabled applications for testing you must first dial the provisioned phone number You then create a user account with the User Manager Once the account has been created that is after you have entered both the PIN and a Primary Phone Number the Voice Main Menu plays For more information on creating a user account see Section 4 5 This section details the following Section 9 2 4 1 Testing the General Commands Section 9 2 4 2 Testing the Email Application Section 9 2 4 3 Testing the Calendar Application Section 9 2 4 4 Testing the Oracle Files Section 9 2 4 5 Testing the Directory Application Section 9 2 4 6 Testing the Address Book Application 9 2 4 1 Testing the General Commands The commands described in Table 9 2 must always take you to the appropriate place in the voice portal Table 9 2 Voice Portal Commands Command Location
377. pter 10 Wireless Security Chapter 11 Mobile Single Sign On Chapter 12 Activity Logging Chapter 13 Optimizing Oracle Application Server Wireless Chapter 14 Load Balancing and Failover Chapter 15 Globalization Chapter 16 Integrating Wireless with Other Components Chapter 17 Integrating Wireless Notification with Microsoft Exchange 8 Configuring the Out of the Box Applications This document describes configuring the pre built Wireless applications Each section of this document presents a different topic These sections include Section 8 1 Configuring the Voice and Wireless Applications Using the Content Manager Section 8 2 Wireless Application Configuration Parameters Section 8 3 PIM and Mail Section 8 4 Location Section 8 5 m Commerce Applications 8 1 Configuring the Voice and Wireless Applications Using the Content Manager Oracle Application Server Wireless includes pre built Wireless applications such as PIM Personal Information Management mail location based and messaging applications through SMS WAP push fax e mail and voice You use the edit functions of the Content Manager as illustrated in Figure 8 1 to configure the parameters of these wireless applications to make them ready for use Some of the configuration parameters of a mobile application are read only and therefore cannot be edited For more information on editing application using the Content Manager
378. put values however the input value names and values cannot be changed unless the Application Developer designates them as Modifiable in the Main Menu master application which is accessed through the Service Manager tool For information about the Voice Main Menu application see Section 9 2 3 2 For more information on application links see Chapter 5 Managing Content For more information on creating a master application see the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide 9 2 3 Provisioning Voice Access To enable voice access you provision a voice gateway phone number to the following URL lt server name gt lt port gt ptg rm PAlogin true amp PAlocale lt locale gt Where the port is the WebCache listening port number 7777 the default port number and the port number range is 7777 to 7877 You must specify the locale for a language other than English if the locale is English however then you do not need the PAlocale attribute You specify the locale using the two letter Java locale format the two letter Java country code is optional For example to define the PAlocale attribute as French Canadian you enter fr_CA fr is the Java locale CA is the country code 9 8 Administrator s Guide Configuring Wireless for Voice Applications This provisioning scheme contacts the voice login service for the Wireless server After users login a main menu displays which lists all of the applications that they can ac
379. quired Software The Payment application requires the following software as described in Table 8 43 Table 8 43 Required Software for the Payment Application Instructions From Versions Oracle iPayment Follow the instructions from Oracle Applications 11ito Oracle Application 11i successfully install Oracle iPayment 8 5 2 2 Configuration Parameters a Default Transaction Class The default transaction processor used for such functions as creating accounts submitting transaction requests cancelling transactions and querying transactions The default class OracleIPayment Hook provides the driver for Oracle CRM 117 iPayment a Valid Values any class extending oracle panama module commerce payment PaidTransaction a Default Value oracle panama module commerce payment OracleIPaymentHook a Examples org company myPaymentHook a Default Currency Defines the default currency to be used for all transactions This value can be overridden by sending the currency on the OMP call Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 85 m Commerce Applications a Valid Values Three letter string currency codes according to ISO 4217 1995 Default Value USD a Examples EUR USD BRL a DEC file This value points to the location of the DBC file used by Oracle CRM iPayment This file has the necessary configuration for the iPayment database such as username and password a Valid Values a path on the loca
380. r Include the JAR files in the OC4J classpath on the Oracle Application Server Wireless middle tier by adding the following lines to ORACLE_HOME j2ee OC4J_ Wireless config application xml a lt library path wireless lib esmail_sdk jar gt a lt library path wireless lib escommon jar gt a lt library path wireless lib esldap jar gt a Outgoing Mail Server SMTP Enter the name or IP address of the outgoing mail server SMTP Valid Values A string value Default Value localhost Examples gsmtp mycomp com 127 0 0 1 Outgoing Mail Server SMTP Port The 8 48 Administrator s Guide port number for the Outoing Mail Server SMTP Valid Values A string value Default Value 25 Examples 25 PIM and Mail Outgoing Mail Server SMTP Login When required it specifies username for the Outgoing server a Valid Values A string value a Default Value empty a Examples global user robert smith Auto domain for email addresses Enter the domain which is used for the recipient when no domain is present in their email address This domain is also used to construct the sender s identity if it is not specified by the user a Valid Values A string value a Default Value localhost a Examples mycomp com xyz com Inbox name The primary folder for the user usually INBOX a Valid Values Any valid folder name on the Mail server a Default Value INBOX a Exa
381. r Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value type Yes The type of short messaging FAX service needed destinationAddress Yes The fax number of the recipient A fax number for example used in the short messaging destinationAddress 650 123 4567 module FAXTODO Yes The function that the fax NEWFAX module perform RNAME Yes The name of the recipient of the A name for example RNAME Scott fax Tiger RPHONE Yes The phone number of the A phone number for example recipient of the fax RPHONE 650 555 5000 RFAX Yes The fax number to which the A fax number for example fax is sent RFAX 650 555 1234 SERIALIZED_CONTACT The SERIALIZED_CONTACT group contains the parameters for each element of a contact such as contact name contact work phone and contact work address The elements described in this optional group are returned when the user clicks the 8 16 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail Done button done in a screen displaying a contact detail Table 8 7 describes the parameters of the SERIALIZED CONTACT group Table 8 7 Parameters of the SERIALIZED_CONTACT Group Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value NAME Yes The name of this contact A name For example NAME John Restriction the white spaces emiti special characters are encoded WORKPH No The work phone number of this A phone number for example eee WORKPH 650 123 4567 Restriction the white spaces special characters are encoded
382. r Table 8 26 describes the input parameters of the action input call parameter 8 52 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail Table 8 26 Input Parameters for Action Valid Value Description Requirement messageto Send an email message Requires mailto messagecc CC an email message Requires mailto sendasattachment Send an attachment Requires attach mailto The email address to which the message is sent This is an optional input parameter The value must be a string For example mailto oraclemobile oracle com mailto john smith mycompany com attach The fully qualified path of the local file that is sent as an attachment to the email the value must be a string For example a attach home 9iasuser temp presentation ppt a attach D 9iasuser temp instructions txt Output Parameters Examples To send an email to Scott Tiger you configure the action and mailto parameters as follows ms action messageto a mailto scott tiger oracle com To send the picture that is a JPEG of your new home configure the act ion and attach parameters as follows m action sendasattachment a attach private 9iasuser temp my1MilDolHome jpg 8 3 8 Short Messaging The Short Messaging application enables users to send messages through such mediums as voice email fax or SMS messaging To send a short message a user Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 53 PIM and Mail sends the service four pa
383. r Alert The master alert created by the Service Designer on which this alert is based Last Modified The last time the topic or the alert were modified To find a topic or an alert 1 Perform one or more of the following a Enter the name of the alert or topic b From the drop down list box select the type of object a Alert a Topic 2 Select from among the following options to sort your search results a Name Sorts search results by name a Last Modified Sorts search results by the last time the alert or the topic was modified 3 Click Search The Search Result screen appears Figure 5 12 Managing Content 5 29 Managing Alerts Deprecated Figure 5 12 The Search Result Screen Service Alert Group Name Type Alert z Sort By Name x Search Content Manager gt Alert gt Search Welcome Administrator Search Result StockTopic gt 2001 08 27 Table 5 12 describes the elements of the Search Result screen Table 5 12 Elements of the Search Result Screen Element Description Name The name of the alert or topic Object ID The Object ID stored in the database Full Path The route to a alert or topic Each topic on the route is displayed as a hyperlink Clicking a hyperlink reveals a browse screen showing the alerts organized under the topic You use this browse screen for such functions as creating and deleting alerts and alert topics Last Modified The time the alert or topi
384. r an acknowledgment This can speed up large data transfers significantly tcp_conn_req_max_q 10240 The size of the complete and incomplete connection queue Generally the default values are sufficient However it is recommended to increase these values to 10240 or they can be changed if connection drop problems are observed tcp_conn_req_max_q0 tcp_slow_start_initial 4 This setting changes the data transmission rate Changing this value is important to workaround bugs that some operating systems have in the implementation of slow start algorithms Solaris Kernel Recommendations To enhance performance you can change the Solaris Kernel performance parameters described in Table 13 3 in the file etc system Table 13 3 Solaris Kernel Performance Parameters Parameter Value Comment rlim_fd_max 8192 The hard limit for number of file descriptors rlim_fd_cur 2048 The soft limit for number of file descriptors Iwp_default_stksize 0x4000 The LWP stack size rpcmod svc_run_stksize 0x4000 The NFS stack size Sq_max_size 1600 By increasing sq_max_size you increase the number of message blocks mblk that can be in any given syncq For every 64mb add 25 to its value As a result the value for 4GB is 1600 Optimizing Oracle Application Server Wireless 13 15 Tuning Operating System Performance 13 16 Administrator s Guide 14 Load Balancing and Failover This chapter discusses Oracle Application Server Wire
385. r customers as is the case for merchants Wireless Security 10 17 Installing and Configuring Oracle Application Server Wireless Security Application Level security with Symmetric Shared Encryption Keys This deployment scenario provides end to end data privacy by performing symmetric encryption at the device and at the application server since data is encrypted above the network protocol no intermediate nodes can observe the data while en route End to end communication data privacy under this deployment scenario requires application level encryption support through a SIM WIM card with encryption capabilities Wireless currently supports Triple DES symmetric key encryption at the application layer This means that tag content information that is not all of the payload is encrypted and decrypted at the device and is then decrypted and encrypted at the application server and that there is a shared secret encryption key between each user and the Wireless application server The encryption key is stored in the SIM card and is initially produced at time of manufacture and re keying on a periodic or other basis is possible under a set of well defined security conditions This deployment scenario best fits corporations that want to provide applications to their mobile field forces A more scalable and generic alternative is the use of application layer PKI encryption which eliminates the need of a pre existing relationship between end consum
386. r mobile id hook class wireless http locator pre processor hook class wireless http locator authorization hook class wireless http locator post processor hook class wireless http locator device identifcation hook clas s wireless http locator location service visibility hook class wireless http locator folder render hook class wireless http locator session id hook class 3 42 Administrator s Guide Declares the hook for the event registration listener The default is oracle panama rt common ListenerRegistratio n Declares the hook for sorting a user home folder contact The default is oracle panama rt common HomeFolderSorter Declares a hook to acquire a mobile ID The default is oracle panama rt common MobileIdHookImpl Declares a hook to be invoked before device transformation Declares the hook for user service authorization The default is oracle panama rt common Authorizer Declares a hook to be invoked after device transformation Declares the hook for identifying a logical device The default is oracle panama rt hook DeviceModels Declares the hook to show or hide the contents of a folder based on its current location The default is oracle panama rt hook Folder RendererPolicy Hook for a folder renderer The default value is oracle panama rt common FolderRenderer Declares a hook for generating the session ID The default is oracle panama rt common SessionIDGenerator Site Administration Tabl
387. r s Guide Configuring the Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server 17 3 1 4 Creating Out of Process COM Components Microsoft Exchange does not allow event sinks to run in process with its Web Storage System process yet a DLL runs in process by default Therefore you must create out of process COM components for the DLLs so that the event sink methods can be called successfully during runtime You must do the same for the notification registration DLL To create a COM component 1 Click the Windows Start button 2 From the Programs menu select Administrative Tools and then Component Services 3 Expand the Component Services and then double click the COM Applications folder as depicted in Figure 17 4 This folder contains all existing COM applications Figure 17 4 Component Services Vii Component Services in Console Window Help aton view gt ala x 2 ale AOA Tree C Console Root B Component Services G Computers B El My Computer 4 COM QC Dead Letter Queue Listener amp gt COM Utilities gt IIS In Process Applications IIS Out Of Process Pooled Applications gt IIS Utilities System Application gt Workflow Event Sink Distributed Transaction Coordinator a Event Viewer Local Services Local COM Applications 7 object s COM QC COM Utilities Dead Let
388. r tab displaying the User Overview screen Figure 4 1 The User Overview Screen Oracle Application Server E Wile eee ET eee Overview Us Search User By User Name gt Matches gt I Go Advanced Search You may use asterisks as wildcards in your search You are logged in as orcladmin User Overview Users Groups Total Number of Users 39 Total Number of Groups 4 Total Number of Currently Logged in Users 1 Guests 36 Selffest 6 StudioUsers 6 Roles Users 9 Total Number of Roles 6 System Administrator 5 User Manager 5 Foundation Developer 5 Application Developer 5 Content Manager 5 Superuser 5 Users Foundation Services Content Logout View Log Help Copyright 1996 2003 Oracle All rights reserved 4 3 1 User Overview The Overview subtab provides you with an overall view of Wireless users by displaying the following a Total number of users a Total number of currently logged in users 4 6 Administrator s Guide Searching for Users a User Roles A displays of the current user roles available and the number of users assigned to each of these roles a User Groups A display of the current Wireless user groups and the number of users in each of these user groups The User Manager displays the number of users as a link which has a built in query Clicking this link invokes the Users Search Results page subtab which displays a table listing all o
389. r to connect to their own WAP gateway Some wireless service providers hide the phone settings to prevent the user from changing them In most cases you do not need to change the phone network settings instead to access the wireless server from a WAP phone you need only enter the URL of the wireless server into the phone s WAP browser See the phone s user s manual for instructions on opening the WAP browser Wireless serves requests from different devices including Palm Pocket PC and WAP These devices must be configured so that they can access the Wireless server Requests from these devices to the wireless server come through an HTTP S protocol Protocol transformation gateway may be used in some cases to convert the device native network protocol to HTTP S Note The URL to the Wireless server must be configured for all devices If the Wireless server is installed on host host domain then the default URL for HTTP and HTTPS protocols are a http host domain 7777 ptg rm a https host domain 4443 ptg rm Consult with your Wireless server administrator for the exact URL to your Wireless server Wireless Gateway Configuration 9 5 Configuring Wireless for Voice Applications 9 2 Configuring Wireless for Voice Applications After Wireless has been installed and configured the Oracle hosted voice gateway enables you to immediately access both out of the box applications and custom built voice applications f
390. rameters the type of message to be sent email SMS Voice or Fax the destination address of the message the subject text and the body text of the email The subject and body text are translated into the medium appropriate to the message type and then sent to the destination 8 3 8 1 Configuring the Short Messaging Application This application does not require any third party software components it instead relies upon the Oracle Application Server Wireless transport to be configured The short messaging application does not require scripts Configuration Parameters The Short Messaging application includes the followoing configuration parameters a Message Sender This parameter is obsolete and is included in this release for backward compatibility a Default email address Specifies the default email address used in the From field if the user does not specify an email address a Valid Values Any valid email address a Default Value oraclemobile oracle com a Example oraclemobile oracle com a Default fax number Specifies the default fax number to be used in the from field if none is specified by the user a Valid Values Any valid number a Default Value 111 222 3333 a Example 111 444 3333 a Default SMS address Specifies the default SMS address to be used in the from field if none is specified by the user a Valid Values Any valid SMS address a Default Value 4445556666 oraclemobile com 8 54 Administrator s G
391. rce applications securely store user profiles and supply information authorized by users of third party applications These applications communicate with on line payment mechanisms to complete transactions 1 4 Using This Guide This guide describes how to get Wireless running by using the Wireless tools to configure the underlying Wireless stack and the module applications Introducing Oracle Application Server Wireless 1 7 Using This Guide 1 8 Administrator s Guide 2 Verifying the Wireless Installation This chapter describes how to access the Webtools and the Device Customization portal to verify the proper installment and functioning of these applications See the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide for information on installing Wireless This chapter includes the following sections a Section 2 1 Starting the Oracle Application Server Wireless Server a Section 2 2 Accessing the Wireless Customization Portal a Section 2 3 Accessing the Wireless Tools 2 1 Starting the Oracle Application Server Wireless Server Before Wireless users can access the Wireless development tools the administrator must start the server using the Wireless system management page access through the Oracle Enterprise Manager Application Server Control To log into the Application Server Control and access the management functions for Wireless 1 Enter the following URL into a browser http Server 1810 V
392. re 9 1 Getting the OID for the Voice Main Menu Application Help Wiele srs Foundation V eaae ENT Publish Content Access Control Conter Render Conter Categorize Conter Search Voice Type Application gt Category Any gt You may use asterisks as wildcards in your search You are logged in as Orcladmin Search Result Voice Main Menu 303 Root Folder false April 15 2003 7 59 59 PM PDT Voice Main Menu 9 2 3 2 2 Returning to the Voice Main Menu Application To ensure that applications return to the Voice Main Menu after a user says main menu you edit the application by entering the following Oracle Mobile Protocol OMP URL that points to the Voice Main Menu omp oracle services voice mainmenu Use the Content Manager s application link editing functions to add this URL as follows 1 Log into the Wireless tools 9 10 Administrator s Guide Configuring Wireless for Voice Applications 2 Select the Content tab to access the Content Manager The Publish Content subtab appears displaying the current Wireless applications in the Application Links table 3 From the table select the Voice Main Menu application 4 Click Edit The Edit Application Link screen appears defaulting to General screen 5 Enter omp oracle services voice mainmenu in the OMP URL field If you leave this field blank then the applications return to the default main menu renderer 6 Click Appl
393. re Send Hook These hooks can be called before or after sending a message the pre send at Post Send Hook and post send hooks or before or after receiving a message the pre receive and post receive hooks These hooks which are in the same category are a Pre Receive Hook called in the sequence in which they are specified You can use these hooks to enable special client functions such as checking or filtering rather than Post Receive Hook having to implement an application on top of the transport 3 6 2 4 Notification Engine You configure the following for the Notification Engine Notification System You can configure reply addresses of notifications for a Email a SMS a Pager a Voice a WAP Push You can also configure the runtime settings related to location Managing the Wireless Server 3 47 Site Administration Number of Location Event Listener Threads The number of threads to start for each notification process for listening to incoming location events The default is 1 a Location Condition Response Delay seconds The approximate response delay for location condition processing The default is 600 Messaging Server Client You can specify the Messaging Server client configuration for the Notification Engine as a notification engine is one client of messaging server Please refer to the discussion of Messaging Server Client in Section 3 6 2 3 3 6 2 5 Messaging You configure the following
394. re are two classes of Wireless users registered users and anonymous users The registered users are users whose user information is registered with the Oracle Internet Directory OID These users can be created modified or deleted through the User Manger or the OID DAS tool Anonymous users are these users that have not been registered with OID Anonymous users can only access the wireless and voice applications assigned to the Guest group A registered user can only access the wireless and voice applications assigned to the groups to which that user belongs For more information on anonymous users and assigning users to groups see Chapter 4 Managing Users For information on assigning applications to user groups see Section 5 4 The Wireless Tools such as the User Manager are role specific Wireless users can only access the tool which corresponds to the role or roles that they have been granted The User Manager assigns these roles when creating or updating a user A user can have one or several roles which include System Administrator Application Developer Foundation Developer Content Manager User Administrator and End User These roles span all of the Wireless resources from server management application development application publishing and help desk to subscription to the Wireless applications For more information on Wireless user roles see Section 10 2 Wireless Security 10 5 Resources Protected by Oracle Application S
395. re the A string For example REMIND 1 hour event reminder occurs SHARING Yes A flag that enables or disables For example SHARING TRUE the sharing of an appointment If True the appointment is shared if FALSE then the appointment is not shared Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 23 PIM and Mail apptResponse Table 8 13 describes the parameters of the apptResponse group an optional group Table 8 13 The Output Parameters of the addApptResponse Group Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value TITLE Yes The title of the appointment A string For example TITLE Dinner at Joe s DATE Yes The date of the appointment A string For example DATE December 31 2001 TIME Yes The time of the appointment A string For example TIME 8 00 p m DURATION Yes The duration of the A string For example DURATION 1 hour appointment NOTES Yes The notes for the appointment A string For example NOTES Remember the brief TYPE Yes The type of appointment either A string For example TYPE Business personal or business LOCATION Yes The location of an appointment A string For example LOCATION Home REMIND Yes The time interval before the A string For example REMIND 1 hour event reminder occurs SHARING Yes A flag that enables or disables For example SHARING TRUE the sharing of an appointment If True the appointment is shared if FALSE then the appointment is not shared deleteApptResponse
396. ready for deployment including the Collaboration Applications that is PIM tools such as calendar address book fax and mail For more information on these pre configured applications see Chapter 8 Configuring the Out of the Box Applications Bookmarks The Content Manager enables you to create a bookmark a link enabling the user to quickly access an external resource such as Web page In addition to providing the user this shortcut however Wireless enables you to create bookmarks that render their content equally well on a variety of devices End users can set bookmarks in the Wireless Customization Portal The bookmark appears as a menu selection on the mobile device Wireless does not process the content of the URL target The format of the target content must be supported by the user s device Alerts and Topics Deprecated An alert notification is an application delivered to users based on the trigger conditions they set when subscribing to the alert An alert inherits the parameters from a master alert which is created using the Service Manager Content Managers organize alerts by topics containers that group alerts The Content Manager provides you to distribute these repository objects to user groups organize them in a business context appropriate to each user group and assign them to different categories so that they can only be accessed through specified access points 5 2 Administrator s Guide Accessing the Co
397. reate such a message you define the msg subfix msg expire and msg prefix parameters Table 7 14 describes these parameters which enclose the usage count display presented to the user for each download Table 7 14 Initialization Parameters of a Digital Rights Policy Parameter Value msg subfix The punctuation and text that follow the usage count data For example enter times msg expire The text telling the user that the application has expired or is no longer available For example enter This application has expired msg prefix field The text that precedes the user count display For example enter This application expires after times Click Create to complete the policy Defining a Customized Package If you selected the Customized Package option in Step 2 then you must define a name for the digital rights policy and optionally enter a description for the policy in the New Digital Rights Policy screen Figure 7 14 You also enter an Open Digital Rights Language ORDL document an XML document which expresses the Digital Rights Policy This ODRL document is consumed by the packaging object which implements oracle wireless me server tools drm DRMPackager In addition you enter the initialization init properties associated with the policy The init property name and value pairs are passed to Custom Digital Right implementation class This implementation class uses these value pairs Click Finish to complete the
398. reates a directory in the file system called DTJava To configure the Lotus Domino Server 1 Copy DTJava lib NCSO jar to ORACLE_HOME wireless lib on Solaris or ORACLE _HOME wireless lib on NT Examples of Solaris and NT values for ORACLE_HOME are as follows a For Solaris ORACLE_HOME u01 iaswv904 a For Windows NT ORACLE_HOME d oracle iaswv904 2 Include DTJava lib NCSO jar in the OC4J classpath by adding the following line to 0RACLE_HOME j2ee OC4J_Wireless config application xml Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 61 Location lt library path wireless lib NCSO jar gt Note You must download Lotus Domino Toolkit for Java CORBA Release 5 0 8 Update or Lotus Domino Toolkit for Java CORBA Release 5 0 5 Update Shipping Do not use the Version 2 x toolkit 3 Server tasks HTTP and DIIOP must both be running on the Domino server Ensure that the Domino server s notes ini file contains the following line ServerTasks lt other tasks gt http diiop 5 0 5 8 4 Location There are four Location Based applications Location Picker Driving Directions Maps and Biz Directory business directory The Location Picker application enables users to pick and manage their frequently accessed locations Using this application a user can specify a location that can be used by another application such as the Diving Directions application This location can be the user s default location the
399. reen appears 3 Select from among the following output formats 5 16 Administrator s Guide Managing Application Links a Adapter XML Result Selecting this result type enables you to see Wireless source content in the AdapterResult format the intermediary format between the source and the target output device Source content in the AdapterResult format must be converted into SimpleResult format before it can be delivered to a target device If no text displays in the The Result panel then no AdapterResult has been produced a Wireless XML Result Selecting Wireless XML Result displays the source content in Wireless SimpleResult format of the output that is returned by an adapter a Device Result The Device Transformer drop down menu lists the devices in the repository Selecting a device enables you to see the final markup language for that device 4 Click Set Parameters 5 Click Run Application The application link appears on a phone simulator The selected result appears in the Application Result window Setting the Display Length of the Logging File The System Log section enables you to set the number of lines from the end of the server s system log file that you want to see To set the number of lines from the server displays from the end of the system log 1 Enter the number of lines from the end of the system log that you want to review 2 Click Refresh Log The specified number of lines from the e
400. reless displays the following Single Sign On SSO error No privilege to access this tool Logout and login as another user with the required role The user can successfully log into the Wireless Tools or other components only after you assign that user a role See Section 4 5 for information on creating a user and assigning user roles 4 2 Logging into the User Manager Before using the User Manager you must first access the login page for the Wireless Tools using the following URL http hostname port webtool login uix For example you access the login page by entering following URL into your browser http hostname 7777 webtool login uix Note 7777 is the default port number for Oracle Application Server Wireless The port number range is 7777 to 7877 To ensure that you are using the correct port number check the port number for Oracle Application Server Wireless stored in Oracle home install portlist ini For more information on port usage see Oracle Application Server Installation Guide and the Oracle Application Server Administrator s Guide Managing Users 4 5 Using the User Manager Enter your user name and then enter your password If you are an administrator enter orcladmin as your user name The password is set during installation but can be changed with the User Manager 4 3 Using the User Manager After you have successfully logged into the User Manager the tool defaults to the Use
401. reless installation the Wireless configuration assistant enables the policy to enforce a unique constraint on the orclWirelessAccountNumber attribute of orcluservV2 object class The OID server must be restarted after the first Wireless installation for this unique constraint policy to take effect Refer to Oracle Internet Directory Administrator s guide for details on how to restart the OID server Wireless connects to the OID as a Wireless application entity after users have been authenticated through SSO The Wireless application entity is assigned following privileges 1 Common user attributes privilege to read common attributes of a user OracleDASCreateUser The privilege to create users in OID OracleDASDeleteUser The privilege to delete users in OID 2 3 4 OracleDASEditUser The privilege to edit common attributes of users 5 verifierServices The privilege to read application verifiers the user PIN which are stored in the user 6 authenticationServices The privilege to perform compare operations on password attributes of a user By default the Wireless application entity does not have the privileges to change the user password Consequently out of the box users cannot change their password from theWireless server However you can enable the functionality to change passwords by assigning the UserSecurityAdmins privilege to the Wireless application entity To do this execute assignUserSecurityAdminsPrivilege sh or ass
402. rganization for example oracle com Inbox or the name of the folder that loads during startup Sent or the name of the folder that receives saved messages The default email domain for example oracle com 200 2000 The UNIX directory for the audio files Note This parameter must be designated as Modifiable The URL pointing to the UNIX directory of the audio files oracle panama module pim mail util Config scheduler cal suncal01 us oracle com 1522 GMCAL flows oo0 gmmail oraclecorp com 143 Wireless Gateway Configuration 9 7 Configuring Wireless for Voice Applications Table 9 1 Input Parameters of the Main Menu Master Application Parameter Default Value ORACLE _SERVICES_PIM_CALENDAR_DOMAIN OracleDomain ORACLE_SERVICES_PIM_MAIL_OID The OID object ID of the Mail application as displayed in the browsing screen of the Content Manager See Section 9 2 3 2 1 for more information on retrieving this value ORACLE_SERVICES_PIM_CALENDAR_OID The OID object ID of the Calendar application as displayed in the browsing screen of the Content Manager See Section 9 2 3 2 1 for more information on retrieving this value This application is the template for the Voice Main Menu application link an alias to the Main Menu application which can be customized and distributed to user groups The Voice Main Menu application which you access from the Content Manager one of the Wireless Tools also has these in
403. rieves the site enabled flag information as well as the number of sending and receiving threads which are based on the capability of the site driver If you base a driver instance upon a driver whose parameters have changed for example from the addition of a new parameter with default value or the removal of an obsolete parameter then Wireless reflects these changes in the table listing the parameters in the editing page In such a case the table displays added parameters with a default value but would not display an obsolete parameter that has been removed After you create a driver click Apply to save the new driver instance configuration Note Changing the default parameter values for a messaging driver at the site level does not affect the driver instance Managing the Wireless Server 3 19 Wireless Server Performance Figure 3 13 The Add Driver Instance Screen Wireless Server Server System gt Wireless Server gt messagingserverl gt Add Driver Instance Add Driver Instance Driver Instance Name EmailDriver1 Driver Name EmailDriver z Go Delivery Categories Email Sending Threads Receiving Threads l I Enabled W Site Driver Enabled For a driver instance to run both the site driver and the driver instance have to be enabled Cancel OK Driver Specific Parameters Name Description MandatoryValue server incoming protocol Incoming mail false imap protocol 4 4 sener inc
404. rks with Web Interface Definition Language WIDL files to map source content to Wireless XML Typically the source format for the Web Integration adapter is HTML but developers can also use the adapter to retrieve content in other formats such as XML Table 7 6 describes the initialization init parameters for a master application based on the Web Integration adapter Table 7 6 Init Parameters of the Web Integration Adapter Parameter Value WebIntegrationServer The machine name and listening port of the Web Integration Server If the Web Interface WIDL_FILE Integration Server and the Wireless server reside on the same machine use localhost port This field is required The server you specify in this field must be running for the Content Manager to return the adapter parameters The WIDL interface name This interface must be published to the Web Integration Server You can publish the interface using the Web Integration Developer You cannot currently use the WIDL_FILE parameter to identify a WIDL service Do not enter a value for this parameter 7 5 4 1 3 Setting Input Parameters for the Web Integration Adapter The master application determines the parameters that display in the panel by querying the adapter Every input parameter defined in the WIDL interface appears in the Inputs panel including parameters for other WIDL applications within the WIDL interface In addition to the custom input parameters that
405. rm to Wireless and Voice Portal 6 The Wireless and Voice Portal converts the Wireless XML login form to the appropriate markup language and delivers the converted form to the device browser 7 The user submits the login form with the user name and password 8 The Wireless and Voice Portal passes the login request to the single sign on server 9 Upon successful authentication the SSO server sends a redirect form that points to the partner application 10 Wireless and Voice Portal follows the redirect form At this point the Wireless and Voice Portal knowing that authentication has been successful updates the user s session 11 The partner application serves content in Wireless XML 12 The Wireless and Voice Portal converts the Wireless XML content to the appropriate markup language and delivers the converted content to the device browser 11 2 3 Authenticating by mod_osso The Wireless Tools which are used by developer and administrators as well as those intended for end users such as the Wireless Customization Portal authenticate users with mod_osso which is a module plugged into Oracle HTTP Server All of the Web based Wireless applications running behind the Oracle HTTP Mobile Single Sign On 11 7 Wireless Single Sign O ff Server are treated as a single partner application Users can access the applications appropriate to their roles and privileges after single sign on The Wireless and Voice Portal us
406. rmation card to the user This is the default value Wallet Security Mode Defines whether the Wallet application runs in HTTP or HTTPS If true the application runs in secure HTTPS If false then the wallet runs in non secure HTTP The valid values for this input parameter include the following a true When accessing the Wallet application the connection between the user device and Oracle Application Server Wireless will be secure HTTPS This is default value false When accessing the Wallet application the connection between the user device and Oracle Application Server Wireless will be non secure HTTP The default value is true Note The Wallet application can only function in secured mode HTTPS if Oracle Application Server Wireless is configured in secured mode For more information on configuring Wireless in secured mode see Section 3 6 1 1 Application Setup OMP URL This is the OMP URL reference for the URL group This parameter includes the following values a Valid Values An OMP URL pointing to the application setup a Default Value omp oracle applications appsetup a Examples 8 5 3 3 Linking to the Wallet Application You can link to the Wallet application using the following virtual URL omp oracle services commerce wallet The wallet application includes the following input call parameters 8 92 Administrator s Guide m Commerce Applications Wallet_Action Wallet_Action is
407. rned The status code of the message processing which can have the values unknown failed succeeded ignored The time the processing call was called For a sending message the driver s send method was called For a received message the listener s onMessage method was called The time the processing call returned For a sending message the driver s send method returned For a received message the listener s onMessage method returned Activity Logging 12 7 Activity Logging Overview System Logging The System Logger logs the runtime debug log information generated by the runtime processes The Wireless server generates log information which is stored in the log file The different levels of logging and the log file size can be configured as follows To configure the System Log file using Wireless Management at either the site or process level 1 4 Enter a name for the log file name pattern The default is sys_panama log This pattern enables you to identify the log file generated by the different server processes Currently the only supported pattern is lt filename gt 0 log For example sys_panama 0 log would generate a file with a name sys_ panama lt timestamp in long gt log Using this pattern enables administrators to identify log files pertaining to the different server processes based on their start timestamp The setting of the pattern is optional At the Wireless server or host level the lo
408. rom voice devices For more information go to http mservice oracle com This section provides information on configuring your own voice gateway using the VoiceGenie developer studio as an example 9 2 1 Prerequisites To configure voice access to Wireless you must have access to an Oracle accepted third party VoiceXML gateway and the Voice ear file included with Wireless Wireless has been tested against a number of VoiceXML gateways The list of accepted gateways is located at http otn oracle com tech wireless integration content html Follow the third party provider s instructions to properly install and configure your VoiceXML gateway If you do not have access to a VoiceXML gateway a number of gateway providers have hosted gateways for developers that can be utilized free of charge for development and testing purposes For example VoiceGenie maintains a developer studio at http developer voicegenie com where users can sign up for a development account that provides them with 10 extensions into a voice gateway From this Web site users configure each of their extensions to point to different URLs To configure voice access to Wireless you must set up an extension to point to the URL outlined in Section 9 2 3 Setting up the Accounts Obtain a VoiceGenie developer account by visiting http developer voicegenie com Follow directions at that site 9 2 2 Configuring and Testing Voice Enabled Applications The
409. rom wireless device and rendered to the device by Wireless This allows portlets to provide wireless interface using OracleAS Portal through Wireless 16 3 1 OracleAS Portal as a Wireless Application OracleAS Portal must be deployed as a Wireless application in the Wireless repository to enable Wireless access to OracleAS Portal Each OracleAS Portal installation is deployed as an HTTP Adapter based application in Wireless Multiple Portals may be deployed on a single Wireless instance The HTTP adapter application accepts a URL as a configuration parameter and must be set to the URL 16 16 Administrator s Guide Integrating Wireless with Oracle Application Server Portal of the OracleAS Portal s home page To create a Wireless application a master application definition based on an HTTP adapter must be created using the Service Manager Also you must create an OraclePortal Service based on the HTTP adapter master application OracleAS Portal redirects requests from a Wireless device to an Wireless server The Wireless Server accepts the request and invokes the OracleAS Portal home page over HTTP and accepts the response generated in Wireless XML from OracleAS Portal The XML response generated by OracleAS Portal is then adapted to the native device markup by the Wireless server All further requests and responses between Wireless device and OracleAS Portal is mediated by the Wireless Server Wireless devices make the first reques
410. rs Foundation Services Content Logout View Log Help Copyright 1996 2003 Oracle All rights reserved 8 2 1 1 Registered URLs The Application Setup includes the following OMP URLs a Address Book OMP URL Defines OMP URL for the Address Book application a Valid Values The OMP URL of the address book application a Default Value omp oracle services pim addressbook a Calendar OMP URL Defines the OMP URL for the Calendar application a Valid Values The OMP URL of the calendar application a Default Value omp oracle services pim calendar a Contact Rules OMP URL Defines the OMP URL for the Contact Rules application a Valid Values The OMP URL of the contact rules application a Default Value omp oracle services presence switcher a Directions OMP URL Defines OMP URL for the Directions application a Valid Values The OMP URL of the driving directions application 8 4 Administrator s Guide Wireless Application Configuration Parameters a Default Value omp oracle services location directions Directory OMP URL Defines the directory OMP URL a Valid Values The OMP URL of the directory application a Default Value omp oracle services pim directory FormFiller OMP URL Defines the OMP URL of the FormFiller application a Valid Values The OMP URL of the formfiller application a Default Value omp oracle services commerce formfiller Email OMP URL Defines the OMP URL of the Email application a Valid
411. rst click Create User in the Users screen The create screen appears Figure 4 3 with its fields populated by such default information as the user s status as enabled and the default language and time zone which are based on the corresponding configuration for the Wireless Site Enter the values as needed The user name password primary phone number PIN email address are required as is the user s language time zone and User Home Root Managing Users 4 11 Creating Users Figure 4 3 The Create User Screen Partial View Overview Users _ ummm Users gt Users gt New User Create User You are logged in as Orcladmin Basic Information User Preference User Name fiohnguestuser SCS Display Name fiohnguest ss CS S S Password eS ti lt C Password Confirmation F Primary Phone Number hss55555000 o Country code area code and number e g 16505067000 PIN F 6 10 digits chee PIN Confirmation Email Address jichn oracle com User Type Registered User x Mobile Station ID 15556666000 Language English z Time Zone 08 00 US Pacific Time K User Home Root Users Home I Remember my last location I Allow other applications to access my identification I Allow other applications to access my location Click Finish to complete the creation of the user The new user appears in the user list in the Browse User screen along with the message User with
412. rt timeout 420 gt lt process set gt lt process type gt lt process type id messaging_server module id messaging gt E wf Revert only Notification Engine You configure the notification applications running in the process and view their performance regarding notifications that are processed and sent subscribers to the notifications and errors Notification Event Collector You specify the components which process the notification events Data Feeder You configure the data feeders running in the process Managing the Wireless Server 3 17 The Home Page Messaging Server You configure the driver instances running in the process which determine what messaging services are provided You can also view the server performance such as the sending processing time receiving response time number of messages sent for each delivery type For the messaging server to function you must configure the messaging server drivers at the site level and the driver instances at the server process level Site Level Configuration Drivers are defined at site level under the Messaging process type Each driver configuration includes category capability Send Receive or Both and driver class For more information see Section 3 6 2 5 Process Level Configuration You specify the driver instances at Messaging Server process level Each driver instance is based on a site driver Because you add the values for the
413. rtalServiceid gt amp PAhome lt OracleP ortalService id gt The PAoid parameter allows the Wireless server to directly launch the Portal home page without having to navigate through the Wireless server s folder and service hierarchy The PAhome sets the Portals Home Page as the home page for the current wireless session 16 3 4 1 Wireless Tools and Customization as Portal Providers The post installer automatically registers the Wireless Tools and Customization as two Oracle Portal Providers Thus if an Oracle Portal user selects the two providers the user then sees two portlets one for the Wireless Tools and one for Customization If the URL for tools or Customization is changed the provider can be registered from Wireless System Manager part of Oracle Enterprise Manager 16 4 Notification Engine Integration The application event notification process uses the Wireless Notification Engine to deliver notifications to wireless devices It adds components that collect application events process user contact rules and formats notification contents Figure 16 7 presents an architectural overview of the various components of the notification process 16 20 Administrator s Guide Notification Engine Integration Figure 16 7 Integrated Notification Solutions Oracle Calendar Oracle Worklow Contact Rule Notification Event Collector Notification Event Feeder Notification Event Handler Or
414. rver administrator user a Default Value a Examples welcome password123 a Maximum Results Returned The maximum results returned to the user regardless of the query result set size 8 26 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail a Valid Values any integer value a Default Value 200 a Examples 200 300 Query Names A system assigned name to the internal queries a Valid Values Q1 a Default Value Q1 Query Title Caption displayed when doing queries Example Search a Valid Values any caption name a Default Value Search a Examples Search Search by Name LDAP Server Search Entry Point The entry point in the LDAP server that marks the starting point for queries such as dc oracle or dc com a Valid Values Any valid entry point into the LDAP server a Default Value a Example dc mydomain dc com Search Scope Defines the query search scope The allowable scopes are BASE for a base object search ONE for a one level search or SUBTREE for a subtree search a Valid Values BASE ONE SUBTREE a Default Value SUBTREE Query Visibility a For internal use only Defaults to true a Valid Values true false a Default Value true Query Filter Attributes Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 27 PIM and Mail Defines the query attributes used in the filter expression such as givenname sn orclmailemail or telephonenumber a Valid Values Any attribute name defined in the LDAP server a Default
415. rver to automatically attach this prefix to a JSP entered in the Input Parameters page of the Service Manager s Master Application Creation Wizard When entering a JSP value in this wizard you need only enter the JSP For example if you enter a remote JSP called myApp jsp into the wizard the Wireless server attaches the URL prefix making this value into http remote_host port apps myApp jsp The default format is http lt server gt lt http port gt The URL prefix for the remote JSP page that is invoked by the HTTP Adapter in HTTPS mode The default URL format is https lt server gt lt https port gt The URL for the Wireless Tools which must be configured to enable the functioning of the utilities on the Site Administration page of the System Manager that is the WebCache refresh for master applications and devices and the repository upload and download The default URL is http lt server gt lt port gt webtool The URL for the Wireless Customization Portal The default URL format is http lt server gt lt port gt mobile A user s device is redirected to this URL when the user opts to download a J2ME application The default URL format is http lt server gt lt port gt provisioning sun ota The URL to the proxy server that makes the Web services available to the J2ME applications built using the JEME Web Services Client Library The default URL format is http lt server gt lt port gt mcs w
416. ry Objects Upload WebCache Refresh WebCache Refresh Master Application WebCache Refresh Device 3 6 1 General Configuration The General Configuration section contains the configurations generic for the wireless system 3 6 1 1 HTTP HTTPS Configuration The HTTP HTTPS configuration page enables you to configure theWireless site s proxy server settings URLs and the Secure Socket Layer SSL certificates 3 6 1 1 1 Configuring the Proxy Server for HTTP The proxy server section enables you to configure the proxy properties used by Wireless for HTTP protocol If your network uses a proxy server then you must set these properties to enable the proper Managing the Wireless Server 3 27 Site Administration functioning of such components as provisioning server geocoding and the XMS center Note If your Wireless system does not use an HTTP proxy server then you do not need to configure the proxy server properties To configure the proxy server specify the proxy server host port and exception addresses If you opt to require the proxy server to require authentication then you must also provide the user name and password 3 6 1 1 2 Configuring the URLs for the Wireless Site This page enables you to also define the URLs for the site These URLs which are listed in Table 3 3 can be used as the virtual URLs for Wireless servers To enable the URLs defined in this page select Use the Wireless Site URLs in th
417. s 5 Right click Mailbox Store and then select Properties The Properties Page appears 6 Select the Security tab Figure 17 2 17 4 Administrator s Guide Configuring the Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server Figure 17 2 Mailbox Store Properties Mailbox Store HYAN PC Properties x General Database Limits l Full Text Indexing l Details Policies Security Name Enterprise Admins HYANDOM1 Enterprise Ad Everyone lt i Exchange Domain Servers HYANDOM1 Exc HYAN PC HYANDOM1 HYAN PC notificationreg notificationreg hyandom us Add Remove Permissions Allow Deny Full control Read Write Execute Delete Read permissions Advanced Vv Allow inheritable permissions from parent to propagate to this object Cancel Apply Help 7 Under the Security tab click Add and then select the user notificationreg from the list of users and then click OK Note Be sure to select Full control is selected for the notificationreg user 8 Right click the Mailbox Store and select Properties to go to the property page 9 Under the Security Tab click Add then select the user notificationreg from the list of users as depicted in Figure 17 3 and then click OK Integrating Wireless Notification with Microsoft Exchange 17 5 Configuring the Microsoft Exchange 2000 Server Figure 17 3 Selec
418. s In this case the administrator defines a single color set which has all of the color definitions for the first device This color set is then inherited by the second device which would only overwrite the colors that are different between the ColorSets Yes Yes This element defines a color Yes No Describes the type of device associated with the style set The two types supported devices are PDA and Phone A lt ColorSet gt element consists of multiple lt Color gt elements The following table describes the properties common to all lt Color gt elements Managing Foundation Services 7 23 Managing Regions Table 7 12 ColorSet Color Element Properties Property Name Required Multiple Description Name Y N The name of the Style ColorDesc Y N The 24 bit color code of the given color for example White FFFFFF Defining SDUSize Information for a Device The lt SDUSize gt element enables the renderers for a given device to render an optimized amount of information on pages For a given device the SDUSize is the upper limit on the amount of information in bytes that the network can carry to this device A lt SDUSize gt element consists of two child elements The following table lists their properties Table 7 13 SDUSize Element Properties Property Name Required Multiple Description Name Yes No The name of the type of device The two types of devices supported are Phone and PDA Value Yes No Th
419. s SSO Server Wireless requestto user and XML login 50 sends form Server redirect form Figure 11 1 depicts the events from the login request to the application result returned to the user as follows 1 The wireless user accesses the Wireless and Voice Portal by entering a URL of the following form http lt host gt lt port gt ptg rm The Wireless and Voice Portal public page appears displaying links for public and private Wireless and Voice Portal applications Mobile Single Sign On 11 3 Wireless Single Sign On The user requests a private application or selects the key icon that invokes the SSO page Figure 11 2 depicts the portion of this page where users enter their names The SSO server searches for the encrypted SSO cookie If the cookie is present then the server uses it to identify the user The server then sends the single sign on redirect form Step 7 This occurs if the user is already authenticated by an external partner application Section 11 2 2 If the cookie is not present then server sends the Wireless XML login form to Wireless and Voice Portal Wireless and Voice Portal transforms the Wireless XML login form to the appropriate markup language and sends the converted form to the device browser The user submits the login form with the user name and password The Wireless and Voice Portal forwards the login form to the SSO server The SSO server authenticates the user If authentica
420. s Granted The role or roles granted to the user For information on user roles see Section 4 5 4 4 1 Finding Users with Quick Search To find users using Quick Search you first select the type of search by selecting from the following options in the drop down list a User Name a Display Name a Phone Number a Email Address Enter the search string in the Search By field For example enter the user s display name in this field From the drop down list select the match type matches starts with ends with or contains and then click the Go button The list of users corresponding to the search criteria appears If you want to specify more search options such as finding a user belonging to a specific group or with a specific role click Advanced Search to further define your search 4 4 1 1 Using Advanced Search To find users in Advanced Search you first select the type of search a User Name a Display Name a Phone Number a Email Address Enter the search string in the Search By field For example enter the user display name in this field Use the drop down lists to select the group to which the user 4 8 Administrator s Guide Creating Users belongs the role granted to the user and the user type There are three types of Wireless users anonymous users who are guest users virtual users and registered users When an unregistered user accesses a Wireless site Wireless detects the user and creates a virtua
421. s cannot be disclaimed and can be openly verified as valid For example in the mobile commerce world payments cannot be denied Non repudiation would allow for such transactions to be openly verifiable and undeniable by the parties involved Non repudiation mechanisms are based on digital signatures which are analogous to regular ink signatures Among the many digital signature schemes are DSA Digital Signature Algorithm Schnorr s signature and RSA signature DSA being the most widely used since the U S government has used it as the Digital Signature Standard FIPS 186 In the wireless world digital signature mechanisms vary from device to device based on the device s capabilities Below are the different means of generating digital signatures across several devices However the developer must provide code integration for these non repudiation mechanisms a WAP Digital signature mechanism is carried out through WMLScript s signtext mechanism available with WAP 2 0 a SMS the non repudiation service sends an SMS to the end user GSM phone requesting a signature The SMS device detects the signature request and asks the user to enter a PIN to authenticate the user locally to start the signing process The end user after reviewing the content to be signed authorizes or rejects the signing and the encryption enabled SIM chip on the device proceeds with the signature a Email non repudiation can be enabled for email cli
422. s from that of the parent folder A list of the renderer types for a folder These include a System The default system object sorting styles Custom The object display and sorting styles of another folder or application that dictates the display logic a Inherited The display style of an ancestor folder which has a custom renderer If there is no ancestor folder or if the ancestor has a no custom rendering then the default system sorting style is applied This is a required field The URI of an image used as the icon that appears on top of the screen when this folder becomes the current folder You do not need to specify the format type in this URI as Wireless selects the image format appropriate to the user s device Managing Content 5 7 Managing Application Links Table 5 3 Parameters of the Content Manager Create Folder Screen Parameter Value Menu Icon URI The URI of an image used as the icon that appears next to the folder in a menu listing You do not need to specify the format type in this URI as Wireless selects the image format appropriate to the user s device Title Audio URI The URI of the audio file for example a wav file read aloud by voice reader software when users access a folder You do not need to specify the format type in this URI as Wireless selects the audio file format appropriate to the user s device Menu Audio URI The URI of the audio file for example a wav file read aloud
423. s into Application categories which organize Wireless applications into different grades of service and cost Premium Greate Clicking the Categorize Content tab invokes the Application Categories screen Figure 5 10 which includes a table listing the current application link categories From this table you select an application link category for editing or for deletion Clicking the Create button invokes the Create Application Category page which you use to create an application category and assign access points to the category After you create a category you then associate application links with that category 5 6 1 Creating an Application Link Category In the Create Application Category screen enter a name for the application link category For example enter Premium This is a required field You can optionally enter a description You then associate an access point with the category thereby making all of the applications associated with this category accessible through the selected access point The access points are created using the System Manager For more information see Section 5 6 2 1 If needed click Add to select additional access points 5 6 2 Assigning Applications to an Application Link Category After you create an application category you add Async applications to the application category To do this select an application from the browsing screen of the Publish Content tab and then click Categorize
424. s of a Driver To determine the need for changing the number of sending and receiving threads users check the number of enqueued messages in the following table trans_t_queue_number The queue_number for the driver can be found from the table trans_driver_queue If the number of enqueued messages is high then increasing the number of sending threads de queues messages more quickly However increasing the number of sending threads can increase the I O wait on the database machine An optimum number of sending threads can be found by varying the number of threads and studying the I O on the system and the de queing rate 13 2 1 1 1 Increasing the Number of Sending Threads for Driver Instance Using the System Manager you can increase the number of sending threads and in turn hasten the dequeing of messages by editing a driver instance You use the System Manager s driver properties screen to edit a driver instance Figure 13 2 To access this screen select a messaging server process from the Standalone Processes section of the Home screen The detail screen for the messaging server process then appears From the Drivers Instance table select a driver and then click Edit The Driver Instance 13 4 Administrator s Guide Transport Performance Monitoring Properties screen appears with its field populated by the values set for the selected driver Note All of the values for a driver instance including the number of sending
425. s specific and present Wireless solution The principles of security are a Communication Data Privacy Unintended parties cannot observe data during transmission on the network a Data Privacy usually denotes encryption of data either at the transport layer or at the application layer a Technologies for communication data privacy are Virtual Private Networks VPNs and secure transport layer protocols for example WTLS TLS a Authentication Verifying the identity of one or more parties that is who is the user Wireless Security 10 1 Overview a Authentication denotes a wide range of technologies with different requirements and degrees of security including user names and passwords certificate based 2 or 3 factor authentication Authorization Access control of authenticated parties that is what can the user do a Authorization involves checking bindings between user identities with user capabilities what is this user allowed to do a Most authorization systems involve the concepts of Users Groups Roles Policies and Access Control Lists ACLs Data Integrity Data cannot be tampered with when in transit or in storage a Data Integrity means protection from malicious or accidental data alteration data omission and data replay that is avoid replay attacks a Several technologies provide data integrity in such forms as Message Authentication Codes MACs digital signatures protection
426. s to an Application Link Category ssesssssssessssssesseseesee 5 26 Adding SMS Routing Information ss ssessessssssssessesssestestsstssrestentesenssenienresressesneseenee 5 27 Managing Alerts Deprecated isisisi ieii a a easi 5 28 Searching for Topics and Alerts Deprecated sesssssssssesissesssssssstesiesressessestesee 5 28 Creating an Alert Deprecated 0 cscs ceseseececesssseseececessnessseseneseseesenees 5 30 Editing ar Alertness a hak eaten ths a esvens e a sears S 5 32 Deleting Topics and Alerts inneni a aee a ee ASO Eae a A Ea 5 32 Moving Alerts nakran weir eerie atid AE O E Aai 5 32 Creating a Topicos Scie tec eeu einai e M p eaten ean N 5 33 Editing a Topicpet aamen a a e a a a R a Aai 5 33 Assigning Alerts and Topics to a User Group ses ssesssesiesisressssssesiesiesressnsneseesee 5 33 Removing Alerts and Topics from User Groups ss esssssssssssesiesssesisressesserseeresses 5 33 vi 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 4 3 6 4 4 6 4 5 6 4 6 6 5 6 5 1 6 5 2 6 5 3 Administering Mobile Studio OVVIE Wese onks terar ev ioen areas ERNS AKS deor S e Ee Era E a SAS EAEAN NAT 6 1 Configuring Mobile Studio cccceccsssseseesesssssesescsesesesescscsssesesescsssesesesesessseseseessssneceeeses 6 2 Accessing Mobile Studio Administration ccccccescseccscsenesescseseeececesssseseececsssnsneseeses 6 3 Manacing LOcalesiscisc iissccccsscssigssceoteshasecsaueoSonsinadsotasedovevesiesestovehat
427. scripts to access and transform processed XML documents DTD Document Type Definition A file in an XML document that defines how the application presenting the document should interpret the XML document end user A person who accesses a Wireless service from a client device filtering The process of transforming content by replacing existing markup tags with tags that represent another format HDML Handheld Device Markup Language A reduced version of HTML designed to enable wireless pagers cellular phones and other handheld devices to access Web page content IMAP Interactive Mail Access Protocol A hierarchical mail storage and retrieval structure HTML HyperText Markup Language The document format that defines the page layout fonts and graphic elements as well as the hypertext links to other documents on the Web JNDI Java Naming and Directory Interface A set of APIs that provide directory and naming functionality to Java applications JSP JavaServer Pages A technology based on Java servlets which separates the functions of Web page layout and content generation JavaServer Pages technology enables the creation of server generated Web pages incorporating dynamic content LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol Protocols for accessing directories The LDAP protocols support TCP IP master application The core implementation of aWirelesse application The master application invokes a specific adapter a
428. seeecesessseseeesesesesseeseseeseeeeees 5 5 Creatine a Folder nunas okie rpe aaan Eo aE ean a natin meinen 5 6 Editing A Foldet eshini n a a e reSt 5 10 Creating an Application LINK isisisi aasi iaa eae ai 5 10 Editing an Application Link sssessssssssessesssssessiesisseessssiesientessnsnesteseenensnesnesnieneenesnes 5 15 Testing an Application Link cecesessssseseseensssesesssesssescscssseseecsesssnseseecseen 5 16 Debugging an Application Link cccc ccc cccseceseeeseececeeseseseececessssneseseneseseesenens 5 16 Creating User BookiarkS sssrin oeiia SS 5 17 Editing a Bookmarks enipe aa raana E E aieeaa Aa 5 19 Moving Folders Application Links and Bookmarks sssssssssssesssissessssseeseesesses 5 19 Defining Acc ss Controlia erases aea nee aisee aie aair a etetal 5 20 Managing a User Gro Piesies erinan aaien ETE E E 5 20 Managing the Contents of a User Group ss ssssssesississsssesiesiesesssesteniesressesneneesee 5 21 Greating User Home Root Folders ciscccccscseocsestasseetceliessteasessadavsectssieuvecstersestensesedovdetes 5 22 Editing a User Home Root Folder ssnnsnssusiersisiusnssinissni ianiai 5 25 Deleting a User Home Root Folder 0 ccccccecsessssssssseseseeseescscssseseecsesesnsnseecseees 5 25 Cates orizing Content se eeir nase esa e E rp ea SE Sa e ESE a SE E baat sed ea 5 25 Creating an Application Link Category ss sssessesissesssssersissessesssesiesiesressesneseenee 5 26 Assigning Application
429. select the application link in the browsing screen and then click the Edit button From the menu on the editing screen you can select the values that you want to edit such as those for the general parameters the input parameters the Async agent parameters if applicable and the additional parameters Step 2 through Step 4 of the wizard Note You can only edit the input parameters of an application link if the input parameters of the master application on which it is based have been designated as Modifiable For more information on developing master applications see the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide 5 3 5 1 Certifying an Application Link Based on a J2ME Application When editing an application based on a J2ME Java 2 Micro Edition master application the menu of the editing screen includes another option API Scan This option enables you to select an API scan policy that checks the application for malicious APIs calls which may damage a user s device These policies are defined using the Foundation Manager For more information see Section 7 8 To scan a policy select API Scan and then the appropriate version of an API scan policy and then click Certify Managing Content 5 15 Managing Application Links 5 3 5 2 Configuring a Module Application Link You can configure a modulable application link by entering the URL of its configuration page in the Module Configure URL field of the applicati
430. sers need only to reply with a transaction ID and the application parameters Application Categories The categories associated with an application category access point The field is read only and it only appears when you edit an access point This field is populated with values only if you did not select the Allowed to Access All Applications option See the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide for more information on PremiumSMS ReverseCharge SMS and actionable message reply Async Listener The Async Listener Configuration page enables you to configure the system settings for Async Listener including the number of working threads command format application help default application short name and actionable message reply See the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide for system configuration parameters for the Async Listener and for configuration parameters for actionable messages Note The short name for replying to an actionable message must be unique among all the short name for Async application links Messaging Server Client You must specify the Messaging Server client configuration for the Async Listener because it is a client of the Messaging Server You can add delete or update the Managing the Wireless Server 3 45 Site Administration hooks used before or after sending a message the pre send and post send hooks or before or after receiving a message Table 3 14 d
431. seseeeseneessecseessescsesesseesessseseeeeeseeseees 10 13 10 4 2 Data Privacy Deployment Solutions 00 0 0 cece ceccseseseeceseseececseeeseseececesessneneeeeanes 10 13 10 4 3 Non R pudidt n istea iia a a Ee E S SEE AE 10 21 11 12 13 Mobile Single Sign On 11 1 OW CL VA CW ceisvensseiSbendeidtscernads a a a a teatime eee ea daos Eeoa a bettas 11 1 11 1 1 Oracle Application Server Wireless Concepts and Architecture 0 11 2 11 2 Wireless Single Sien O s see r bats cgiesSedhs caval E a i 11 2 11 2 1 Authenticating Through Wireless and Voice Portal esseseseeneneeeees 11 3 11 2 2 Authenticating by Requesting a Partner Application s sssssessssssississsseeseesesses 11 5 11 2 3 Authenticating by Mod OSS0 i0 scsesssccsccieh teases in a S 11 7 11 2 4 Authenticating through Voice ss sssessssessessessierisiessissessessensissesnesnensienesnesneesneseenee 11 8 11 3 Wireless Single Sign Offrir ieina E E E E E Ei 11 8 11 3 1 Logging Out from Oracle Application Server Wireless cccseeeeseeeeeeees 11 8 11 3 2 Logging Out from a Partner Application ss ssssesssssssesssssesrissessessresteniesressnsneseenee 11 9 11 3 3 Logging Out from a Web based Oracle Application Server Application 11 9 11 4 The Wireless Change Password Page cccccccssssseseeessssssseesessssesesesnsseseseseeeseseees 11 9 Activity Logging 12 1 Activity Logging Oyet View mihian eann aine a eaaa S e aa E Rra aE aani 12 1 12
432. sing from a pocket PC device 9 2 accessing from Internet Explorer 9 2 WTLS protocol security in WAP 10 15 X XMSC configuring 3 50 Index 7 Index 8
433. sing the Content Manager Chapter 9 Wireless Gateway Configuration Describes how to configure Wireless for voice and messaging communications for Async messaging and voice Chapter 10 Wireless Security Describes the principles of security in Wireless Chapter 11 Mobile Single Sign On Describes how mobile users authenticate when signing into Wireless Chapter 12 Activity Logging Describes the system logging Chapter 13 Optimizing Oracle Application Server Wireless Describes how to tune Wireless to optimize messaging transport Chapter 14 Load Balancing and Failover Describes how Wireless determines load balancing Chapter 15 Globalization Describes how Wireless determines locales and device encoding Chapter 16 Integrating Wireless with Other Components Describes how to integrate Wireless with such Oracle components as SSO single sign on OID Oracle Internet Directory and WebCache Chapter 17 Integrating Wireless Notification with Microsoft Exchange Describes how to integrate Wireless notification with the Mircrosoft Exchange Server Documentation Accessibility Our goal is to make Oracle products services and supporting documentation accessible with good usability to the disabled community To that end our documentation includes features that make information available to users of assistive technology This documentation is available in HTML format and contains markup to facilitate access
434. sitive data residing at the server side in the database can be protected through encryption and access controls a Log files provide security auditing of transactions and malicious activity a Attack countermeasures which usually include fire walls and demilitarized zones DMZs restrict direct application server exposure to the public network that is the Internet 10 1 1 2 Wireless Application Deployment Figure 10 2 depicts the deployment scenario for wireless devices The wireless device a device limited in both power and bandwidth stands at one end of the transaction The wireless device communicates over the air through a wireless network to a gateway component which performs the translation from the wireless network protocol to the wired network protocol so that the device can contact the application server Figure 10 2 Security Chain in Wireless Transaction Flow wireless network b wired network il N 1c a 4 gt wireless device wireless gateway application server The wired side of the wireless network is practically the same as the wired deployment scenario explained in Section 10 1 1 1 However because of the added components in the transaction flow the following security considerations arise a Network protocol conversions In contrast with the wired deployment scenario wireless application deployment requires that the wireless gateway intervenes in the communication to perform protocol conversions from the wire
435. sproxy proxy The URL to the MM1 entry point for the XMS Center The default URL format is http lt server gt lt port gt xms mm1 Managing the Wireless Server 3 29 Site Administration Table 3 3 The Instance URLs Parameter Value Audio Library URL Prefix Image Server HTTP URL Image Server HTTPS URL Voice Grammar Server URL The HTTP root to the audio files for catspeech concatenated speech For example if you set this to http localhost 7777 audio catspeech then the catspeech server expects all audio files associated with its libraries to originate from that location If this is set incorrectly then no audio associated with catspeech plays only TTS text to speech plays back The default URL format is http lt server gt lt port gt audio catspeech The URL to the Multimedia Adaptation service s image adaptation servlet in HTTP mode http lt server gt lt http port gt mcs media image The URL to the Multimedia Adaptation service s secure image adaptation servlet in HTTPS mode http lt server gt lt https port gt mcs media image The URL to the Multimedia Adaptation service s voice grammar adaptation servlet The default URL format is http lt server gt lt port gt mcs media vgrammar 3 6 1 1 3 Configuring SSL Certificates The SSL section enables you to configure your security certificates as either Base64 or PKCS 7 formatted certificate files to enable use of the
436. ss a Valid Values A string value a Default Value http localhost a Examples http 111 11 111 11 or http host mydomain com a Fax sender account The name of the account used by the fax server to send faxes a Valid Values A string value a Default Value Administrator a Examples Administrator a Faxes kept per user The number of recently sent faxes that are kept in the user s Fax History a Valid Values A non negative integer a Default Value 20 8 34 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail a Examples 20 Fax Items per page The number of faxes sent shown per screen in the Fax History a Valid Values A non negative integer a Default Value 9 a Examples 9 Query LDAP Server If set to true it enables retrieving of recipient addresses from the LDAP server a Valid Values A boolean value true false a Default Value false a Examples true Download directory Directory where fax documents are temporarily stored in the Oracle Application Server Wireless server Specify this location for attaching documents to a fax a Valid Values A path value a Default Value tmp a Examples c temp or tmp var Cover Page The cover page used when sending faxes The Default value is FCS doc The cover page document path is relative to the FCS directory on the fax server a Valid Values file name a Default Value FCS doc a Examples FCS2 doc Cover doc Debug If set to true then the log messages are be written to
437. sses 3 3 Accessing the System Manager in Standalone Mode cccccceceseteee cesses eeeeees 3 3 Accessing the System Manager through OEM cccsscssesescseeseseecenenesesssneeseenanenens 3 4 The Home Page ss sseaciesk viens ovine ete cities civegs N e 3 5 Basie Site Config uration iisipan a aae a ct teen betes Sts 3 7 SY SECT LOO IN Gra ie E E ete E E Lak se UDG TE R E Sie E RTR 3 9 Configuring the URLs of the Current Wireless Instance sssssessississerssessessee 3 11 Process Management ceisaisscs enen eae ae ssocsvivesashensidaesleassedsvishs avtscstiebietesss 3 14 Wireless Server Performance sicsica sies soon ssateesevind iona ea iao pees teen ise 3 20 Site Performance isi neoion aea ve aaah Siena aiden aA aE 3 21 Site Administration msns nee eina Mate Shes eel ee Ra eee Noe ets 3 26 General Configurators riiseni ea ei aaea E aeie 3 27 Component Configuration se sssessessestessissssrsssiesiestesesstnsiesienenstentesiesenssenteneetennenn 3 37 Vilite Siran e e E a a E E EEE E 3 54 Managing Users 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 2 4 3 4 3 1 4 4 4 4 1 4 5 4 5 1 4 5 2 4 5 3 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 8 1 Overy We arietis e E ear ae eE SEE custo E EEE EEE EEEE 4 1 ASSISMING User ROLES errer a araa EE S ETE RE EEE 4 2 Enabling Users to Access the Wireless Tools ccccccssesescsssesesesescseeescsssnsneceeses 4 5 Logging into the User Managet c ccccccscsccsssssesesescsesesescssssseececscssssseesecessssesnececsssnsnes
438. ssesrestsssiesiesessrestesieneeseess 17 13 Exchange Notification Administration in Oracle Application Server Wireless 17 18 Site Level Conti gra thon secs ieee iira ee A a a EE E 17 19 Configuring the Microsoft Exchange Notification Event Settings 00 17 19 Configuration and Running Notification Related Processes cccceeeeee 17 21 xi xii Send Us Your Comments Oracle Application Server Wireless Administrator s Guide 10g 9 0 4 Part No B10188 01 Oracle Corporation welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this document Your input is an important part of the information used for revision a Did you find any errors a Is the information clearly presented a Do you need more information If so where a Are the examples correct Do you need more examples a What features did you like most If you find any errors or have any other suggestions for improvement please indicate the document title and part number and the chapter section and page number if available You can send comments to us in the following ways a Electronic mail iasdocs_us oracle com a Postal service Oracle Corporation Oracle Mobile and Wireless Products 500 Oracle Parkway Mailstop 40P6 Redwood Shores California 94065 USA If you would like a reply please give your name address telephone number and optionally electronic mail address If you have problems with the software pleas
439. st message in the current bucket Last Takes the user to the last message in the current bucket New Messages Old Messages Delete Repeat Reply Folders Move Message Takes the user to the New Messages bucket and checks for any recent messages added to the server Takes the user to the Old Messages bucket Marks a message to be deleted and then takes the user to the next message Repeats the current message Initiates a dialog which asks the user to record a reply message This dialog includes the following commands Send it Sends the message and takes the user to the next message Cancel it Cancels the message and takes the user back to the original message Enables the user to select another to open and listen to its contents This command initiates a dialog which asks a user to select a particular folder and then press a DTMF tone which corresponds to that folder The application reads aloud nine folders at a time Use the More command to go to the next set of nine folders Initiates a dialog similar to the Folders dialog one that enables a user to move a message to a selected folder The message is marked for deletion from the initial folder after it has been moved Wireless Gateway Configuration 9 15 Configuring Wireless for Voice Applications Table 9 3 Email Commands Command Description Fax Message Fax All Fax Attachment Enables users to fax the body of a message to a specified n
440. sterisk for any protocol The comma separated list of carriers The speed level of the driver It can be from 0 to 10 The cost level of the driver It can be from 0 to 10 The driver send or receive capability The values can be SEND RECEIVE or BOTH The supported encoding of this driver such as UTF 8 The supported locale list of this driver You can add remove or update the locale list The class name with the full package name that implements the driver required field The driver class parameters You can add remove or update the parameters Each parameter has multiple attributes including Name The parameter name used by the driver class a Description The parameter description such as the meaning of the parameter a Mandatory Setting this flag marks the parameter as mandatory not setting the flag marks the parameter as optional a Default Value The default parameter value Out of the box Wireless provides 15 seeded drivers which support all of the delivery categories Each driver has a different set of class parameters By default all of these drivers are enabled See the Oracle Application Server Wireless Developer s Guide for information on details of the drivers in the discussion of the transport component Managing the Wireless Server 3 49 Site Administration Messaging Server Configuration Clicking the Messaging Server Configuration hyperlink invokes the Messaging Server Confi
441. subtab the Web based applications display the following types of OC4J applications running in Wireless OC4J instance with name and status information a Multi Channel Server a Async Listener a J2ME Web Service Proxy Server a Multimedia Adaptation Server a Provisioning Server a Wireless Tools a Customization Portal If the application name appears as a link then you can access a detail page that displays the application s performance information You can start or stop all the Web based applications by clicking the Start OC4J Instance or Stop OC4J Instance buttons 3 3 4 2 Standalone Processes The standalone processes display the following types of Wireless processes by name status and enabled flag a Notification Engine a Notification Event Collector a Data Feeder a Messaging Server a Performance Monitor a Location Event Server By selecting a process you can start or stop it as well as enable or disable it Clicking Add Process invokes a two step wizard that enables you to create a new process by first selecting the process type and entering the basic information about Managing the Wireless Server 3 15 The Home Page the process such as the name and then entering information specific to the process type You can also select an existing process and delete it Note You can only stop and start a process that has been enabled From the detail page which you access by clicking the process name l
442. system sorting style is applied Managing Content 5 23 Creating User Home Root Folders Table 5 10 Parameters of the General Screen for User Home Root Folders Parameter Value Title Icon URI Menu Icon URI Title Audio URI Menu Audio URI The URI of an image used as the icon that appears on top of the screen when this folder becomes the current folder You do not need to specify the format type in this URI as Wireless selects the image format appropriate to the user s device The URI of an image used as the icon that appears next to the folder in a menu listing You do not need to specify the format type in this URI as Wireless selects the image format appropriate to the user s device The URI of the audio file for example a wav file read aloud by voice reader software when users access a service You do not need to specify the format type in this URI as Wireless selects the audio file format appropriate to the user s device The URI of the audio file for example a wav file read aloud by voice reader software along with the service in a menu listing You do not need to specify the format type in this URI as Wireless selects the audio file format appropriate to the user s device Step 2 Assigning the Rendering Options Clicking Continue on the General screen invokes the second and final screen used to create a user home root folder the Rendering screen This screen contains the display op
443. t For specifying location mark address fields Location Mark Address Format This page enables you to configure the format of location mark address To do this you select all of the attributes that you want to display for a location mark address This configuration is used in Customization Portal Company Name a Address Line 1 a Address Line 2 a Address Last Line a Block C City a State a Postal Code a Postal Code Extension a County Country 3 6 2 7 Notification Event Collector You configure the following for the Notification Event Collector component 3 52 Administrator s Guide Site Administration Microsoft Exchange Notification Event Settings For Wireless to process notification messages from Microsoft Exchange Server accessing details to the Exchange Server needs to be configured in the system For the details of each configuration parameter refer to Chapter 17 Integrating Wireless Notification with Microsoft Exchange 3 6 2 8 Provisioning Server You configure the following for the Provisioning Server component Provisioning Server Configuration The Wireless Provisioning Server enables application providers to create and publish applications as well as serve content to the end users when they download a selected application The download protocol differs based on the application type such as a J2ME MIDlet or a ring tone and the line provisioning protocol The appropriate provisioning driv
444. t Privacy WEP protocol a protocol operating at the data link layer designed to protect communication but which has been shown to be insecure Therefore wireless networks that depend solely on WEP for privacy are found to be vulnerable to war driving an attack where the eavesdropper drives by with a wireless receiver to break WEP security and decode wireless information Figure 10 5 Wireless Application Protocol WAP WAP Wired Network Gateway Application Server Pry Internet Zone A Grey Zone Security in the Wireless Application Protocol WAP is currently specified in the WTLS Wireless Transport Layer Security protocol Similar in design to SSL TLS but optimized for bandwidth and power WTLS provides privacy from the wireless device to the WAP gateway allowing for server authentication and mutual authentication modes WAP has been widely criticized by the security sector on what is commonly called the WAP gap which breaks end to end communication data privacy The WAP device communicates with the WAP gateway through WTLS the WAP pictured in Figure 10 5 and the WAP gateway in turn communicates with the application Wireless Security 10 15 Installing and Configuring Oracle Application Server Wireless Security server using SSL Internet zone Since WTLS is not compatible with SSL because of handshake optimizations a protocol translation needs to occur at the WAP gateway the Grey Zone pictured in Figure
445. t Users Computers Groups F select users Computers or Groups Look in ie hyandom1 us oracle com zi IWAM_HYAN PC hyandom1 us oracle com Users krbtgt hyandom1 us oracle com Users amp SystemM ailbox 34DFEEOF F45D 4943 424E 8 hyandom1 us oracle com Microsoft Exchange Sy i Hao Yan hyan hyandom1 us oracle com hyandom1 us oracle com Users m notificationreg notificationreg hyandom1 us or hyandom1 us oracle com Users lt i Domain Computers hyandom1 us oracle com Users f2 Domain Controllers hyandom1 us oracle com Users x Check Names notificationreg notificationreg hyandom us oracle com OK Cancel In the following dialog box make sure Full control is selected 17 3 1 3 Registering Event Sink and Registration COM Objects This section provides you with an example of registering the event sink and the registration com objects 1 On local drive of the Exchange Server machine create a directory for holding the notification related files In this example you create a directory on the C drive called oracle 2 Copy files NotificationSink dll and RegCom dl1 from the Oracle Application Server Wireless installation directory SORACLE_HOME wireless sample exchange to the oracle directory 3 Open a command prompt Change directory to c oracle Use the regsvr32 tool to register the two dll files as follows regsvr32 NotificationSink dll regsvr32 RegCom dll 17 6 Administrato
446. t to OracleAS Portal server OracleAS Portal redirects the device request to Wireless Server The OracleAS Portal appends two parameters to the redirected URL the two query parameters appended are PAoid and PAhome Both PAoid and PAhome contain the value of the object id service id in the Wireless repository of the Portal s HTTP adapter service The syntax of the redirected URL is http 9iASWSerrver port ptg rm PAoid lt OraclePortal object id gt amp PAhome lt OraclePortal object id gt The PAoid parameter allows the Wireless server to directly launch the Portal home page without having to navigate through the Wireless server s folder and service hierarchy The PAhome sets the Portals Home Page as the home page for the current wireless session 16 3 2 Developing Wireless Portlets Portlets are owned by entities called providers One provider can manage one or many portlets Providers are the backbone behind the Portlets being displayed on each page Portal supports a Web Provider framework that is written as a web application It is installed and hosted on a web server and is remote from the Portal A portlet exposed as a Web Provider can be developed in any web language A Web Provider communicates with Oracle Application Server Portal using SOAP XML OraclePortal supports a Java based Portal Developer Kit PDK framework to develop portlets and services The Java PDK Framework is a set of services that enable Java programmers to easi
447. t to SSO for authentication To further secure the communication channel between the browser and the Wireless tools or the wireless gateway for example the WAP gateway or the voice gateway you can enable SSL on the Oracle HTTP Server For more information refer to the documentation for the Oracle HTTP Server on configuring SSL In addition you can also enable the SSL based secured communication channel between the Wireless Multi Channel Server and remote application server by installing either Base64 certificate or PKCS 7 formatted certificate at the Wireless Multi Channel Server You can install such certificate through the System Manager accessed through Oracle Enterprise Manager For information on using the System Manager to configure an SSL certificate see Section 3 6 1 Single Sign On is a feature one not specific to Wireless that eliminates the need for repeated authentication within a period of time when crossing application boundaries for the same trusted domain It also provides for centralized user credentials which avoids the problem of having to remember passwords for different applications thereby increasing security for the whole system as passwords do not need to be written down Wireless is fully integrated with Oracle Application Server Single Sign On which currently supports authentication through user names and passwords over all visual HTTP based channels and through account number and PIN for voice based cha
448. t would for example during the initial session after the Wireless repository has been installed an administrator can configure the Wireless server within minutes using a two step configuration wizard accessed through the Basic Site Configuration link The Wireless administrator need only add the name and port values for the HTTP and HTTPS proxy server the address for the Wireless access points for the Async SMS and IM servers and then set the correct time zone for the server For more information see Section 3 3 1 in Chapter 3 Managing the Wireless Server Note If the Configuration Status indicates that the Wireless sever has not been configured then the administrator must configure the server before starting the processes Verifying the Wireless Installation 2 3 Accessing the Wireless Customization P ortal 2 2 Accessing the Wireless Customization Portal This section describes how to log into the Wireless Customization Portal Before using the Wireless Customization Portal you must access the login page by entering the following URL in a browser http lt host gt lt port gt mobile Login uix For example you access the login page through the following URL http hostname 7777 mobile Login uix Note 7777 is the default port number for Oracle Application Server Wireless The port number range is 7777 to 7877 To ensure that you are using the correct port number check the port number for Oracle
449. te 1 Microsoft Exchange Server 5 5 Oracle Calendar Server 5 2 Note For the Address Book application to connect to the Microsoft Exchange Server see Section 8 3 10 1 8 3 1 2 Connecting the Address Book Application to the Oracle Collaboration Suite To connect the Address Book to the Oracle Collaboration Suite Copy the following JAR files from the Oracle Collaboration Suite middle tier to ORACLE_HOME wireless lib on the Wireless middle tier a ORACLE_ HOME jlib esmail_sdk jar a ORACLE HOME jlib escommon jar a ORACLE_ HOME jlib esldap jar Include these JAR files in the OC4J classpath by adding the following lines to ORACLE_HOME j2ee OC4J_Wireless config application xml a lt library path wireless lib esmail_sdk jar gt a lt library path wireless lib escommon jar gt a lt library path wireless lib esldap jar gt Configuration Parameters a Cana user use different server settings Should the end user be able to edit the server configuration a Valid Values A boolean value true false 8 8 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail Default Value false Examples true false a Address Book Java Driver Class The driver class implementing the backend a Valid Values For Oracle Collaboration Suite oracle panama module pim addressbook oracle UMAddressBook For Microsoft Exchange Server oracle panama module pim addressbook exchange ExchangeAddressBoo
450. te button on the browsing screen To define a policy you must provide a name for the policy and then optionally enter a description 7 30 Administrator s Guide Managing API Scan Policies Enter the XML Document which defines the malicious APIs This XML document is based on Oracle Application Server Wireless Filter XML Schema The text area of the Create API Scan screen displays a sample API scan document which defines the package classes and methods of the API that the Wireless server references when scanning the J2ME application Click Finish to complete the API scan policy 7 8 1 1 Editing an API Scan Policy The Edit button in the API scan policy browsing screen enables you to edit the description of an API scan policy To edit an API scan policy first select the policy from the browsing screen and then click Edit 7 8 1 2 Deleting an API Scan Policy To delete an API scan policy from the repository select the policy from the browsing screen and then click Delete 7 8 1 3 Enabling or Disabling an API Scan Policy To enable or disable an API scan policy from the repository select the policy and then click Enable Disable Managing Foundation Services 7 31 Managing API Scan Policies 7 32 Administrator s Guide Part Ill Configuration and Integration This section includes the following chapters Chapter 8 Configuring the Out of the Box Applications Chapter 9 Wireless Gateway Configuration Cha
451. ter 4 Managing Users For information on logging into the Oracle Application Server Wireless Tools including the Content Manager see Section 2 3 in Chapter 2 Verifying the Wireless Installation 9 2 3 2 1 Provisioning the Voice Main Menu Application To set up the voice portal provision a telephone number to Wireless Gateway Configuration 9 9 Configuring Wireless for Voice Applications http lt server name gt lt server port gt ptg rm PAlogin true amp PAoid lt oid of Voice Main Menu gt start true You define the PAOID attribute using the OID Object ID in the Wireless Repository of the Voice Main Menu application which is listed in the Object OID column of the browsing and search result tables of the Content Manager For example the Object ID for the Voice Main Menu application is noted as 303 in Figure 9 1 To find this number you first log into the Wireless Tools and then select the Content Manager the Content tab as illustrated in Table 9 1 The Content Manager defaults to the Publish Content subtab displaying the browsing screen From the table listing application links find the Voice Main Menu application Its OID is listed on the same row in the Object ID column You can also use the Content Manager s search functions to retrieve the Voice Main Menu application For more information on searching for an application link in the Content Manager see Section 5 3 1 in Chapter 5 Managing Content Figu
452. the Oracle Application Server Wireless log file a Valid Values A boolean value true false a Default Value false Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 35 PIM and Mail a Examples true a Application Setup OMP URL The OMP reference use by the to the URL group a Valid Values An OMP URL a Default Value omp oracle applications appsetup a Examples omp oracle applications appsetup 8 3 4 1 Linking to the Fax Application You can link to the Fax application using the following virtual URL omp oracle services pim fax The Fax application has one input call parameter FAXTODO This parameter describes the type of actions to be performed Table 8 16 describes this mandatory input parameter Table 8 16 Values of the FAXTODO input Parameter Value Requirement Triggers Output NEWFAX SendNewFax SendNewFaxResult STATUS faxID CheckFaxStatusResult DELETE faxID deleteFaxResult FWD forwardFax forwardFaxResult sendNewFax The FAXTODO parameter includes sendNewFax group This mandatory group of parameters specify the information about the fax to be sent Table 8 17 describes the parameters of the sendNewFax group 8 36 Administrator s Guide PIM and Mail Table 8 17 Parameters of the sendNewFax Group Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value SENDER_NAME No Sender name A string For example SENDER_NAME Joe Smith SENDER_CORP No Sender company
453. the Oracle online Push Web Service the HTTP proxy setting is needed if you run your application behind a firewall See this Guide for steps on proxy changes Wireless Gateway Configuration 9 21 Configuring Wireless for Notifications 9 4 3 Non Oracle hosted Messaging Delivery Wireless ships with pre built network drivers that support major protocols that have been accepted as industry standards The pre built drivers handle communications protocols such as SMS short message for phone email paging or desktop voice and fax To enable those network channels you must configure the pre built drivers to work with their corresponding network servers 1 Identify to which external server to which Wireless connects including acquiring such connectivity and preparing for the values needed to configure the Wireless drivers depending on their particular protocols 2 Add the supported driver and configure its messaging properties 3 Create a Messaging Server or select an existing one 4 Create a driver instance and associate it with the Messaging Server on which it will run The driver instance properties must be configured to work with its corresponding external network connectivity 5 Start the Messaging Server For details on driver configuration see Section 3 3 4 2 Remove the pre configured PushClient driver and its corresponding instances if they are not used 9 4 3 1 Configuring Email based Message Delivery To conf
454. the box a Email a Address Book a Oracle Files a Calendar a Directory Users must be able to access this applications at all times To add more commands to the global grammar modify the following file for links between module applications lt iasw root gt iaswv20 wireless j2ee applications modules modules web common jsp globalGrammar jsp Modify the following file for the My Oracle main menu or another JSP for a personalized menu lt iasw root gt iaswv20 wireless j2ee applications voice voice web mainmenu MOC Grammar jsp 9 2 4 2 Testing the Email Application The Email application reads an email message on any configured IMAP or POP3 server By default the application begins reading the messages from the Inbox folder The application reads a bucket of New Messages before reading from the Old 9 14 Administrator s Guide Configuring Wireless for Voice Applications Messages bucket The application reads the messages continually until the user commands it to stop The application orders the New Messages from the oldest unread message to the newest unread message The application orders the Old Messages from the newest read message to the oldest read message The email application responds to voice commands described in Table 9 3 Table 9 3 Email Commands Command Description Skip or Next Takes the user to the next message Previous Takes the user to the previous message First Takes the user to the fir
455. the client request However if the page has expired it once again follows the same routine as it would in the event of a cache miss Integrating Wireless with Other Components 16 7 Integrating Wireless with WebC ache Figure 16 4 Cache Hit Scenario Client 1 Client requestiresponse Content Source Wireless Runtime 2 Runtime consults cache success DS Webcache 16 2 1 Configuring Caching for Wireless This section describes how to configure caching for dynamic content for the Wireless Site using the System Manager and how to enable caching for a master application using the Service Manager 16 2 1 1 Enabling Caching for the Site To cache dynamic content you use the System Manager s WebCache configuration page which you access by clicking the WebCache link in the System Manager s Administration page Figure 16 5 To configure the WebCache a To enable WebCache check the Enable WebCache checkbox 16 8 Administrator s Guide Integrating Wireless with WebCache a Next enter the complete URL that corresponds to the WebCache installation Be sure to include the port number at which WebCache listens default port is 1100 and the servlet path to the wireless runtime the default is ptg rm a Supply an invalidation password the default is Administrator This password must be the same one as the WebCache invalidation password that is set from the WebCache administration co
456. the user s response Note If end users cannot receive notifications during the testing of the Wireless integration with Oracle Workflow then you must check the log file for an ORA 4031 error which indicates that the notification service failed because of insufficient memory pool size in the database To increase the shared memory pool 1 Increase the value for the shared_pool_size parameter in the init ora file Typically the init ora file is located on the infrastructure machine in the ORACLE_HOME dbs directory 2 Restart the database for the change to take effect If end users still cannot receive notifications then you must further increase the size of the shared memory pool 16 4 1 2 Worklist Service This is the equivalent of the Oracle Workflow Notification Worklist through the Wireless portal Using OID the Worklist Service will connect to Workflow to retrieve a list of all the user s open notifications Each notification can be closed or responded to depending on the type of notification Integrating Wireless with Other Components 16 23 Notification Engine Integration 16 24 Administrator s Guide 17 Integrating Wireless Notification with Microsoft Exchange 17 1 Overview This chapter describes how to configure Microsoft Exchange to enable Wireless notification This chapter includes the following sections a Section 17 2 Wireless Notification Architecture a Section 17 3 Conf
457. the user only to the WAP device and then retrieves the user s WPKI private key stored in a SIM chip in the WAP phone to sign the challenge Once the authentication service receives the signed challenge it is verified with the user s WPKI public key possibly stored in a user s certificate repository such as the Oracle Wallet Manager and notifies the requesting application of the result WMLScript s signtext function is available with WAP 2 0 SMS SMS based authentication can occur in two ways with varying degrees of security The most basic authentication is to reply with a PIN to an SMS received from the authentication service Another SMS based authentication mechanism relies on digital signatures this mechanism is similar to the WAP case a Email Authentication consists of sending a reply with a PIN to an email sent by the authentication service Wireless Security 10 9 Resources Protected by Oracle Application Server Wireless a Voice The authentication service calls the user and asks for a PIN Once the user provides the PIN the system then authenticates the user 10 2 4 How Oracle Application Server Wireless Leverages AS Security Services The Wireless tools and the Customization Portal are protected by the Oracle HTTP Server SSO plugin module mod_osso The mod_sso protects all the URL access to the Wireless tools If any part of the URL access is not authenticated then the mod_ sso redirects the reques
458. ther notification specific data The notification event handler then looks up the target user s active contact rule to determine the user s preferred notification device type and address The notification event formatter is then invoked which generates the content of the notification customized for the user s device type The generated notification content is delivered to user s devices by the notification engine Integrating Wireless with Other Components 16 21 Notification Engine Integration The notification event handler is a system level notification application users do not need to explicitly create a notification subscription on this process to receive notifications Instead only the administrator user ORCLADMIN is subscribed to this process Depending on the application users can specify either in the Wireless Customization Portal or in the actual application itself the events for which they want to receive notifications For each notification processed the system looks up the contact rule of the target user and make sure that the correct user receives the notification Use the System Manager to start stop or configure notification event process For more information see Section 3 3 4 Note Only the ORCLADMIN user can subscribe to the notification event handler notification application If there is more than one subscription then users will receive multiple copies of each notification as many copies as th
459. this WORKPH 650 123 4567 contact Restriction white spaces special characters are encoded MOBILEPH No The mobile phone number of this contact HOMEPH No The home phone of this contact Restriction white spaces special characters are encoded WORKFAX No The business fax number of this contact Restriction white spaces special characters are encoded Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 13 PIM and Mail Table 8 3 Parameters of the Serialized Contact Group for Addressbook Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value EMAIL1 No EMAIL2 No WADDRLINE1 No WADDRCITY No WADDRSTATE No WADDRZIP No WADDRCOUNTRY No HADDRLINE1 No HADDRCITY No 8 14 Administrator s Guide The email or the first email address of this contact Restriction white spaces special characters are encoded The second email address of this contact Restriction white spaces special characters are encoded The first or only line of the Work address of this contact Restriction white spaces special characters are encoded The city or Work address of this contact Restriction white spaces special characters are encoded The state or federal region of the WORK address of this contact Restriction white spaces special characters are encoded The ZIP or postal code of the work address of this contact The country of the work address of this contact The first or on
460. through encryption Non Repudiation Authenticated users cannot disclaim the transactions that they have made a Non repudiation allows for digital content signing and enables contract enforcement by making transactions undeniable and openly verifiable that is verifiable to a third party a Non repudiation is usually achieved using digital signatures Storage Data Privacy Unintended parties cannot observe sensitive data for example credit card numbers during storage on the database or file system a Storage Data Privacy usually denotes a combination of access controls and encryption of highly sensitive data a AES Advanced Encryption Standard is the new symmetric encryption algorithm approved by the U S Federal Information Processing Standard FIPS Accountability As part of accountability auditing enables logging of security related traces for all other security principles Availability Includes attack countermeasures to protect the system from attacks such as denial of service attacks 10 2 Administrator s Guide Overview Note This chapter discusses the security principles which are specific to Wireless Communication Data Privacy Authentication Authorization and Non Repudiation Beyond this overview this chapter does not describe the non Wireless principles such as Storage Data Privacy 10 1 1 Wireless Security and Wired Security A Comparison This section describes the differences an
461. ti Aaa Si ea ae iai Sete 7 12 Editing a Transformera iior En ERE aE E E E EE i 7 13 Deleting a Transformer ci etree giant Haiti aie AR anaes 7 14 Managitig Adapters cccccits seciveacis deeseiheatbeasedesd dete Ea sap lvoe a A SE i E NENE 7 14 Creating an Adapter wiv ssithianeisninieteenssiniiavticeetedinsleennamiaiemaaentenats 7 14 Editing an Adapterning eini E ipeerordssavecnehuttlatacacctont dhasteesdvensaites cee couts 7 15 Deleting an Adapt r eie oe ia aa node lank ieee stacotes A E Re e EESE NSE 7 15 Setting Adapter Parameters sssssssssessssesressssterttsstssetensisrenesntenennesnennnnnteneeneeseens 7 15 Managing Repions iiiicssssaitiaresraasibescsesaectrsashlvcasaaisalecands A e ar aaaea n iea E oea a Ena 7 24 Managing Digital Rights Policies s sssssssessessessestessissessssstestestesessrententesesnrensenieneeneess 7 25 Creating a Digital Rights Policy iiiisiiinin sitoi aiia aisia i Eiaha 7 26 7 7 2 Editing a Digital Rights Policy ccccsecesecescssseseseseseescecsessseseecscsssssnessseneseseesenens 7 29 7 7 3 Deleting a Digital Rights Policy cccceeecssessesessnesssesesesessesesessseseecscsssseeeeeseen 7 30 7 74 Enabling or Disabling a Digital Rights Policy ccccceesecessseseseseseeceeeesseeeneenens 7 30 7 8 Managing API Sean Policies scsi cccsseisvaseent lites a ta telves a a E E SN 7 30 7 8 1 Cr ating an API Scan Policy anioia th tenia aee aapa a ar EE E 7 30 Part III Configuration and Integrat
462. tion input call parameters 8 70 input parameters 8 69 linking to 8 70 output parameters 8 72 overview 8 68 software requirements 8 69 Mail application configuration parameters 8 47 input call parameters 8 52 linking to 8 52 overview 8 47 Maps application input call parameters 8 74 input parameter 8 73 linking to 8 73 output parameter 8 75 overview 8 73 master applications input parameters 7 18 m Commerce applications APIs 8 75 overview 8 75 messaging configuration 9 21 Index 3 Messaging Server configuring 3 50 Messaging Server client adjusting the thread pool size 13 8 configuring for the Async Listener 3 45 configuring for the Notification Engine 3 48 Mobile Application Framework Adapter modifying 7 21 Mobile Studio accessing 6 3 adding a locale 6 5 adding a sample application 6 8 adding new locales 6 6 administration 6 4 algorithm for resolving locales 6 7 configuring 3 36 6 2 enabling default locales 6 5 finding a locale 6 5 locales 6 4 Sample Services 6 8 mod_osso 10 10 11 7 11 9 modules configuring OMP URLs 5 11 description 5 2 moving objects with the Content Manager 5 19 Multi Channel Server configuring 3 37 multimedia adaptation services configuring 3 43 m Wallet extending 8 100 N non repudiation 10 21 Notification Engine configuring 3 47 configuring the Messaging Server client 3 48 O OID integration with Wireless 16 1 OMP URLs 8
463. tion succeeds then the server sends the Wireless and Voice Portal the SSO redirect form If the authentication fails then the SSO server sends a login form Step 3 The Wireless and Voice Portal sends the user her home page or the requested URL 11 4 Administrator s Guide Wireless Single Sign On Figure 11 2 The Wireless Single Sign On Page the User Name Field HOME MENU CLR 11 2 2 Authenticating by Requesting a Partner Application Using the mobile device the user may also authenticate to the SSO server by requesting URLs for other partner applications In this case the authentication redirection agent is not the Wireless and Voice Portal but an application integrated with the single sign on SDK The first request to the Mobile Portal http lt server gt lt port gt ptg rm returns the home page of the anonymous user a guest user or the home page of the identified virtual user Mobile Single Sign On 11 5 Wireless Single Sign On Note A virtual user is a user who accesses a Oracle Application Server Wireless site but does not register When this occurs Oracle Application Server Wireless detects the user and creates a virtual user account for that user An anonymous user is a user who has not registered with Oracle Application Server Wireless but tries the applications as a guest user The User Manager can create an anonymous user guest account for each user group All of the unregistered users shar
464. tions 9 4 1 Configuring Wireless for Messaging Oracle Application Server Wireless features a messaging component that handles sending and receiving messages to and from devices Typically Wireless must be configured to connect to an external server to deliver messages such as SMS or email Wireless is pre configured to send SMS Voice Email and Fax messages without configuration by connecting to and utilizing the Oracle hosted online Push Service If you do not to use the Oracle hosted online Push Service you must set up the necessary communications channels Wireless includes a set of drivers that you can use to configure your network capability such as SMS Voice or email This may involve working with network providers carriers depending on your network type to set up the kind of connection the drivers to which drivers can connect for message delivery 9 4 2 Oracle hosted Messaging Delivery The Wireless messaging system is pre configured to connect to the Oracle hosted online Push Service which is capable of sending messages to SMS phones pagers voice and faxes No configuration is required Once the pre seeded Messaging Sever is started you can send messages The PushClient driver is configured to communicate with the Oracle hosted online Push Service running at the following URL http messenger oracle com push webservices Note The Wireless PushClient driver uses the HTTP protocol to communicate with
465. tions as desired by the application Other knobs that help GC performance include XX SoftRefLRUPolicyMSPerMB SoftReferences are cleared only when the need for memory is high The rate of collection can be changed using the above parameter The following value means 10 seconds per megabyte XX SoftRefLRUPolicyMSPerMB 10000 XX DisableExplicitUC Having this option in the command line disables all explicit calls to GC System gc It leaves all GC operations to the JVM and reduces unnecessary collections XX UseBoundThreads Apart from GC tuning the threading model of the JVM can be changed in Solaris It recommended to use the XX UseBoundThreads option to enable a one on one binding of Java threads with kernel level threads and provide significant performance boost XSS This is the size of the stack per thread Its default value changes from platform to platform If the number of threads running in the application is high then you can decrease the default size If the threads require a high stack space for example for 13 12 Administrator s Guide Tuning Operating System Performance parsing operations and recursive calls then increasing the stack size can provide significant performance increase Server This JIT option crashed the JVM JDK 1 3 1_01 Avoid this knob unless a patch becomes available You tune the value of these options according to the application type Table 13 1 describes a typic
466. tions specific to the renderer type System Inherited or Customized that you selected when setting the basic parameters for the user home root folder Because user home folders are the children of the user home root folders each user home folder inherits the rendering style of its parent the user home root folder Setting the System Default Rendering Options If you select a System renderer type then you select from among the following sorting options in the Rendering screen These options include the ascending and descending sorting style for folders by a ID a Name a Last Modified Date a Sequence Number a Access Count 5 24 Administrator s Guide Categorizing Content By default folders appear by sequence number and then by name Click Finish to complete the user home root folder Setting the Customized Rendering Options If you select the Custom renderer then the Rendering screen displays the root level folders and applications Using the Select button you choose the appropriate folder or application with the appropriate rendering style and then click Finish to complete the user home root folder Seiting the Inherited Rendering Options If you selected the Inherited renderer option then click Finish in the Rendering screen The inherited rendering for a user home root folder is the system default rendering 5 5 1 Editing a User Home Root Folder You can edit both the general parameters and the rendering options for
467. to a user group and Section 5 4 for assigning a user to a user group 10 2 2 Authentication Through User Names and Passwords Access Control to applications in Oracle Application Server Wireless is provided according to the channel used to connect to the server For visual HTTP based channels such as WAP Oracle Application Server Wireless authenticates users through user names and passwords for voice accessed applications Wireless uses account numbers and PINs for message related applications Wireless checks the user account information for example Wireless checks the email headers For web services related to the messaging infrastructure Wireless authenticates users through user names and passwords 10 2 3 Device Based Authentication Mechanisms Besides user name and passwords Wireless allows for other authentication mechanisms depending on the device However the application developer is responsible for choosing and integrating the appropriate mechanism for the target device The authentication mechanisms available in the various channels and how they can be used are as follows a WAP With WPKL the end users can utilize their WAP device to sign a challenge a randomly generated string sent by an authentication service The authentication service requests the signature through WMLScript s signtext function Upon receiving a signature request the WAP device prompts the user to enter his or her local PIN which authenticates
468. to be extracted For example enter home master You can include wildcards such as _ Managing the Wireless Server 3 55 Site Administration Note This filter expression applies only to downloading specific types of objects such as groups or adapters This filter does not work if the Download All Objects or Download by Object ID Download by Users or Download by Folder options 5 Select from among the following options 3 56 Administrator s Guide Download All Objects Download All Adapters Download All Devices Download All Groups Download All Location Marks Download All Applications Download All Transformers Download All Users Download All Master Notifications Download All Notifications deprecated Download All Data Feeders Download All Topics deprecated Download All Subscriptions Download All Application Categories Download All Application Category Access Points Download All Application Access Points Download by Object ID OID You must enter a range or comma separated list of OIDs Use a comma to separate your entries Download Applications by Folder For this option you must enter the folder path or folder URL Download Applications by User Name You must enter the user name You cannot enter multiple user names Site Administration 6 Click Download A Windows dialog appears In the Windows dialog specify the local XML file for the downloaded objects Clicking Ca
469. to the selected group Group Name The name for the user group This is a required field Description An optional description of the user group Create Click to create a user group The new user group appears in the table where it can then be selected for editing deleting or for content management 5 4 2 Managing the Contents of a User Group To manage the contents of a user group select the group and then click Assign Applications The Application Content page for the selected groups appears Figure 5 8 displaying the objects currently associated with the groups as well as the objects which can be assigned to the group From this page you can assign selected application links bookmarks or alerts notifications to a user group or remove them from a user group by clicking either the Add to Group or Remove from Group buttons Clicking Finish saves the changes made to the contents of a user group Managing Content 5 21 Creating User Home Root Folders Figure 5 8 The Application Content Page Access Control Content Content gt Access Control Content gt Assign Applications Welcome orcladmin Application Content of Guests Group Accessible Applications Remove From Group Select All Select None O Commerce 1827 i true Guests February 5 2003 1 55 09 PM PST O Examples 245 true Guests February 28 2003 4 01 33 PM PST O Oo Location 1832 z true Guests February 5 2003 1 55 29 PM PST
470. translator XLTORSITE http 3A 2F 2Fwww oraclemobile com 8 106 Administrator s Guide 9 Wireless Gateway Configuration This chapter describes how to configure Wireless for voice and messaging communications through the following sections a Section 9 1 Configuring Wireless for Browser Based Applications a Section 9 2 Configuring Wireless for Voice Applications a Section 9 3 Configuring Wireless for Async Enabled Applications a Section 9 4 Configuring Wireless for Notifications 9 1 Configuring Wireless for Browser Based Applications This section describes how to configure Wireless for PocketPCS Palm and WAP phone applications Topics include a Section 9 1 1 Configuring Wireless for PocketPCs a Section 9 1 2 Configuring Wireless for PALM a Section 9 1 3 Configuring Wireless for WAP 9 1 1 Configuring Wireless for PocketPCs This section describes the procedures for configuring Oracle Application Server Wireless to PocketPCS Topics include a Section 9 1 1 1 Connecting to the Network a Section 9 1 1 2 Accessing the Wireless Server Using Internet Explorer a Section 9 1 1 3 Setting Up the Internet Explorer Home Page Wireless Gateway Configuration 9 1 Configuring Wireless for Browser Based Applications 9 1 1 1 Connecting to the Network To access the Wireless server from your Pocket PC device connect the device to the network If the Wireless server is on your corporate Intranet t
471. triggers global sign off and none of the applications will be accessible until the user signs on through mod_osso again 11 4 The Wireless Change Password Page The Wireless user sees only two SSO pages the Login page and the Change Password page Unlike its PC counterpart the Wireless Change Password page appears only when users try to log in to the SSO server with an expired password Wireless users have no access to the Change Password link on the SSO Administration page Mobile Single Sign On 11 9 The Wireless Change Password Page 11 10 Administrator s Guide 12 Activity Logging 12 1 Activity Logging Overview The Oracle Application Server Wireless Performance Manager provides system administrators with information on the running status of Multi Channel Server Notification Engine messaging server data feed engine and the Async Listener The Performance Manager also provides statistical information enabling system administrators to study past performance and historical data to perform future trend analysis Wireless integrates with the OEM Oracle Enterprise Manager framework to provide a Web based monitoring tool which displays metrics for diagnosis based on the data logged 12 1 1 Overview of Activity Logger Internals The Activity Logger provides the common logging framework used by the runtime components Database logging is handled asynchronously because the runtime logging on the database carries a huge
472. ts which contain the user home folders Because the User Home root is the parent folder each of its children the user home folders inherits its rendering scheme For example to set a user home folder to display its contents in Name Ascend order that is in alphabetical order you must set the renderer type of the User Home Root to System and then select the Sort by folder rendering option Name Ascend Test 2532 February 27 2003 7 36 30 PM PST Users Home 240 January 27 2003 11 31 57 AM PST Cea Clicking the Create button enables you to add a new user home root folder Creating a user home root folder is a two step process Step 1 Entering the General Information After you click Create the General screen appears This screen includes the following parameters Table 5 10 Parameters of the General Screen for User Home Root Folders Parameter Value User Home Root Name The name of the user home root folder This is a required field Description A description of the folder Renderer Type A list of the renderer types for a folder This is a required field These include a System The default system object sorting styles a Custom The object display and sorting styles of another folder or service that dictates the display logic a Inherited The display style of an ancestor folder which has a custom renderer If there is no ancestor folder or if the ancestor has a no custom rendering then the default
473. ubscribe to notifications Manage devices Manage location marks and location settings n Manage contact rules Mobile studio users also have the end user role a user belonging to the StudioUser group can access the Mobile Studio Every Wireless user is granted the Mobile Customer Role by default This role is implicit to all users Application Server Control User Manager Wireless Customization Portal Mobile Studio for users assigned to the StudioUser group 1 6 Administrator s Guide Using This Guide 1 3 Wireless Module Applications OracleAS Wireless includes pre built Wireless module applications These are applications which you configure using the Content Manager include the following PIM Applications The PIM Personal Information Management applications also known as Collaboration Applications enable customers to integrate corporate email directory address book calendaring and instant messaging applications into their mobile enterprise portals Location Based Applications There are Location Based applications include the Location Picker Driving Directions Maps and Biz Directory business directory The Location Picker application enables users to pick and manage their frequently accessed locations Other pre configured applications such as Driving Directions and Maps applications use the Location Picker to acquire a location from the user Oracle m Commerce The Oracle m Comme
474. uest of information from the m Wallet for the given labels and variable names A string For example FORMFILLURL http www form fillerdemo com A string For example FORMFILLPARAMS First Name fname Bob Last Name lname Smith Credit Card CC_ NUMBER 123456789 Email EMAIL bob smith company com Address Address SomeWhereOnEarth Example FORMFILLPARAMS First Name fname Last Name lname Credit Card CC_ NUMBER Email EMAIL Address Address The valid values are TRUE For successful data retrieval FALSE For Unsuccessful retrieval of data from user issued cancellations or from the inability to retrieve dynamic mapping For example a SUCCESSCODE TRUE a SUCCESSCODE FALSE 8 5 1 8 Examples To retrieve data from the Form Filler Demo application configure the parameters as follows Input Parameters FORMFILLURL http www formfillerdemo com Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 83 m Commerce Applications a FORMFILLPARAMS First Name fname Last Name Iname Credit Card CC NUMBER Email EMAIL Address Address a APPLICATION FormFiller Demo a Output Parameters a FORMFILLURL http www formfillerdemo com a FORMFILLPARAMS First Name fname Bob Last Name Iname Smith Credit Card CC_ NUMBER 123456789 Email EMAIL bob smith company com Address Add ress some Street On Earth a SUCCESSCODE TRUE An example of the unsuccessful retrieval of data for the Form Filler Demo application is as follows a
475. ugh a public digital network such as the Internet then there is no need to secure the transport communication between the application server and the voice gateway from outsider threats however insider threats still remain Therefore communication security relies upon the phone line security itself 2 HTTPS secured connections between Voice Gateway and the Application Server In this solution scenario there is a secure HTTPS connection established between the voice gateway and the application server This point to point security solution makes most sense when the voice gateway and the application server reside in different domains such as when the voice gateway is hosted by a third party HTTPS is enabled with all major voice gateways for example Motorola and VoiceGenie for SSL secured connection between the gateway and the application server Finally there are phone devices and third party mechanisms that claim to provide voice encryption technology that protects communication between two ends of the phone conversation However the security of these technologies is not well established and some mechanisms have been breached In addition these mechanisms are expensive and not scalable as they require hardware deployment at the client side 10 20 Administrator s Guide Installing and Configuring Oracle Application Server Wireless Security 10 4 3 Non Repudiation Non Repudiation refers to the mechanism where accepted transaction
476. uide PIM and Mail a Example 555555000 mydomain com a Default phone number Specifies the default phone number to be used in the from field if none is specified by the user a Valid Values Any valid phone number a Default Value 555 555 5000 a Examples 555 555 5000 a Display All Delivery Types Specifies whether all the delivery types Email Fax SMS and Voice display regardless of whether they are configured If set to false then only configured delivery types are displayed for the user a Valid Values A boolean value true false a Default Value false Application Setup OMP URL The OMP reference to the for URL group a Default Value omp oracle applications appsetup 8 3 8 2 Linking to the Short Messaging Application You can link to a Short Messaging application using the following virtual URL omp oracle services pim sm Input Call Parameters Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 55 PIM and Mail The short messaging application includes the following input call parameters which are described in Table 8 27 Table 8 27 Input Call Parameters of the Short Messaging Module Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value type destinationAddress subjectText bodyText sendMessage No No The type of medium through which the message is sent The address to which the message is sent The subject of a message to be sent The body text of a message to be sent
477. ult unqualified gt lt xs element name Navigation gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs all gt lt xs element ref NavigationItems minOccurs 0 gt lt xs all gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs element gt lt xs element name NavigationItems gt lt xs complexType gt 8 104 Administrator s Guide m Commerce Applications lt xs sequence gt lt xs element ref Item minOccurs 0 maxOccurs unbounded gt lt xs sequence gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs element gt lt xs elemen lt xs lt xs lt xs lt xs lt xs lt xs at at at at at at tribute tribute tribute tribute tribute tribute t name Item gt lt xs complexType gt name target type xs string use required gt name label type xs string use optional gt name label_prefix type xs string use optional gt name label_suffix type xs string use optional gt name showAs type xs string use optional gt name preferredLocation type xs string use optional gt lt xs complexType gt lt xs element gt lt xs schema gt Show MyHome Link While the Show MyHome Link parameter is supported it is ignored when the Navigation XML file is valid a Show MyHome Link Controls whether to display My Home as a link or as a menu in each translated page It is only effective for microbrowsers a Valid Values none Does not display additional navigation items link Displays a hyperli
478. ult locale 2 4 2 15 2 2 1 Wireless Web Server The Wireless Web Server ptg rm determines the locale of a user in the following order 15 2 Administrator s Guide Determining a User s Locale 1 Use PAlocale if present 2 Use the user s preferred locale if the connecting user can be identified through the device id 3 Use the Accept_Language HTTP header if present 4 Use the site default locale 15 2 2 2 The Wireless Tools and Customization Portal The Wireless Tools and Customization Portal determine the location of a user in the following order 1 Use PAlocale if present 2 Use the site default locale 15 2 2 3 Async Listener The Async Listner determines the location of a user in the following order 1 Use the user s preferred locale if the connecting user can be identified through the device ID 2 Use the site default locale For more information see Section 15 2 4 15 2 3 Setting the Locale for a User Profile You can set a preferred location for a user when you create a user or edit a user profile If the preferred location is not specified then the default site locale is used For more information see Section 4 5 1 1 in Chapter 4 Managing Users 15 2 4 Setting the Site Locale From the Site Administration screen of the System Manager accessed through the Oracle Enterprise Manager Application Server Control you can specify the default site locale and add to the list of locales that
479. umber The application prompts the user for the number The user can say Cancel to return to the message Enables users to fax the body of a message and all of its attachments to a specified number The application prompts the user for the number The user can say Cancel to return to the message Faxes a specific attachment to the message You must test email using different types of messages to ensure that each message type functions Populate the Inbox with the following types of messages A message with the ampersand amp or other escape characters in the From field subject line or body A message with an audio attachment from Unified Messaging A message with a regular audio attachment A message with an audio reply generated by the voice email service A message with other attachments that have various names and characters especially space A lengthy message International messages 9 2 4 3 Testing the Calendar Application The calendar application enables users to listen to and create calendar appointments The application reads the appointments for the current day first Table 9 4 describes the Interrupt commands which enable a user to interrupt the playback of appointments at any point even after the playback of an appointment has completed 9 16 Administrator s Guide Configuring Wireless for Voice Applications Table 9 4 Interrupt Commands Command Description Next Appointment Prev
480. version of the deliverable content which was downloaded Device The name of the user device which downloaded the application Download Time The time of the download Download Status The status of the download 4 8 1 Selecting a Time Frame You can view the activity log for a specific period using the From Date and To Date fields You can set the starting and ending dates either by entering them in the fields in the mm dd yyyy format or by picking them from the calendars Click Go after you have completed entering the date range Note The default From date is midnight of the previous day Both the From and To dates assume midnight of the selected day 4 8 1 1 Printing an Activity Log You can print an activity log by clicking Printable Page This printed page contains text only and has no headers or footers Use the browser s Back button to navigate from the printed page 4 20 Administrator s Guide 9 Managing Content This chapter describes the Content Manager Each section describes how to use this tool These sections include a Section 5 1 Overview of the Content Manager a Section 5 2 Accessing the Content Manager a Section 5 3 Managing Application Links a Section 5 4 Defining Access Control a Section 5 5 Creating User Home Root Folders a Section 5 6 Categorizing Content a Section 5 7 Managing Alerts Deprecated 5 1 Overview of the Content Manager Using the Content Manager
481. ving Directions application and is built upon the Wireless Location Application Component API 8 4 4 1 Configuring the Maps Input Parameters This application requires aWireless mapping provider as described in Table 8 38 Table 8 38 Requirements for the Maps Application Name External Providers Instructions From Mapping Provider otn oracle com See the application providers 2 0 8 4 4 2 Configuration Parameters The Maps application includes the following input parameter Application Setup OMP URL The OMP reference to the URL group a Valid Values OMP URLs a Default Values OMP URLs a Examples omp oracle applications appsetup 8 4 4 3 Linking to the Maps Application You link to the Maps application using the following virtual URL omp oracle services location maps Configuring the Out of the Box Applications 8 73 Location Input Call Parameters Table 8 39 describes the input call parameters of the Maps application Table 8 39 Input Call Parameters of the Maps Application Parameter Name Mandatory Description Valid Value CN No FL No SL No LL No BL No CI No CT No ST No PC No PCE No CO No LT No LN No N No LMN No STATUS No The company name The first line of the address The second line of the address The last line of the address The block The city The county The state The postal code The postal code extension The country The latitude The long
482. wever only one of these can be configured for each mail service For the Wireless and Voice applications the following configuration parameter described in Table 17 2 is required to indicate which mail system is used for the notification backend For more information on setting this parameter see Section 8 3 7 Table 17 2 Configuration for the Email Notification Backend Parameter Description Possible Values Email System The type of email system OrcaleUM or Exchange that is configured with the current mid tier instance 17 4 3 Configuration and Running Notification Related Processes The Wireless notification architecture requires two standalone processes to run at the same time the Notification Event Collector process and the Notification Event Handler process After installation an instance of each process should be preconfigured and listed in the StandAlone Processes table on the Wireless Server home page Integrating Wireless Notification with Microsoft Exchange 17 21 Exchange Notification Administration in Oracle Application Server Wireless Note Each process in the Standalone Processes table is represented as a hyperlink enabling you to drill down to a detail page where you can start and stop a process view performance metrics or configure the process To turn on notification for Microsoft Exchange server click the link for a Notification Event Collector process to drill down the detail page Fr
483. y to save your changes Figure 9 2 Entering the OMP URL for the Voice Main Menu Logout View Log Help Wireless Publish Content Content gt Publish Content gt Root Folder gt Voice Main Menu You are logged in as Orcladrnin Pelle Edit Application Link General Apply Application Name Voice Main Menu OMP URL fomp foracle services voice mainmer Cancel Gem 9 2 3 2 3 Saving Presets in the Customization Portal To use the Mail Address Book Voice Mail Calendar or Files applications users must save their login credentials through the Wireless Customization Portal or from the Wireless and Voice Portal For the portal users must enter their user account credentials for the Mail Address Book Voice Mail Calendar and Files applications and click Save Password 9 2 3 2 4 Configuring the Voice and Wireless Applications By default the Mail Address Book Voice Mail Calendar and Files applications are configured out of the box with the installation of Oracle Application Server If you do not use Oracle Application Server however then you must configure the input parameters of these applications using the Content Manager as described in Steps 1 through 4 in Section 9 2 3 2 2 Wireless Gateway Configuration 9 11 Configuring Wireless for Voice Applications The online help invoked from the Content Manager provides you with instructions on editing the input parameters When editing the input p
484. ync enabled master application A short name is an easily referenced name for the application entered by end users when accessing applications from asynchronous devices Use the Up and Down arrows to prioritize the order in which these short names appear in a help message Configuring the OMP URLs for Module Applications If you opted to create a modular application link then you must enter the OMP URL address of the module application called in the Master Application screen Step 1 in the application link creation sequence All module applications are identified by the OracleMobile protocol OMP URL To create a modular application link you must define the following two parameters a Configure URL The URL for plugging in the module configuration page a Customization URL The URL for plugging in the module customization page Selecting DRM Policies for a J2ME Application If this application link is based on a J2ME application then you can also select a DRM digital rights management policy which controls the digital rights of the J2ME application by defining the user access to the application For example a digital rights policy can restrict the user s access to a downloaded application to a certain time period as in the case of a trial period or can limit the number of times a user can download an application The DRM policies are created by Foundation Developers using the Foundation Manager For more information see Section 7
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
PDF pdf pdf editor pdf to word pdffiller pdf to jpg pdf merger pdf combiner pdf converter pdf to excel pdf reader pdfescape pdf24 pdf compressor pdf to png pdf editor free pdf to word converter pdf24 creator pdf viewer pdf-xchange editor pdf to jpeg pdf files pdf history pdf to excel converter pdf converter free pdf24 tools